Toshiba e-studio 2555c Service Manual Download Page 153

Page: 153 / 1558

e-STUDIO2555C/3055C/3555C/4555C/5055C

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT

4 - 17

4.3.8

Platen sensor-1, -2 (S21, S22)

(1)

Remove the top rear cover.



P. 4-5 "4.1.14 Top rear cover"

(2)

Remove the rear top cover.



P. 4-5 "4.1.13 Rear top cover"

(3)

Remove 4 screws.

Fig. 4-44

(4)

Remove 1 screw and take off the platen
sensor assembly [1].

Fig. 4-45

(5)

Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove
the platen sensor-1 [2] and the platen
sensor-2 [3].

Fig. 4-46

Summary of Contents for e-studio 2555c

Page 1: ...AL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C e STUDIO2555CSE 3055CSE 3555CSE 4555CSE 5055CSE Model FC 2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C Publish Date December 2012 File No SME120065B0 R121021M7102 TTEC Ver02 F_2013 08 ...

Page 2: ...nd Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc in the U S and other countries PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated NOVELL NetWare and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell Inc FLOIL is a registered trademark of Kanto Kasei Ltd CORPORATION Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation Kapton is a registered trademark of E I du Pont de Nemours and Comp...

Page 3: ...r source The equipment must be grounded for safety Select a suitable place for installation Avoid excessive heat high humidity dust vibration and direct sunlight Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone To insure adequate working space for the copying operation keep a minimum clearance of 30 cm 11 8 on the left 80 cm 32 on the right and 20 cm 7 9 on the rear Th...

Page 4: ...at the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places e g rotating operating sections such as gears belts pulleys and fans Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON be sure not to touch live sections and rotating operating sections Use designated jigs and tools U...

Page 5: ...ea 6 Disposal of the Equipment Supplies Packing Materials Used Batteries and IC RAMs Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment supplies packing materials used batteries and IC RAMs including lithium batteries follow the relevant local regulations or rules Caution Dispose of used batteries and IC RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual Attention Se débarrasser de batter...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...s Gerät ist aus Sicherheitsgründen zu erden Einen geeigneten Standort für die Installation wählen Standorte mit zuviel Hitze hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit Staub Vibrieren und direkter Sonneneinstrahlung sind zu vermeiden Für ausreichende Belüftung sorgen da das Gerät etwas Ozon abgibt Um einen optimalen Kopierbetrieb zu gewährleisten muss ein Abstand von mindestens 80 cm links 80 cm rechts und 20 cm dahi...

Page 8: ...ziell gefährlicher Bereiche z B drehbare oder betriebsrelevante Bereiche wie Zahnräder Riemen Riemenscheiben und Lüfter sicherstellen dass das Gerät sich nicht bedienen lässt Beim Entfernen von Abdeckungen vorsichtig vorgehen da sich darunter scharfkantige Komponenten befinden können Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gerät dürfen keine unter Strom stehenden drehbaren oder betriebsrelevanten ...

Page 9: ...des Geräts der Verbrauchs und Verpackungsmaterialien alter Akkus und IC RAMs In Bezug auf die Entsorgung und Wiederverwertung des Geräts der Verbrauchs und Verpackungsmaterialien alter Akkus und IC RAMs einschließlich Lithiumakkus sind die einschlägigen nationalen oder regionalen Vorschriften zu befolgen Caution Dispose of used batteries and IC RAMs including lithium batteries according to this ma...

Page 10: ......

Page 11: ... LEDs heaters and coil 3 20 3 3 7 Thermistors thermostats 3 21 3 3 8 Others 3 21 3 4 Copy Process 3 22 3 5 Comparison with e STUDIO2050C 2051C 2550C 2551C 3 23 3 6 General Operation 3 25 3 6 1 Overview of Operation 3 25 3 6 2 Description of Operation 3 26 3 6 3 Detection of Abnormality 3 30 3 6 4 Hibernation function 3 38 3 7 Control Panel 3 39 3 7 1 General Description 3 39 3 7 2 Description of O...

Page 12: ...ption 3 80 3 17 Paper exit section reverse section 3 84 3 17 1 General Description 3 84 3 17 2 Functions 3 85 3 17 3 Reverse Motor Drive 3 86 3 18 Automatic Duplexing Unit ADU 3 87 3 18 1 General Description 3 87 3 18 2 Composition 3 88 3 18 3 Drive of ADU 3 89 3 18 4 Description of Operations 3 90 3 19 Power Supply Unit 3 91 3 19 1 General description 3 91 3 19 2 Functions 3 91 3 19 3 Operation o...

Page 13: ...4 5 10 Jam access cover 4 48 4 5 11 Transport roller 4 48 4 5 12 Jam access cover opening closing switch SW20 4 50 4 5 13 2nd drawer paper feed sensor S32 4 51 4 5 14 1st drawer paper feed unit 4 52 4 5 15 1st drawer separation roller guide 4 52 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 4 53 4 5 17 2nd drawer separation roller guide 4 54 4 5 18 1st drawer paper feed roller separation roller and pick up ro...

Page 14: ...n sensor S36 4 102 4 6 24 Waste toner paddle motor M7 4 102 4 6 25 Drum switching unit 4 103 4 6 26 Drum switching detection sensor S11 4 104 4 6 27 Mono color switching motor M3 4 105 4 6 28 Paper feeding developer unit drive motor M2 4 106 4 6 29 Developer drive unit 4 107 4 6 30 Toner motor assembly 4 110 4 6 31 Toner motor M8 M9 M10 M11 4 111 4 6 32 Ozone filter 4 112 4 6 33 Ozone exhaust fan ...

Page 15: ...ase detection sensor 2 S29 4 172 4 9 16 Fuser motor M4 4 173 4 9 17 Fuser drive unit 4 173 4 9 18 Pressure roller contact release motor M13 4 176 4 9 19 IH board cooling fan F6 4 178 4 10 Paper Exit and Reverse Sections 4 181 4 10 1 Reverse unit 4 181 4 10 2 Paper exit unit 4 183 4 10 3 Lower paper exit roller 4 184 4 10 4 Reverse motor M5 4 185 4 10 5 Reverse gate solenoid SOL2 4 186 4 10 6 Upper...

Page 16: ...em Recovery Mode 5C 5 27 5 11 1 Overview 5 27 5 11 2 Operation procedure 5 27 5 11 3 Functions 5 28 5 12 SRAM Clear Mode 6C 5 32 5 12 1 General description 5 32 5 12 2 Operation procedure 5 32 5 12 3 Functions 5 33 5 13 List print mode 9S 5 34 5 13 1 Operation procedure 5 34 5 13 2 List Printing 5 35 5 14 Pixel counter 5 48 5 14 1 Outline 5 48 6 SETTING ADJUSTMENT 6 1 6 1 Image Related Adjustment ...

Page 17: ... 59 6 3 9 PureBlack PureGray threshold adjustment Twin color mode 6 60 6 3 10 PureBlack PureGray threshold adjustment PS 6 60 6 3 11 PureBlack PureGray threshold adjustment XPS 6 60 6 3 12 Toner limit threshold adjustment 6 61 6 3 13 Sharpness adjustment 6 61 6 3 14 Thin line width lower limit adjustment 6 63 6 3 15 Offsetting adjustment for background processing 6 64 6 3 16 Color black judgment s...

Page 18: ...play Contents 7 3 7 2 4 Counter Clearing 7 4 7 3 General Descriptions for PM Procedure 7 5 7 4 PM Support Mode 7 6 7 4 1 General Description 7 6 7 4 2 Operational flow 7 6 7 4 3 Operational screen 7 7 7 4 4 Access tree 7 10 7 5 Work flow of parts replacement 7 12 7 6 Preventive Maintenance Checklist 7 13 7 6 1 Scanner 7 14 7 6 2 LED unit 7 15 7 6 3 Feed unit 7 16 7 6 4 Automatic duplexing unit 7 1...

Page 19: ...all 8 141 8 3 18 RADF related service call 8 145 8 3 19 Circuit related service call 8 146 8 3 20 LED head related service call 8 151 8 3 21 Finisher related service call 8 155 8 3 22 Image control related service call 8 183 8 3 23 Copy process related service call 8 200 8 3 24 Other service call 8 211 8 3 25 Error in Internet FAX Scanning Function 8 239 8 3 26 Printer function error 8 251 8 3 27 ...

Page 20: ...wing on Paper Trailing Edge 8 334 8 5 36 Staining on both sides of paper 8 337 8 5 37 Roller trace 8 338 8 5 38 Staining at the leading edge 8 339 9 REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS HDD 9 1 9 1 Removal and Installation of PC Boards HDD 9 1 9 1 1 SYS Board cover 9 1 9 1 2 SYS board case 9 2 9 1 3 SYS board 9 3 9 1 4 Hard disk HDD 9 4 9 1 5 IH board 9 5 9 1 6 LGC board 9 6 9 1 7 Switching regulator 9 8 9 1 ...

Page 21: ...1 30 11 5 Firmware Updating with K PWA DLM 320F 11 32 11 5 1 FAX unit firmware GD 1320 11 33 11 6 Confirmation of the updated data 11 35 11 7 When Firmware Updating Fails 11 36 11 7 1 Procedure 11 36 11 7 2 Flow chart for correcting USB update failure 11 37 12 BACKUP FUNCTION 12 1 12 1 Data Cloning 12 1 12 1 1 General description 12 1 12 1 2 Precautions 12 1 12 1 3 Backup files 12 2 12 1 4 Cloning...

Page 22: ...ESS CONNECTION 14 1 14 1 AC Wire Harness 14 1 14 2 DC Wire Harness Electric Parts Layout Appendix 14 2 1 DC Wire Harness Appendix 14 2 2 Electric Parts Layout Appendix 15 SELF DIAGNOSIS CODE 03 04 05 08 CODE 1049 Test mode 03 Test print mode 04 1049 Adjustment Mode 05 Codes 1060 Setting Mode 08 Codes 1238 APPENDIX 1 5 3 2 Preventive Maintenance Checklist 1532 Maintenance check list 1550 ...

Page 23: ...on mechanism for drawers is adopted Improving serviceability Developer material is pre filled in each developer unit Efficiency of serviceability such as the replacement of supplies is improved Adopting of LED for a new exposure lamp to scan originals An LED provides a stable amount of light immediately after emission and has a longer life comparing to a cold cathode tube No inverter board is requ...

Page 25: ... Fixing method Belt fusing system with external IH Photosensor type OPC Original scanning sensor Linear CCD sensor Scanning light source LED Resolution Scanning 600 dpi x 600 dpi Writing 600 dpi x 600 dpi color print Photo gray scale Gradation 256 Paper feeding 2 drawer Bypass feeding 2 drawer Bypass feeding PFP 1 drawer optional 2 drawer Bypass feeding PFP 2 drawers optional 2 drawer Bypass feedi...

Page 26: ...optional 64 g m2 to 105 g m2 17 lb Bond to 28 lb Bond Automatic duplexing unit Type Stackless Switchback type Acceptable paper size A3 A4 A4 R A5 R B4 B5 B5 R FOLIO 8K 16K 16K R A3 Wide 305 x 457 mm SRA3 320 x 450 mm 320 x 460 mm LD LG LT LT R ST R COMPUTER 13 LG 8 5 x 8 5 Full Bleed 12 x 18 Acceptable paper weight 60 g m2 to 256 g m2 17 lb Bond to 80 lb Cover Toner supply Automatic toner density ...

Page 27: ...ding on the settings use conditions and quality maintenance behavior such as toner refill Power requirements AC 110 V 13 2 A 115 V or 127 V 12 A 220 240 V 8 A 50 60 Hz The acceptable value of each voltage is 10 Power consumption 1 5 kW or less 100 V 115 V 2 0 kW or less 200 V series The electric power is supplied to the RADF Finisher PFP and LCF through the equipment Weight Approx 75 5 kg 166 4 lb...

Page 28: ...orage capacity Memory is full Original glass Original scanning system Flat surface scanning system the left rear corner used as guide to place originals Original type Sheets books Original size Max A3 LD Reversing Automatic Document Feeder optional Original scanning system Fixed scanning system by feeding the original the center used as guide to place originals Original type Sheets carbon bounded ...

Page 29: ...ified A4 LT 30 30 30 30 15 15 30 30 30 30 B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 x 8 5 A4 R B5 R LT R 23 23 23 23 15 15 23 23 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 13 LG 19 19 19 19 15 15 19 19 A3 LD 16 16 16 16 15 15 16 16 A3Wide SRA3 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT 35 35 35 35 17 17 35 35 35 35 B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 x 8 5 A4 R B5 R LT R 25 25 25 ...

Page 30: ...C CORPORATION All rights reserved SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 2 6 2nd drawer only A3 LD 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 A3Wide SRA3 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified ...

Page 31: ...wer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT 50 50 50 50 24 24 50 50 50 50 B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 x 8 5 30 30 30 30 24 24 30 30 A6 R 30 30 24 24 A4 R B5 R LT R 36 36 36 36 24 24 36 36 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 13 LG 29 29 29 29 24 24 29 29 A3 LD 25 25 25 25 24 24 25 25 A3Wide SRA3 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specifie...

Page 32: ...LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT 14 5 14 5 6 6 B5 A5 R ST R A4 R B5 R LT R 11 11 6 6 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 9 5 9 5 6 6 A3 LD 7 5 7 5 6 6 A3Wide SRA3 6 6 6 6 Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT 14 5 14 5 A3 LD 7 5 7 5 Copy mode Sec 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm Single sided originals Single sided copies 1 set 29 ...

Page 33: ...R2 Server 2012 Mac OS X Ver 10 4 or higher Solaris SUN HP UX AIX IBM Linux SCO Resolution Black 600 x 600 dpi 5bit 600 x 1200dpi 1bit PS only Color 600 x 600 dpi 5bit 600 x 1200dpi 1bit PS only Eliminated portion Black Color Leading edges 4 2 2 8 1 2 mm Trailing edges 4 2 1 2 2 8 mm Side edges 4 2 2 0 mm Interface Standard Ethernet 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T USB 2 0 High speed Optional Wireles...

Page 34: ...ument Size A3 B4 A4 A4 R A5 B5 B5 R A5 R LT LT R LG LD ST ST R Computer Folio Speed 0 7 sec per page A4 Max 50 spm ITU T No 1 A4 8 x 3 85 Text mode Gray scale 256 levels Error Diffusion Address book Address Book 400 stations Group Max 40 stations Transmission Features Broadcast transmission Max 80 destinations job Fax number and E mail address are available to registered in same job Message size l...

Page 35: ...lders per box Folder 100 Documents per box Docu ment 400 Pages per document Page 200 Number of maximum jobs Job 899 Scan Scan to File GB 80 Pages per job Page 1000 Number of maximum jobs Job 899 Except Print FAX interrupt FAX FAX Transmission GB 1 Shared with Rx and Tx FAX Reception GB 1 Shared with Rx and Tx Print Printer Data Spool GB 25 Pages per job Job Storage full Number of maximum jobs Job ...

Page 36: ...100 dpi Fine 200 x 200 dpi Super Fine 200 x 400 dpi Ultra Fine 400 x 400 dpi Internet Fax 200 dpi x 200 dpi Original Document Size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMPUTER Mail Box User defined Max 300 boxes Routed document format Send to e Filing MMR Send to File SMB Single TIFF Multi TIFF Single PDF Multi PDF Send to FTP Single TIFF Multi TIFF Single PDF Multi PDF Send to E mail Single TIFF Mul...

Page 37: ...rgentina JPD Japan Notes Check that the above accessories are correctly co packed at the time of unpacking Unpacking Setup instruction 1 set Operator s manual 1 set Safety Information 1 manual Quick Start Guide 1 manual DVD ROM 1 pc User Documentation Client Utilities Power cable 1 pc Warranty sheet 1 pc for NAD Setup report 1 set for NAD MJD and CND Rubber plug small 2 pcs Rubber plug large 2 pcs...

Page 38: ...550 Damp Heater Kit MF 2050CUA CEA Manual Pocket KK 1660 C Desk MH 2050 FAX Unit GD 1320 NX EUX AUX ASX C TW 2nd Line for FAX Unit GD 1260NA F EU F AUS F AU F TW C Wireless LAN module GN 1060 C Antenna GN 3010 C IP Sec Enabler GP 1080 Meta Scan Enabler GS 1010 External Interface Enabler GS 1020 Unicode Font Enabler GS 1007 Data overwrite Enabler GP 1070 Accessible Arm KK 2550 Harness kit for coin ...

Page 39: ...ation of the finisher MJ 1107 C or MJ 1108 C The finisher MJ 1036 N C N can be installed to 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm only The finisher MJ 1036 N C N is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit MJ 6007N E F S E C The finisher MJ 1107 C or MJ 1108 C is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit MJ 6104N E F S E C The antenna GN 3010 is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module GN 1060 C ...

Page 40: ...0UY for North America Central and South America PS ZTFC50EY for Europe PS ZTFC50DY for Australia PS ZTFC50CY CYS for China PS ZTFC50AY for Argentina PS ZTFC50PY PYS for Asia PS ZTFC50TY for Taiwan Toner cartridge M PS ZTFC50UM for North America Central and South America PS ZTFC50EM for Europe PS ZTFC50DM for Australia PS ZTFC50CM CMS for China PS ZTFC50AM for Argentina PS ZTFC50PM PMS for Asia PS ...

Page 41: ...ORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 1 3 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 1 Sectional View 3 1 1 Front side Fig 3 1 1 15 16 17 18 19 20 9 13 7 11 6 10 14 5 4 3 2 12 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 ...

Page 42: ...belt 16 Main power switch 4 Transfer belt cleaning unit 17 Registration roller 5 Waste toner box 18 Image quality control unit 6 Drum Y 19 2nd transfer roller 7 Drum M 20 Automatic duplexing unit ADU 8 Drum C 21 Paper exit section reverse section 9 Drum K 22 Fuser unit 10 Developer unit Y 23 Toner Y 11 Developer unit M 24 Toner M 12 Developer unit C 25 Toner C 13 Developer unit K 26 Toner K ...

Page 43: ...ION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 3 3 1 2 Rear side Fig 3 2 M1 F8 PS HVT F2 CLT1 M15 CLT3 CLT4 M7 CLT6 CLT5 M2 M14 M6 M4 M12 M5 F7 SYS M13 LGC M11 CLT2 M10 F6 M9 M8 M3 F5 F1 F4 DRV ...

Page 44: ...clutch L M6 Drum TBU motor F1 SYS cooling fan M7 Waste toner paddle motor F2 Ozone exhaust fan M8 Toner motor Y F4 Fuser section cooling fan M9 Toner motor M F5 Developer unit cooling fan M10 Toner motor C F6 IH board cooling fan M11 Toner motor K F7 Exit section cooling fan M12 ADU motor F8 Power supply unit cooling fan M13 Pressure roller contact release motor SYS System control PC board SYS boa...

Page 45: ...TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 5 3 2 Electric Parts Layout A Scanner unit control panel Fig 3 3 S21 DSP TCP KEY CCD M1 S25 S24 EXP S23 S22 ...

Page 46: ...UDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 6 B Toner cartridge waste toner box Fig 3 4 M11 M7 S9 M8 M9 M10 S36 CTRG CTIF CTRG CTRG CTRG ...

Page 47: ...TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 7 C Developer unit Fig 3 5 S1 SW16 SW13 SW14 SW15 M6 M3 CLT2 S11 SW12 SW11 SW10 SW9 S4 S3 S2 THM4 THM3 S12 ...

Page 48: ...e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 8 D Data writing Fig 3 6 LED1 ERS K ERS C ERS M ERS Y S10 LED4 LED3 LED2 ...

Page 49: ...3 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 9 E Fuser unit Fig 3 7 M4 S13 IH COIL S27 S28 THM1 S29 THM2 M13 THMO1 THM5 ...

Page 51: ... CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 11 G Paper feeding unit Fig 3 9 M2 M14 S19 S20 CLT1 CLT5 CLT6 CLT4 SW8 SW19 SW17 SW18 SW6 SW7 M15 S5 S34 S31 S35 S18 S30 S33 S32 ...

Page 52: ...55C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 12 H Automatic duplexing unit bypass feed unit paper exit reverse unit Fig 3 10 S16 S17 S15 S14 M12 S26 SOL2 M5 CLT3 ...

Page 53: ... CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 13 I PC board power supply fan Fig 3 11 F4 IH F1 DRV Main memory SRAM PS F3 SW4 HDD F7 EEPROM F6 F5 HVT F2 ADU SYS LGC F8 FIL F9 ...

Page 54: ...e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 14 J Cover switch Damp heater Fig 3 12 SW5 DH2 DH3 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW20 DH1 THMO2 THMO3 ...

Page 55: ... toner Fig 3 4 24 9 M8 TNR MOT Y Toner motor Y Transporting toner from the Y toner cartridge to the developer unit Fig 3 4 36 7 M9 TNR MOT M Toner motor M Transporting toner from the M toner cartridge to the developer unit Fig 3 4 36 7 M10 TNR MOT C Toner motor C Transporting toner from the C toner cartridge to the developer unit Fig 3 4 36 7 M11 TNR MOT K Toner motor K Transporting toner from the...

Page 56: ...Registration pass sensor Detecting paper transport at the registration roller section Fig 3 8 14 5 S7 IMG POS SNR F Image position aligning sensor Front Detecting the density of a toner image test pattern developed on the transfer belt surface front Fig 3 8 14 6 S8 IMG POS SNR R Image position aligning sensor Rear Image quality sensor Detecting the density of a toner image test pattern developed o...

Page 57: ... original size Fig 3 3 10 12 S25 APS2 Automatic original detection sensor 2 Detecting original size for LT size Fig 3 3 10 12 S26 REV SNR Reverse sensor Detecting the transportation of paper at the paper exit section reverse section Fig 3 10 42 9 S27 FR RD SNR Fuser belt rotation detection sensor Detecting the rotation of the fuser belt Fig 3 7 5 10 S28 PR CR SNR1 Pressure roller contact release d...

Page 58: ...awer paper width detection switch Detecting the width of paper in the 1st drawer Fig 3 9 45 16 SW7 CST1 LGT SW 1st drawer paper length detection switch Detecting the length of paper in the 1st drawer Fig 3 9 45 16 SW8 CST1 SW 1st drawer detection switch Detecting the presence of the 1st drawer Fig 3 9 6 40 SW9 Y DRUM SW Y drum old new detection switch Detecting whether the Y drum is the old or the...

Page 59: ...eleasing of the transfer belt and the drum Fig 3 5 15 40 CLT3 SFB FEED CLT Bypass feed clutch Driving the feed roller of the bypass feed unit Fig 3 10 21 13 CLT4 CST2 FEED CLT 2nd drawer feed clutch Driving the feed roller of the 2nd drawer Fig 3 9 46 10 CLT5 FEED CLT H Transport clutch H Driving the feed roller High speed Fig 3 9 46 10 CLT6 FEED CLT L Transport clutch L Driving the feed roller Lo...

Page 60: ...d drawer Fig 3 11 9 27 IH PWA H IH Heater control PC board IH board Controlling the IH coil of the fuser unit Fig 3 11 9 23 FIL PWA FIL Filter PC board FIL board Filtering out the AC power noise Fig 3 11 8 25 Symbol Name Function Remarks P I EXP LP EXPO Exposure lamp Exposing originals Fig 3 3 11 3 LED1 LP LED Y LED print head Y Exposing the Y drum Fig 3 6 31 21 LED2 LP LED M LED print head M Expo...

Page 61: ...O FR Fuser belt thermostat Preventing overheating of the fuser belt Fig 3 7 38 1 THMO2 THERMO DRM DH L Drum damp heater thermostat Left Controlling the temperature of the drum damp heater Fig 3 12 4 16 THMO3 THERMO DRM DH R Drum damp heater thermostat Right Controlling the temperature of the drum damp heater Fig 3 12 4 22 Symbol Name Function Remarks P I TCP TCP Touch panel Displaying and entering...

Page 62: ...the paper by applying heat and pressure 4 Data writing The electrical image signals are changed to light signals by LED emission which expose the surface of the photoconductive drum 9 Blade cleaning While scraping off the residual toner from the drum by the blade 5 Development Negatively charged toner is made to adhere to the photoconductive drum producing a visible image 10 Discharging Eliminates...

Page 63: ... supply Toner cartridge replacing method Toner empty detection Density detection method Toner NAD T FC30 K T FC30 Y T FC30 M T FC30 C MJD T FC30E K T FC30E Y T FC30E M T FC30E C CND T FC30C K T FC30C Y T FC30C M T FC30C C OthersT FC30D K T FC30D Y T FC30D M T FC30D C K Black Y Yellow M Magenta C Cyan NAD T FC50 K T FC50 Y T FC50 M T FC50 C MJD T FC50E K T FC50E Y T FC50E M T FC50E C CND T FC50C K ...

Page 64: ...bber coated roller Surface PFA tube ø30 Heater lamp 570 W x 2 Fuser belt Resin base material belt Exothermic layer rubber coated belt Surface PFA tube ø30 Pressure roller Silicon rubber roller Surface PFA tube ø30 Heater lamp Pressure roller Silicon rubber roller Surface PFA tube ø30 Cleaning None Heater temperature ON OFF control and power control by thermistor Heater Heater lamp IH coil Process ...

Page 65: ...3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 25 3 6 General Operation 3 6 1 Overview of Operation Operation of equipment Operation during initializing pre running and ready Copying operation Drawer feed copying by the START button Bypass feed copying Interrupt copying ...

Page 66: ...to the home position The carriage moves to the peak detection position The exposure lamp EXP is turned ON Peak detection white color is detected by the shading correction plate The exposure lamp EXP is turned OFF READY WARMING UP is displayed 2 Pre running operation Pre running operation is started when the temperature of the fuser belt surface reaches a certain level Fuser belt rotation Fuser mot...

Page 67: ...the registration roller READY PRINTING is displayed 5 Printing operation 1 Color printing operation Mono color switching motor M3 turned ON The drum switching detection sensor S11 checks whether the equipment is in the color or black printing status and if it is in the black printing status the motor M3 is turned ON to switch the status to color printing Drum TBU motor M6 discharge LED Y M C K ERS...

Page 68: ... turned ON Main charger bias turned ON K developer bias DC and Paper feeding developer unit drive motor M2 turned ON 2nd transfer bias turned ON LED emission black image 1st transfer bias K turned ON 1st transfer of black image Black image is transferred to the transfer belt 1st transfer bias K turned OFF 2nd transfer of K image K image on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper Main charger...

Page 69: ...ligning operation Paper reaches the registration roller After a certain period of time the bypass feed clutch CLT3 turned OFF 4 Hereafter operations 3 through 6 of 5 2 3Drawer feed copying 1st drawer paper feeding are repeated 5 Interruption copying 1 Press the INTERRUPT button LED INTERRUPT is turned ON Copying operation in progress is temporarily stopped and the carriages 1 and 2 return to appro...

Page 70: ...to the type of abnormality are displayed 1 Types of abnormality 1 Abnormality cleared without turning OFF the door switch A Add paper B Paper misfeed in bypass 2 Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the door switch C Misfeed in equipment D No toner in the cartridge E Developer unit not installed properly F Waste toner box replacement 3 Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the main po...

Page 71: ...alled Drawer is installed but there is no paper in it No paper A signal sent to the control circuit Drawer area of the control panel blinks When the drawer is selected START button is disabled When the power is turned ON or LCF drawer is inserted When the power is turned ON or equipment PFP drawers are inserted LCF performs initialization Detects the presence of paper Tray up motor ON The tray goe...

Page 72: ... the drawer is selected When the paper in the drawer gets short during copying The tray up sensor turned OFF The tray up motor turned ON Tray goes up Tray up sensor turned ON Tray up motor stopped Empty sensor turned OFF during the copying in spite of the tray up sensor is ON It is judged that there is no paper Drawer area of the control panel blinks When the drawer is selected The copying operati...

Page 73: ...reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 33 Bypass misfeeding Bypass misfeed symbol is displayed The copying operation is disabled Solution The bypass sensor S16 is turned OFF by removing the paper from the bypass tray ...

Page 74: ...ng operation is stopped Exit sensor S13 detects jamming of the trailing edge of paper Registration motor M14 turned OFF Fig 3 15 Fixed time Exit sensor S13 turned OFF If the exit sensor S13 is not turned OFF a fixed time Paper jam E020 The copying operation is stopped Immediately after the power ON Any of all sensors on paper transport path detects paper ON Paper jam E030 Front cover is opened dur...

Page 75: ...f time after the ADU motor M12 is turned ON Paper jam E110 During paper transporting from ADU ADU entrance exit sensors S14 S15 do not detect the paper at the fixed timing Paper jam E510 and E520 During paper reversing The reverse sensor S26 does not detect the paper at the fixed timing Paper jam E570 and E580 During paper feeding from the equipment or PFP The transport sensor S19 or the 2nd drawe...

Page 76: ... Control circuit Install new toner cartridge is displayed the copying operation disabled Solution Open the front cover and replace the toner cartridge with new one Toner is supplied copying operation enabled Disconnection of the connectors of the developer unit Latch the developer unit is displayed Solution Install the developer unit and close the front cover ...

Page 77: ...for service appears and handle the abnormality in reference to the error code table P 8 4 8 2 Error Code List Waste toner box is full of used toner Rotation of the paddle has not been detected for a specified period Dispose of used toner is displayed Waste toner box full is detected during printing Printing is stopped after the paper being printed is exited Solution Replace the waste toner box wit...

Page 78: ...tion is not performed when the power is turned OFF or the equipment boots up immediately after the settings warming up takes longer It differs depending on the usage conditions warming up will take approx 30 to 150 sec though it takes approx 20 sec if hibernation is performed normal situation The following are the conditions which necessitate a longer warming up time Rebooting from TopAccess First...

Page 79: ...LCD panel When paper jams and Call for service occur error codes are also displayed to notify users of the problem A color LCD is used in this equipment so that visibility and operability are improved The ON OFF button is placed on the control panel of this equipment Use this button instead of the main power switch to turn ON OFF the power Press the ON OFF button for 1 second or more to turn ON OF...

Page 80: ...55C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 40 3 7 2 Description of Operation 1 Dot matrix LCD circuit 1 1 Structure Fig 3 17 800 x R G B x 480 dots ...

Page 81: ...ious corrective processes necessary for image formation After that arithmetic operation is performed on the digital signal which is then transmitted to the data writing section In this equipment a reduction type CCD for color processing is used What this CCD differs from black and white CCDs is that its devices are arranged in 3 lines and covered with color filters Red Green and Blue These lines a...

Page 82: ... Original glass RADF original glass Carriage 1 Exposure lamp EXP Reflector Mirror 1 Carriage 2 Mirror 2 Mirror 3 Lens unit Lens CCD driving PC board CCD Automatic original detection sensor S24 Driving section Scan motor M1 2 phase stepping motor Driving the carriage 1 and carriage 2 Other Carriage home position sensor S23 Platen sensor 1 S21 Platen sensor 2 S22 ...

Page 83: ... under the ADF original glass by the carriage Do not use such solvents as alcohol when cleaning the surface of the ADF original glass because it is coated so as not to be scratched by originals 2 Carriage 1 Carriage 1 consists of the exposure lamp EXP reflector mirror 1 etc It is driven by the scan motor M1 and scans an original on the glass Fig 3 19 1 Exposure lamp 2 Reflector 3 Mirror 1 4 Origin...

Page 84: ...s also half that of the carriage 1 Fig 3 20 1 Mirror 2 2 Mirror 3 4 Lens unit The light reflected from the mirror 3 is led to the CCD placed at the focal point of the lens which is fixed in a position 5 CCD driving PC board CCD Processes such as signal amplification signal integration and A D conversion are applied on the electrical signal which was converted by CCD Fig 3 21 1 Lens 2 CCD board 6 A...

Page 85: ...nd carriage wire First the scan motor drives the carriages 1 and 2 to their respective home positions The home positions are detected when the carriage 1 passes the home position sensor S23 When the START button is pressed the both carriages start to move and scan the original on the glass Scanning of an original placed on the RADF The carriage 1 stays at the shading position during shading correc...

Page 86: ...sed and its tilt angle reaches approx 20 degrees the platen sensor 1 S21 detects that the platen cover is closed Figure B When this status is detected the exposure lamp of the scanner emits light Then the emitted light is reflected by the original and read to the CCD as original size data The light reflected from an area with no original placed is very little a size in the primary scanning directi...

Page 87: ...55C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 47 2 Detection points Sensor detection points A4 K Series Fig 3 24 Sensor detection points LT Series Fig 3 25 A5 R B5 R 16K R A4 R A3 B4 B5 8K A5 16K A4 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 7 Size 5 Size 6 Size 8 S24 ST R ST LT R LG LD LT Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 S24 S25 ...

Page 88: ...LED gap spacer keeps a specified distance between the LED print head and the drum The writing section radiates the LED light onto the photoconductive drum responding to the digital image signals transmitted from the scanner USB network etc to create the latent image Fig 3 26 1 LED print head Y 2 LED print head M 3 LED print head C 4 LED print head K 5 LED print head contact release lever Y 6 LED p...

Page 89: ...ges Therefore an LED gap spacer is a PM part due to possible difference in the gap caused by friction Also a dirty lens may cause image troubles such as blurring Fig 3 27 1 LED print head 2 LED gap spacer front rear 3 Drum 4 LED 5 Lens An LED and a lens cannot be disassembled as they are the components of an LED print head Two harnesses are connected to each LED print head from the LGC board One i...

Page 90: ...er is held down to the front side of this equipment the link arm is slid to the front side together with the lever Since the LED print head is positioned by the guide of the link arm it is lowered released as the guide is lowered A gap between the LED print head and the drum in a contacting status is kept at a specified value by the LED gap spacer Fig 3 29 1 Drum 2 LED print head 3 Link arm 4 LED ...

Page 91: ... of 4 units Drum TBU drive unit Development drive unit Monochrome color switching unit Paper feeding drive unit Fig 3 30 1 Drum TBU drive unit 2 Development drive unit 3 Monochrome color switching unit 4 Paper feeding drive unit 5 Drum TBU motor 6 Paper feeding developer unit drive motor 7 Mono color switching motor 8 Fuser unit drive section 9 Exit Reverse drive section 1 4 2 5 3 7 6 9 8 ...

Page 92: ...U drive unit is driven by the drum TBU motor to drive Y M C and K drums and the transfer belt unit TBU It also drives the contacting and releasing of the transfer belt Fig 3 31 1 Drum TBU motor 2 Drum TBU motor gear 3 TBU drive roller 4 Gear row of gears 5 Y drum 6 M drum 7 C drum 8 K drum 9 Y mixer 10 M mixer 11 C mixer 12 K mixer 1 2 4 5 6 8 3 7 9 10 12 11 ...

Page 93: ...Development drive unit Paper feeding drive unit The development drive unit and paper feeding drive unit are driven by the paper feeding developer unit drive motor to drive the developer unit and the paper feeding section Fig 3 32 1 Paper feeding developer unit drive motor 2 Gear row of gears 3 Coupling 4 K developer unit 3 2 1 4 ...

Page 94: ...e drum and the developer unit are not engaged Monochrome mode operation When the mono color switching motor M3 starts rotating the switching plate is moved and the monochrome color switching sensor S11 is turned ON The coupling cam is rotated with a movement of the switching plate and then the idling gear and the color drive gear are engaged Thus the rotation of the motor is transmitted to each ge...

Page 95: ...stem for these components The paper feeding developer unit drive motor M2 drives the above rollers Fig 3 34 1 Drawer 2 Feed sensor 3 Registration sensor 4 Registration roller 5 Registration pass sensor 6 Bypass feed roller 7 Bypass feed sensor 8 Bypass tray 9 Bypass separation roller 10 Separation roller drawer 11 Paper feed roller drawer 12 Drawer detection switch 13 Drawer empty sensor 14 Drawer...

Page 96: ...d sensor S32 Feed roller PM parts Separation roller PM parts Pickup roller PM parts Drawer detection switch SW8 SW19 Bypass unit Bypass feed roller PM parts Bypass separation roller PM parts Bypass paper sensor S16 Bypass tray slide guide width detection PC board S17 Bypass feed clutch CLT3 Paper feeding developer unit drive motor M2 Registration motor M14 Registration roller Registration sensor S...

Page 97: ...This is a transmissive type sensor and detects the availability of paper in the drawer by using an actuator When there is no paper in the drawer the actuator blocks the light path of the sensor and the sensor determines that there is no paper 6 Registration sensor S19 This sensor detects that the leading edge of the paper has reached the registration roller and the trailing edge of the paper has p...

Page 98: ...on 1 Drive of rollers The drive of each motor in the paper feeding area activates the paper transfer roller as follows Paper feeding developer unit drive motor M2 1st 2nd drawer feed clutch CLT1 CLT4 Bypass feed clutch CLT3 Feed clutch H L CLT5 CLT6 1st 2nd drawer feed roller Feed roller Registration motor M14 Registration roller Bypass feed roller ...

Page 99: ...r and paper can be fed Paper is fed and transported by transmitting the driving force from the paper feeding developer unit drive motor to the pickup roller paper feed roller and transport roller through the gears and clutch Paper is picked up by the movement of the feed clutch When the feed clutch is turned ON the pickup roller and feed roller rotate and the paper is picked up from the drawer The...

Page 100: ...to the transport roller When transporting paper they are turned ON The transport clutch Low speed is turned ON when the low speed transportation is performed for printing The transport clutch High speed is turned ON when high speed transportation is performed to transport the paper which has passed through the paper feed sensor to the registration position High speed transportation is also perform...

Page 101: ...Gear 3 Bypass feed clutch 4 Bypass feed roller 5 Separation of paper This model is equipped with a separation roller which works to prevent multiple paper feeding The separation roller is pushed to the paper feed roller by the spring force When two or more sheets of paper are fed since the friction between two sheets of paper is smaller than that between a sheet and the separation roller the lower...

Page 102: ...gistration motor is turned ON and the paper is transported to the transfer unit D Paper feeding Lower drawer The feed clutch and high speed clutch is turned ON and the pickup roller feed roller and transport roller rotate to start paper feeding The leading edge of paper turns the paper feed sensor ON and the feed clutch is turned OFF Pick up roller and feed roller stop rotating The leading edge of...

Page 103: ...he discharge LEDs are installed on the equipment side LED tray This chapter explains about the process unit and parts around this unit which are provided for image formation Except the developer unit which is one of units composing the process unit is described in chapter 3 12 in detail Fig 3 39 1 Toner Y 2 Toner M 3 Toner C 4 Toner K 5 Waste toner box 6 Developer unit Y 7 Developer unit M 8 Devel...

Page 104: ... 3 64 Fig 3 40 1 Drum 2 Drum cleaner unit 3 Toner recovery auger 4 Cleaning blade 5 Needle electrode cleaner 6 Discharge LED 7 Needle electrode 8 Main charger unit 9 Main charger grid 10 LED print head 11 Mixer 12 Auto toner sensor 13 Doctor blade 14 Developer sleeve Magnetic roller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 14 12 13 ...

Page 105: ...ng blade PM parts Recovery blade Toner recovery auger Main charger unit Main charger grid PM parts Needle electrode PM parts Needle electrode cleaner PM parts Developer unit Ch 3 12 Drum thermistor THM3 THM4 Discharge LED ERS Y M C K Temperature Humidity sensor S10 Ozone filter Ozone exhaust fan F2 High voltage transformer Drum TBU motor M6 Mono color switching motor M3 Developer unit cooling fan ...

Page 106: ... dark place negative charge is evenly applied onto the drum surface by the corona discharge and this grid In addition a cleaner is installed to clean up the dust attached on the needle electrode Needle electrode The needle electrode has aligned needles and their points perform the corona discharge These points electrodes discharge toward the drum in one direction to realize the more efficient disc...

Page 107: ...rum TBU motor K drum C drum Y drum The gears and drum couplings are assembled with high precision in order to improve accuracy of color overlay 11 Mono color switching motor M3 This motor switches ON OFF the transmission of drive to the Y M C drums When the motor rotates normally or reversely the gear of the motor moves the rack to shift the guides And this movement of the guides controls the tran...

Page 108: ...ng in a shorter life 3 2 Case in which the equipment needs to be shifted to the drum driving sleep mode frequently A When uneven density image problem in 94 mm pitch the circumference of the drum must be corrected The ozone exhaust fan keeps rotating for 1 minute after printing is finished The rotation noise is not so annoying during this period Therefore set 0 or 1 for 08 2383 so that the rotatio...

Page 109: ... positive polarity due to the friction with each other caused by mixing in the developer unit The charged toner is supplied to the photoconductive drum surface by means of a magnetic roller allowing it to adhere to the areas on the drum surface where the potential is lower than the developer bias which is applied to the magnetic roller Through this process the latent images are formed on the photo...

Page 110: ...ed OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 70 3 13 2 Composition Process unit Y M C K Drum cleaner unit Ch 3 11 Main charger unit Ch 3 11 Developer unit Developer material PM parts Mixer Developer sleeve Magnetic roller Doctor blade Auto toner sensor S1 S2 S3 S4 Paper feeding developer unit drive motor M2 ...

Page 111: ...sh of the developer material can contact with the drum surface properly 5 Auto toner sensor S1 S2 S3 S4 To print out a precise image the proportion toner density ratio of the carrier and the toner in the developer material needs to be always constant The magnetic bridge circuit in the black auto toner sensor detects the toner ratio in the developer material This sensor supplies the toner from the ...

Page 112: ...ction This function notifies the user of the near empty status of toner Normally the message Toner is low is displayed when the toner is running out and Toner empty when the toner cartridge is empty Toner remaining check notification function Upon detecting the near empty status of toner this function automatically notifies your service representative Image optimization function This function cont...

Page 113: ...ets for displaying the toner near empty status This code is used when the value of 08 5155 is set to 5 Sub code 0 K sub code 1 Y sub code 2 M sub code 3 C 3 13 5 Waste toner box The waste toner box is installed inside of the front cover and collects waste toner discharged from a cleaner for each color and the transfer belt cleaner The front cover is designed not to be closed without installing the...

Page 114: ...er To form a color image the images of yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K are transferred and overlaid on the transfer belt in order and then the overlaid images are transferred onto paper After the completion of the 2nd transfer the residual toner on the transfer belt is scraped off by the transfer belt cleaning blade and then transported to the waste toner box Fig 3 43 1 Transfer belt 2 TBU d...

Page 115: ...r Cleaner unit facing roller Belt clinging roller before 2nd transfer Lift roller 1st transfer roller cam motor M8 1st transfer roller status detection sensor S12 Transfer belt cleaning Transfer belt cleaning blade Waste toner auger 2nd transfer unit 2nd transfer roller PM parts Paper clinging detection sensor S18 Image position aligning sensor Front Image position aligning sensor Rear Image quali...

Page 116: ...he transfer belt The output voltage is then converted analog to digital to be output as the reflected light amount signal The light source amount voltage of the sensor is adjusted to correspond with the value set in advance and the output value of reflected light amount signal at this adjustment is stored This output value is considered as the reading of the belt surface Next the sensor outputs th...

Page 117: ...ser unit consists of the IH coil fuser belt pressure roller separation fingers separation guide thermistors thermostats etc The fuser belt in the fuser unit is driven by the fuser motor Fig 3 45 1 Fuser belt 2 Fuser belt thermostat 3 Fuser belt center thermistor 4 Fuser belt edge thermistor 5 Fuser belt side thermistor 6 Pressure roller 7 Separation finger 8 Exit sensor 9 Separation guide 10 Fuser...

Page 118: ...013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 78 Fig 3 46 1 Pressure roller contacting releasing cam 2 IH coil 3 Fuser motor 4 Pressure roller contact release motor Fig 3 47 1 IH board 2 IH board cooling fan 4 2 3 1 1 2 ...

Page 119: ...r THM1 Fuser belt edge thermistor THM2 Fuser belt side thermistor THM5 Fuser belt thermostat THMO1 Fuser belt Pressure roller Separation finger Separation guide Fuser belt rotation detection sensor S29 Pressure roller contact release motor M13 Pressure roller contact release detection sensor S27 S28 IH coil IH COIL IH board IH IH board cooling fan F6 Fuser section cooling fan F4 Fuser motor M4 ...

Page 120: ...set temperature the forcible power OFF circuit sends a power supply relay OFF signal as well as an overheating signal to the ASIC and then shuts OFF power supply over all parts except the control panel If the circuit noted above does not operate due to problems such as thermistor malfunction and therefore the fuser belt is abnormally heated the thermostat shuts OFF power supply to the IH coils to ...

Page 121: ...e chargers In this case check the bias high voltage transformers and needle electrodes to see if any of them is defective and also recheck all the data in the EEPROM When the thermistors detect overheating the engine CPU determines an error code and the fuser unit error status counter value After turning OFF each output from the heater lamp exposure lamp control panel motors and so on to protect t...

Page 122: ...the control circuit judges that the surface temperature of the fuser belt is extremely low and keeps turning the IH circuit ON As a result the surface temperature of the fuser belt rises and this possibly activates a thermostat which is a safety protection device To prevent this in advance the ASIC detects whether each thermistor is broken or not Also the control circuit constantly monitors the su...

Page 123: ... pre running end temperature or ready temperature is detected C449 22 Fixed 220 C or above 235 C or above On usual C445 5 Not fixed Ready temperature or above C446 6 Fixed During ready C449 23 Fixed 220 C or above 235 C or above On usual C447 7 Fixed 0 C or below C447 63 Fixed 0 C or below During printing C449 25 Fixed 220 C or above 235 C or above On usual C447 24 Fixed 0 C or below C447 64 Fixed...

Page 124: ...o not switchback The reverse section is a path only for switchbacking to the ADU to enhance the high speed printing The reverse section has the reverse gate which switches the transport path to the paper exit section or the reverse section Fig 3 49 1 Reverse section 2 Paper exit section 3 Fuser unit 4 Upper exit roller 5 Reverse sensor 6 Lower exit roller 7 Reverse gate solenoid 8 Reverse roller 9...

Page 125: ...of a paper jam in the reverse section and the detection of the trailing edge of the reversed paper at duplex printing as well 3 Reverse motor M5 The reverse motor is a stepping motor which drives the reverse roller and upper exit roller However this motor rotates reversely to switchback when the paper is transported to the ADU 4 Upper exit roller Reverse roller The reverse roller transports the pa...

Page 126: ...TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 86 3 17 3 Reverse Motor Drive The figure shown below is the layout of the driving gears of the upper exit roller and reverse roller Fig 3 50 1 Upper exit roller 2 Reverse roller 1 2 Forward Reverse ...

Page 127: ...ed for the ADU of this equipment A sheet of paper is switchbacked at the reverse section right after the printing operation fusing operation on one side is completed and the reversed sheet is transported to the registration section for the other side of the sheet to be printed The ADU mainly consists of the transport rollers and their drive system paper guide and ADU entrance exit sensor Fig 3 51 ...

Page 128: ...ORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 88 3 18 2 Composition Automatic Duplexing Unit ADU ADU motor M12 Stepping motor ADU entrance sensor S14 ADU exit sensor S15 Reverse sensor S26 ADU driving PC board ADU Upper transport roller Lower transport roller ...

Page 129: ...5C 4555C 5055C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 89 3 18 3 Drive of ADU When the ADU motor M12 rotates the upper transport roller and lower transport roller are rotated driven by the gears and belt Fig 3 52 1 ADU motor 2 Gear 3 Timing belt 4 Upper transport roller 5 Timing belt 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 130: ...of paper is performed at the registration section The paper passes through the lower exit roller and is transported to the inner tray to complete duplex printing There are three methods of judging a paper jam 1 whether the ADU entrance sensor is turned ON or not in a specified period of time after the switchback to the ADU started E510 2 whether the ADU exit sensor is turned ON or not in a specifi...

Page 131: ...events the noise generated by the equipment from leaking to the outside 2 DC output circuits Converts AC voltage input from outside to DC voltage and supplies it to each electric part The DC voltage is divided into the following two lines a Main power switch line Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process Two kinds of voltage 5VS and 12 VA are output when the main power...

Page 132: ...m the SYS board and then voltage starts being supplied to all the lines if no error was detected 5 Recovering from super sleep mode when receiving a packet When a packet from a network is received during the super sleep mode the mode is shifted to the sleep mode When packets are received frequently a control is performed to keep the sleep mode for a specified period If packets are received 42 time...

Page 133: ...e main switch of the equipment is turned ON and DC voltage is supplied to each board When the cover of the equipment is closed 24V DC voltage is supplied and the equipment enters into the ready printing state Sleep mode Since 24VD DC voltages are not supplied but 12VA and 5VS DC voltages only the equipment does not enter into the ready state Super Sleep mode Only DC voltage and 5VS are output from...

Page 134: ...ain power switch line The following are output channels for the cover switch line Cover switch line Connector Pin No Voltage Destination CN511 5 5VS SYS board RADF via SYS board 6 9 12VA 10 11 CN512 5 12VA LGC board 6 7 Connector Pin No Voltage Destination CN512 17 24VD1 LGC board HVT via LGC board ADU board via LGC board DRV via LGC board 18 19 24VD2 20 24VD3 CN513 1 24VD4 SYS board CN515 6 24VD5...

Page 135: ...M12 High voltage transformer HVT 24VD2 LGC board Fuser motor M4 F202 4 A Semi time lag Pressure roller contact release motor M13 Exit section cooling fan F7 Fuser section cooling fan F4 IH board cooling fan F6 Bridge unit JSP PFP LCF 24VD3 LGC board Sensor shutter solenoid SOL1 F203 4 A Semi time lag Reverse gate solenoid SOL2 Waste toner paddle motor M7 Reverse motor M5 Discharge LED K ERS K Disc...

Page 136: ...4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 96 24VD4 SYS board Scan motor M1 F204 4 A Semi time lag 24VD5 Finisher Finisher F205 4 A Semi time lag Voltage Board Unit Part Fuse type ...

Page 137: ...EPLACEMENT 4 1 Covers 4 1 1 Front cover 4 1 2 Left cover 1 Open the front cover 2 Loosen 2 screws and pull out the front cover 1 at an angle toward the lower front side Fig 4 1 1 Open the front cover and pull out the 1st drawer 2 Remove 5 screws and take off the small left cover 1 Remove the left cover 2 while pushing down on its handle Fig 4 2 ...

Page 138: ...ve the left cover P 4 1 4 1 2 Left cover 2 Remove the receiving tray 1 Fig 4 3 1 Remove the receiving tray P 4 2 4 1 3 Receiving tray 2 Remove the left rear cover P 4 3 4 1 6 Left rear cover 3 Remove 1 screw and take off the tray rear cover 1 by sliding it to the left Fig 4 4 1 Remove 2 screws and take off the left top cover 1 by sliding it toward the front side to release the latches Fig 4 5 ...

Page 139: ...he left cover P 4 1 4 1 2 Left cover 2 Remove the left top cover P 4 2 4 1 5 Left top cover 3 Remove 3 screws and take off the left rear cover 1 by lifting it up Fig 4 6 1 Remove 3 screws and take off the left rear cover 1 by sliding it toward the rear side Fig 4 7 1 Remove the right rear cover P 4 4 4 1 10 Right rear cover 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the top right cover 1 by lifting it up Fig ...

Page 140: ...nd 2nd drawers 4 Remove 2 screws and lift the right front cover 1 and take it off Fig 4 9 1 Open the jam access cover 2 Open the side cover 3 Remove 4 screws and take off the right rear cover 1 Fig 4 10 1 Remove the left top cover P 4 2 4 1 5 Left top cover 2 Remove the right top cover P 4 3 4 1 8 Right top cover 3 Remove 2 caps and 2 screws then tilt the control panel 1 45 degrees 4 Pull out the ...

Page 141: ...move the front top cover P 4 4 4 1 11 Front top cover 3 Remove 1 screw and take off the front right cover 1 while lifting it Fig 4 12 1 Remove the RADF or the platen cover 2 Remove the left top cover P 4 2 4 1 5 Left top cover 3 Remove the right top cover P 4 3 4 1 8 Right top cover 4 Remove the 2 screws and take off the rear top cover 1 Fig 4 13 1 If the RADF is installed disconnect the 1 connect...

Page 142: ...6 Front cover switch SW1 1 Remove 5 screws and take off the rear cover 1 Fig 4 15 1 Remove the front cover P 4 1 4 1 1 Front cover 2 Remove the waste toner box P 4 76 4 6 1 Waste toner box 3 Pull out the1st drawer 4 Remove 8 screws and then take off the inner cover 1 Fig 4 16 5 Remove 1 screw and take off the front cover switch bracket 1 Fig 4 17 ...

Page 143: ... 7 4 1 17 Front cover interlock switch SW2 6 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and remove the front cover opening closing switch 2 Fig 4 18 1 Remove the front cover switch bracket P 4 6 4 1 16 Front cover switch SW1 2 Remove 2 screws and disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and then take off the front cover interlock switch 2 Fig 4 19 ...

Page 144: ... board cover P 9 1 9 1 1 SYS Board cover 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 from the SYS board CN119 Fig 4 20 3 Remove the front top cover P 4 4 4 1 11 Front top cover 4 Lower the control panel unit 1 and remove 2 screws 5 Remove the control panel unit 1 while sliding it toward the upper side Fig 4 21 Notes When installing pass the harness through the harness clamp of the frame Fig 4 22 ...

Page 145: ... board 4 2 3 DSP board 1 Remove the control panel unit P 4 8 4 2 1 Control panel unit 2 Remove 8 screws and take off the cover 1 Fig 4 23 3 Remove 7 screws and disconnect 1 flat cable and take off the KEY board 1 Fig 4 24 1 Remove the control panel unit P 4 8 4 2 1 Control panel unit 2 Remove 8 screws and take off the cover 1 Fig 4 25 ...

Page 146: ...LACEMENT 4 10 4 2 4 Touch panel 3 Remove 4 screws and disconnect 1 flat cable and then take off the bracket 1 Fig 4 26 4 Remove 3 conductive sheets 1 disconnect the 2 connectors 2 and take off 1 flat cable 5 Remove the DSP board 3 Fig 4 27 1 Remove the DSP board P 4 9 4 2 3 DSP board 2 Remove the case 1 Fig 4 28 ...

Page 147: ... TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 11 3 Remove the touch panel 2 from the case 1 Fig 4 29 4 Disconnect the flat cable 2 from the touch panel 1 Fig 4 30 ...

Page 148: ... Original glass 4 3 2 Lens cover 1 Remove the right top cover P 4 3 4 1 8 Right top cover 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the original glasses 1 and 2 Notes Make sure that the original glass 2 is securely inserted into the groove of the fixing part of the original glass 1 Securely insert 2 pins of the original glass 1 into the holes in the frame Fig 4 31 1 Remove the original glass P 4 12 4 3 1 Ori...

Page 149: ...Remove 1 screw and take off the automatic original detection sensor 1 and 2 1 Notes Only the 20ppm 25ppm are equipped with automatic original detection sensors 1 and 2 A4 models are equipped only with automatic original detection sensor 1 and LT models are equipped with automatic original detection sensors 1 and 2 Fig 4 33 1 Remove the automatic original detection sensor P 4 13 4 3 3 Automatic ori...

Page 150: ...replacement of some parts are impossible in the field The lens unit must be replaced on a unit basis 2 Handle the lens unit with care Do not hold the adjustment unit or lens 3 Count the number of lines 3 and write it down for later reference before removing the CCD lens unit When installing the CCD lens unit the same number of lines needs to be visible 4 When replacing the lens unit do not touch t...

Page 151: ...ss P 4 12 4 3 1 Original glass 2 Remove the rear top cover P 4 5 4 1 13 Rear top cover 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and release 3 latches and remove carriage home position sensor 2 Fig 4 38 1 Remove the original glass P 4 12 4 3 1 Original glass 2 Remove the front top cover P 4 4 4 1 11 Front top cover 3 Remove 1 screw respectively from the front and rear sides and take off the fixing bracket 1 ...

Page 152: ...is placed in the correct orientation Fig 4 41 1 Remove the top rear cover P 4 5 4 1 14 Top rear cover 2 Remove the rear top cover P 4 5 4 1 13 Rear top cover 3 Remove 2 screws and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and take off the scan motor assembly 2 Notes When installing the scan motor use the belt tension jig P 6 80 6 6 3 Belt tension adjustment of the Scan motor Fig 4 42 4 Remove 2 screws and take...

Page 153: ... Platen sensor 1 2 S21 S22 1 Remove the top rear cover P 4 5 4 1 14 Top rear cover 2 Remove the rear top cover P 4 5 4 1 13 Rear top cover 3 Remove 4 screws Fig 4 44 4 Remove 1 screw and take off the platen sensor assembly 1 Fig 4 45 5 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the platen sensor 1 2 and the platen sensor 2 3 Fig 4 46 ...

Page 154: ...riginal glass P 4 12 4 3 1 Original glass 2 Remove the rear top cover P 4 5 4 1 13 Rear top cover 3 Remove the front top cover P 4 4 4 1 11 Front top cover 4 Move carriage 1 1 to the leftmost side and make sure that the screws on carriage 1 are showing Fig 4 47 Notes To move the carriage manually rotate the drive pulley Fig 4 48 5 Remove 2 screws Fig 4 49 ...

Page 155: ...otes Follow the procedure below to connect the exposure lamp harness 1 Push carriage 1 and 2 to the leftmost side and fix carriage 1 2 Securely install the exposure lamp harness on the cable guide and SYS board 3 After connecting the exposure lamp harness move carriage 1 to the leftmost side and check the lamp harness for any twists Fig 4 51 1 Remove carriage 1 P 4 18 4 3 9 Carriage 1 2 Move carri...

Page 156: ...e slot of the wire holder jig 1 and be passed under the jig arm 2 3 When installing the wire holder jig be careful of the orientation Fig 4 53 4 Remove the tension springs 1 in the front and rear sides 5 Remove the carriage wire 2 Fig 4 54 6 Rotate carriage 2 1 in the direction shown in the figure while trying not to touch the mirror Then remove carriage 2 1 Notes Replace mirror 2 and 3 together w...

Page 157: ...the carriage wire and install a new wire 1 Wire pulley 2 Carriage wire 3 Carriage 2 4 Idler pulley 5 Hook 6 Tension spring 7 Front side 8 Rear side Notes It is not necessary to adjust the carriage wire tension since a certain tension is applied to the carriage wires through the tension springs Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal Fig 4 56 Fig 4 57 3 4 6 1 5 2 7 3 4 6 1 5 2 8 ...

Page 158: ...7 Black 8 Silver Notes When winding the wire onto the pulley be sure to note the following Do not twist the wire Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space between them Fig 4 58 Fig 4 59 3 After winding the wires around the pulleys attach the wire holder jigs to p...

Page 159: ...SASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 23 4 3 11 Scanner damp heater DH1 Notes Turn the power of the equipment OFF and unplug the power cable before the disassembly and installation 1 Remove the original glass P 4 12 4 3 1 Original glass 2 Remove 1 connector Fig 4 61 3 Remove the scanner damp heater Fig 4 62 ...

Page 160: ...ACEMENT 4 24 4 4 LED Unit 4 4 1 LED Tray 1 Remove the cleaner unit P 4 87 4 6 9 Cleaner unit 2 Remove the high voltage transformer P 9 9 9 1 8 High voltage transformer HVT 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 Fig 4 63 4 Remove the flat cable cover 1 Fig 4 64 5 Disconnect 4 LED connectors 1 and 4 flat cables 2 Fig 4 65 ...

Page 161: ... and lock it securely Confirm that the tabs are in the positions shown in the right figure Fig 4 66 Notes Only rotation movement max 90 degrees is allowed for the locking lever of the connector Never apply excessive force to the lever In addition be sure not to pull the lever or not to catch its top with your nails Fig 4 67 Notes When installing the flat cable be careful not to insert it at an ang...

Page 162: ...TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 26 6 Slide the harness guide 1 upward and tilt it to the near side Fig 4 69 7 Install the harness holding jig 1 Fig 4 70 Notes Store the 4 connectors 1 inside the jig Fig 4 71 ...

Page 163: ...D print head is a precision unit so be careful when handling it so that it is not subjected to impact or vibration When installing the LED tray attach the harness holding the jig and pass the harness through the hole in the frame The LED print head is an electrical part so be careful of static electricity when handling it In particular exercise great care when handling the LED print head connector...

Page 164: ...tricity when handling it In particular exercise great care when handling the LED head connector part If you accidentally touch the LED print head clean it using a dry cloth to remove stains If grease adhered to the LED head clean it with alcohol 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 Fig 4 75 4 Remove the discharge LED 1 Fig 4 76 1 Remove the LED tray P 4 24 4 4 1 LED Tray 2 Release 2 latches and remove t...

Page 165: ...served e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 29 3 Remove the LED print head contact release lever link 1 and lever 2 Fig 4 78 4 Press the contact release arm 1 to place the LED print head 2 into the contact state Fig 4 79 ...

Page 166: ... reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 30 5 Release 3 latches 1 on the right and then tilt the LED print head unit 1 toward the left side to remove it Fig 4 80 Fig 4 81 Notes Make sure that the plate spring 1 on the front of the LED print head unit is placed in the groove 2 Fig 4 82 ...

Page 167: ... 1 LED print head contact release lever link 2 Lever Fig 4 83 Make sure that the duct in the rear side is securely positioned without any clearance Fig 4 84 When installing the LED print head unit push both sides 1 and then the center part 2 of the head inside Then make sure that the head is securely installed After the link has been installed check the contact release operations Fig 4 85 ...

Page 168: ...emoving the flat cable change the lever position so that the connector is released and remove the flat cable by lifting it up slightly approx 7 degrees as shown in the right figure When connecting the flat cable to the connector insert the flat cable straightly and lock it securely Confirm that the tabs are in the positions shown in the right figure Fig 4 88 FFC Lever position Locked Lever positio...

Page 169: ...MBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 33 Notes When installing the flat cable do not push it in strongly When installing the flat cable be careful not to insert it at an angle Do not apply pressure to or damage the edge of the flat cable Fig 4 89 8 Release 6 latches and remove the LED printer head 1 Fig 4 90 Fig 4 91 ...

Page 170: ...eserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 34 Notes When installing the LED printer head make sure that the flanges 1 in the front and rear sides of the LED printer head are inside the flat spring 2 Fig 4 92 Fig 4 93 9 Remove the harness holder 1 1 connector 2 and LED print head 3 Fig 4 94 ...

Page 171: ...ISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 35 4 4 4 LED spacer 1 Remove the drum P 4 90 4 6 11 Drum and bushing 2 Remove the LED spacer 1 in the front side and the LED spacer 2 in the rear side Notes When attaching the LED spacer make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation Fig 4 95 Fig 4 96 Fig 4 97 ...

Page 172: ...SFB board cover 1 Fig 4 98 3 Disconnect 1 paper width detection PC board SFB board connector 1 Notes When removing the paper width detection PC board SFB board cover be careful not to drop the gear web washers or washers Fig 4 99 4 Fix the hinge stopper 1 on the front side as shown in the right figure Lift the bypass unit 2 up and move the projection portion of the bypass unit 2 to the wider part ...

Page 173: ... the wider part 2 of the groove Fig 4 101 5 Fix the hinge stopper 1 on the rear side as shown in the right figure Lift the bypass unit 2 up and move the projection portion of the bypass unit 2 to the wider part of the groove of the hinge stopper 1 then release the hinge stopper Fig 4 102 Notes When removing the hinge stopper 1 move the projection portion to the wider part 2 of the groove Fig 4 103...

Page 174: ... DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 38 6 Remove the paper holder release levers 1 and 2 Fig 4 104 7 Remove the paper holder 1 and spring 2 Fig 4 105 8 Pull the rear shaft of bypass tray 1 toward you and remove it from the bearing Then remove the front shaft and take off the bypass tray 1 Fig 4 106 ...

Page 175: ...ss feed roller 1 Open the bypass tray 2 Tip the paper holder release lever outward to release the pressure 3 Press the collar 1 toward the rear side and release the lock Fig 4 107 4 Remove the bypass feed roller 1 while pulling out it Fig 4 108 Notes Make sure that the coupling is engaged when the bypass feed roller is replaced Fig 4 109 ...

Page 176: ...ypass feed roller P 4 39 4 5 2 Bypass feed roller 2 Insert an object such as a blade edge of flathead screwdriver and lift the bypass separation roller 1 to remove it Notes Do not touch the bypass separation roller 1 as much as possible When installing the bypass separation roller 1 push it in from both sides while being as careful as possible not to touch it Fig 4 111 Fig 4 112 ...

Page 177: ...on PC board SFB board S17 Fig 4 113 Notes When replacing the parts or performing machine refreshment apply 1 rice sized grain of white grease Molykote HP 300 to the bushings 1 of the bypass separation roller Fig 4 114 1 Slide the slide tray of the bypass unit 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the paper width detection PC board SFB board cover 1 Fig 4 115 1 ...

Page 178: ...tection PC board connector 1 and remove the paper width detection PC board 2 Notes When removing the paper width detection PC board cover be careful not to drop the gear web washers or washers Fig 4 116 1 Remove the transport unit P 4 194 4 11 3 Transport unit 2 Press the flange 1 inside and remove the bypass feed roller 2 Fig 4 117 3 Remove the clip 1 shaft 2 and collar 3 Fig 4 118 ...

Page 179: ...egistration sensor S19 Feed sensor S20 4 Remove the sensor arm 1 and bypass feed sensor 2 Fig 4 119 1 Open the side cover 2 Release 2 hooks and disconnect the 1 connector 2 by pulling out the side cover switch 1 Fig 4 120 1 Remove the automatic duplexing unit ADU P 4 191 4 11 1 Automatic duplexing unit ADU 2 Remove 4 screws and then take off the stay 1 Fig 4 121 ...

Page 180: ...nsport guide Fig 4 122 5 Release the harness from the harness guide and disconnect the 1 connector 1 Fig 4 123 6 Remove 1 screw Slide the paper guide 1 toward the front side while pushing 3 of the rear support 2 of the paper guide 1 and then pull out the rear support 2 7 Slide the paper guide 1 toward the rear side while pulling the rear side of the paper guide 1 and then pull out the front suppor...

Page 181: ... 2 latches and remove the sensor bracket 1 Fig 4 125 9 Remove the feed sensor 1 and registration sensor 2 Notes When installing connectors connect the black wire harness to the feed sensor 1 and the blue wire harness to the registration sensor 2 Fig 4 126 1 Remove the registration motor P 4 70 4 5 34 Registration motor M14 2 Remove the 1 bushing 1 and1 gear 2 Fig 4 127 ...

Page 182: ...e clip 1 slide the roller shaft toward the rear side remove the front shaft and then take off the registration roller shaft 2 Fig 4 128 5 Remove the 2 bushings 1 1 E ring 2 1 gear 3 and pin 4 Fig 4 129 1 Remove 2 screws front rear While compressing the spring slide the holder in the direction indicated by the arrow to align it with the notch Then take off the holder and the spring Fig 4 130 ...

Page 183: ...AND REPLACEMENT 4 47 2 Remove the bushing holder bushing leaf spring and gear from the roller Notes When assembling attach the black spring on the rear side and silver sprint on the front side Fig 4 131 Fig 4 132 Notes Install the gear bushing and leaf spring in the orientation shown in the figure Fig 4 133 ...

Page 184: ... 1 connector 1 and take off the stopper 2 Fig 4 134 3 While pressing the rear hinge 1 against the front side remove the jam access cover 2 using the front hinge as a support Fig 4 135 1 Remove the paper feed drive unit P 4 71 4 5 35 Paper feed drive unit 2 Take off the right front cover P 4 4 4 1 9 Right front cover 3 Remove the automatic duplexing unit P 4 191 4 11 1 Automatic duplexing unit ADU ...

Page 185: ...5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 49 5 Remove 1 screw 6 Release two latches 1 and pull the transport guide 2 out toward you by sliding it toward the front side Fig 4 137 7 Remove the clip 1 Fig 4 138 8 Remove the transport roller 2 by sliding the bushing 1 toward the front side Fig 4 139 ...

Page 186: ...g switch SW20 9 Remove the 2 bushings 1 1 clip 2 1 E ring 3 and 1 gear 4 Fig 4 140 1 Remove the jam access cover P 4 48 4 5 10 Jam access cover 2 Remove 4 screws release the engagement of 3 projections 1 on the lower side and take off the cover 2 Fig 4 141 3 Release the 1 connector 1 and the latch and remove the jam access cover opening closing switch 2 Fig 4 142 ...

Page 187: ...er feed sensor S32 1 Remove the jam access cover P 4 48 4 5 10 Jam access cover 2 Remove 4 screws release the engagement of 3 projections 1 on the lower side and take off the cover 2 Fig 4 143 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 remove 2 screws and take off the cover 2 Fig 4 144 4 Release the latch and remove the 2nd drawer paper feed sensor 1 Fig 4 145 ...

Page 188: ... lock lever 1 clockwise and pull out the 1st drawer paper feed unit 2 toward the front side to remove it Notes When installing align the arrow of the 1st drawer paper feed unit with the guide before inserting Fig 4 146 1 Remove the 1st drawer paper feed unit P 4 52 4 5 14 1st drawer paper feed unit 2 Remove 2 screws from the separation roller 3 Release two latches 1 and remove the 1st drawer separ...

Page 189: ...e sized grain of white grease Molykote HP 300 to the place 1 shown in the figure and apply half a rice sized grain of white grease Molykote HP 300 to the 2 places 2 shown in the figure Fig 4 150 1 Pull out the 1st drawer 2 Pull out the 2nd drawer 3 Turn the lock lever 1 clockwise and pull out the 2nd drawer paper feed unit 2 toward the front side to remove it Notes When installing align the arrow ...

Page 190: ... drawer separation roller guide 1 Remove the 2nd drawer paper feed unit P 4 53 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 2 Remove 2 screws from the separation roller 3 Release two latches 1 and remove the 2nd drawer separation roller guide 2 Fig 4 152 4 Remove the E ring 1 and take off the shaft 2 Fig 4 153 5 Remove the shaft cover 1 Fig 4 154 ...

Page 191: ...maintenance apply 1 rice sized grain of white grease Molykote HP 300 to the place 1 shown in the figure and apply half a rice sized grain of white grease Molykote HP 300 to the 2 places 2 shown in the figure Fig 4 155 1 Pull out the 1st drawer paper feed unit P 4 52 4 5 14 1st drawer paper feed unit 2 Slide the guide to the front side Fig 4 156 3 Release the roller latch and remove the separation ...

Page 192: ...e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 56 Separation roller Fig 4 158 Feed roller Fig 4 159 Pick up roller Fig 4 160 ...

Page 193: ...19 2nd drawer paper feed roller separation roller and pick up roller 1 Pull out the 2nd drawer paper feed unit P 4 53 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 2 Slide the guide to the front side Fig 4 161 3 Release the roller latch and remove the separation roller 1 feed roller 2 and pick up roller 3 Fig 4 162 Separation roller Fig 4 163 ...

Page 194: ... drawer paper feed unit 2 Pull out the 2nd drawer paper feed unit P 4 53 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 3 Remove the tray up motor unit P 4 59 4 5 22 Tray up motor unit 4 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 from the rear side 5 Release the latch from the rear side and remove the 1st drawer detection switch 2 from the front side Notes Install the 1st drawer detection switch so that the connector can be...

Page 195: ...connect the 1 connector 1 from the rear side 5 Release the latch from the rear side and remove the 2nd drawer detection switch 2 from the front side Notes Install the 2nd drawer detection switch so that the connector can be installed from the right side when viewed from the rear side Fig 4 167 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove the ozone exhaust fan duct hook 3 Disconnect the...

Page 196: ...M15 4 5 24 1st drawer paper remaining sensor S30 1 Remove the tray up motor unit P 4 59 4 5 22 Tray up motor unit 2 Release 6 latches and remove the cover 1 Fig 4 170 3 Release the harness from the harness guide and remove the tray up motor 1 Fig 4 171 1 Remove the tray up motor P 4 60 4 5 23 Tray up motor M15 2 Disconnect 1 connector 1 Fig 4 172 ...

Page 197: ... 5 25 2nd drawer paper remaining sensor S33 3 Release 6 latches and remove the cover 1 Fig 4 173 4 Release the latch and remove the 1st drawer paper remaining sensor 1 Fig 4 174 1 Remove the tray up motor unit P 4 59 4 5 22 Tray up motor unit 2 Release the harness from the harness guide 1 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 2 Fig 4 175 ...

Page 198: ...atches and remove the cover 1 Fig 4 176 5 Release the latch and remove the 2nd drawer paper remaining sensor 1 Fig 4 177 1 Pull out the 1st drawer paper feed unit P 4 52 4 5 14 1st drawer paper feed unit 2 Pull out the 2nd drawer paper feed unit P 4 53 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 3 Remove the tray up motor unit P 4 59 4 5 22 Tray up motor unit 4 Release the harness from the harness clamp 1 F...

Page 199: ... 179 Notes When installing pass the connector through the hole and fix it using the sensor holder projection 1 and latch 2 Fig 4 180 6 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and remove the 1st drawer empty sensor 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 3 and remove the 1st drawer tray up sensor 4 Notes When installing connectors connect the white connector to the 1st drawer empty sensor 2 and the yellow connector to t...

Page 200: ...aper feed unit 2 Pull out the 2nd drawer paper feed unit P 4 53 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 3 Remove the tray up motor unit P 4 59 4 5 22 Tray up motor unit 4 Release the harness from the harness clamp 1 Fig 4 182 5 Release the latch and remove the sensor holder 1 from the front side by sliding it toward the left side Fig 4 183 Notes When installing pass the connector through the hole and fi...

Page 201: ...p sensor 4 Notes When installing connectors connect the white connector to the 2nd drawer empty sensor 2 and the yellow connector to the 2nd drawer tray up sensor 4 Fig 4 185 1 Remove the high voltage transformer P 9 9 9 1 8 High voltage transformer HVT 2 Remove 1 spring 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 Notes Connect the yellow harness connector to the left side 3 Release the latch and remove t...

Page 202: ... 6 33 Ozone exhaust fan F2 2 Remove 1 spring 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 Notes Connect the yellow harness connector to the left side 3 Release the latch and remove the switch holder 3 Fig 4 188 4 Release the latch and remove the 2nd drawer paper width detection switch 1 and 2nd drawer paper length detection switch 2 Fig 4 189 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove the ozo...

Page 203: ...revent you from connecting the wrong connector install the harness that matches the engraved mark color 7 Release the harness from the harness guide Fig 4 191 8 Remove the transport clutch L P 4 70 4 5 33 Transport clutch L CLT6 9 Remove the 3 clips 1 and take off the 3 bushings 2 10 Remove 2 screws and take off the clutch cover 3 Fig 4 192 11 Remove the 1st drawer feed clutch 1 Fig 4 193 ...

Page 204: ...nd drawer feed clutch CLT4 Notes When installing the 1st drawer feed clutch attach the stopper to the projection Fig 4 194 1 Remove the clutch cover P 4 66 4 5 30 1st drawer feed clutch CLT1 2 Remove the 2nd drawer feed clutch 1 Notes When installing the 2nd drawer feed clutch attach the stopper to the projection Fig 4 195 Fig 4 196 ...

Page 205: ...C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 69 4 5 32 Transport clutch H CLT5 1 Remove the clutch cover P 4 66 4 5 30 1st drawer feed clutch CLT1 2 Remove the transport clutch H 1 Notes When installing the transport clutch H attach the stopper to the projection Fig 4 197 Fig 4 198 ...

Page 206: ...14 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove 1 clip 1 and disconnect 2 connectors 2 and take off the transport clutch L 3 Notes When installing the transport clutch L attach the stopper to the projection Fig 4 199 Fig 4 200 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove 3 screws and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and take off the registration motor 2 Fig 4 201 ...

Page 207: ...white grease Molykote EM 30L to the tooth surface of the gear and 1 or 2 rice sized grains of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the shaft Fig 4 202 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove the ozone exhaust fan duct hook 3 Remove 3 screws and release the bracket 1 Fig 4 203 4 Remove the transport clutch L P 4 70 4 5 33 Transport clutch L CLT6 5 Remove the registration motor P 4 70 4 ...

Page 208: ... the 3 connectors 2 9 Release the harness from the harness guide and harness clamp Fig 4 205 10 Remove 4 screws and take off the paper feed drive unit 1 Notes When replacing the gear remove the clutch cover Fig 4 206 1 Remove the paper feed drive unit P 4 71 4 5 35 Paper feed drive unit 2 Remove 3 clips and take off 3 bushings 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the clutch cover 1 Fig 4 207 ...

Page 209: ...REPLACEMENT 4 73 4 Disconnect 3 connectors 1 and remove the 1st drawer paper feed clutch 2 2nd drawer paper feed clutch 3 and transport clutch H 4 Notes When installing the clutch attach the stopper to the projection Fig 4 208 Fig 4 209 5 Remove 5 screws and take off the paper feed drive gear cover 1 Fig 4 210 ...

Page 210: ... CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 74 Notes When replacing the parts or performing machine refreshment apply 2 rice sized grains of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the shaft 1 Fig 4 211 6 Remove the paper feed drive gear Fig 4 212 1 ...

Page 211: ...ND REPLACEMENT 4 75 Notes When replacing the parts or performing machine refreshment apply 2 rice sized grains of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the shaft 1 and also 4 rice sized grains of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the tooth surface of the gear 2 Do not apply grease to the black gears Fig 4 213 1 1 2 ...

Page 212: ... P 4 76 4 6 1 Waste toner box 2 After pressing the lever 1 down while pressing down the developer unit cover level 2 hold the knob 3 and remove the developer unit 4 Fig 4 215 Notes When inserting the developer unit align the corner 1 of the developer unit guide with the R part 2 and the corner 3 of the developer unit with the R part 4 If the lid of the developer unit is not closed while you take o...

Page 213: ...art of the developer unit Fig 4 217 Notes When installing the developer unit 1 insert it carefully keeping it horizontal 3 If it is tilted especially if its leading edge is upward the upper part of the unit will catch the edge of the transfer belt 2 Pushing it will damage the belt Fig 4 218 1 Remove the developer unit P 4 76 4 6 2 Developer unit 2 Push the hook and take off the knob 1 by sliding i...

Page 214: ...D REPLACEMENT 4 78 3 Remove 1 screw 4 Release the 1 hook 1 and remove the developer unit cover 2 Fig 4 220 5 Lift the latch 1 on the front side of the upper cover and release the latch 2 from the developer case and developer sleeve shaft Fig 4 221 6 Release 6 latches at the side of the upper cover Fig 4 222 ...

Page 215: ...C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 79 7 Release the 2 latches in the rear side of the upper cover Fig 4 223 8 Remove the upper cover 1 Fig 4 224 Notes Do not remove the developer material adhering to the magnetic rubber in the upper cover Fig 4 225 ...

Page 216: ... drive gears or bushings If the developer material on the developer sleeve is hard to come off use a brush jig to clean it off 4407915710 BRUSH 33 Fig 4 226 1 Shake the developer material bottle and attach the nozzle to it 2 Pour in the developer until the mixer 1 under the developer sleeve is full Fig 4 227 3 Turn the knob 1 in the direction of the arrow shown on the cover until the developer mat...

Page 217: ... to the front side of the mixer under the developer sleeve Fig 4 229 5 Pour in more developer until the mixer 1 under the developer sleeve is full Fig 4 230 6 Pour all the remaining developer material into another mixer 1 Notes Fill the developer material in the mixer section under the developer sleeve as much as possible Check if the developer does not adhered to the joint of the upper cover Fig ...

Page 218: ...nstall the upper cover Notes After the installation check that all the protrusions and latches are fitted and locked securely Fig 4 232 Notes Do not install the upper cover from the rear side by tilting it as shown in the figure Fig 4 233 Notes Hook the latches and then install the cover while holding it from above Fig 4 234 1 2 ...

Page 219: ...4 6 5 Side seal Notes Check that the seal material is not folded down The folding allowance shall be 0 7 mm or less Fig 4 235 1 Discharge the developer material P 4 77 4 6 3 Developer material 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the doctor blade 1 Fig 4 236 1 Remove the doctor blade P 4 83 4 6 4 Doctor blade 2 Remove the side seal 1 Fig 4 237 MAX 0 7 ...

Page 220: ... unit Y Auto toner sensor S4 4 6 7 Development sleeve 1 Remove the corresponding the developer unit and then discharge the developer material out of the unit P 4 76 4 6 2 Developer unit P 4 77 4 6 3 Developer material 2 Remove 3 screws and take off the auto toner sensor cover 1 Fig 4 238 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 4 Lift the rib up and remove the auto toner sensor 2 by turning it clockwise Fig...

Page 221: ...ver 1 Notes When installing align the idler gear shaft to the hole of the gear holder 4 Disconnect the 1 connector 2 from the gear cover Fig 4 241 5 Peel off the kapton tape 1 45ppm 50ppm models only Notes When assembling use a new piece of kapton tape since once removed it is not reusable Attach the kapton tape along the angle of the developer case Fig 4 242 Fig 4 243 ...

Page 222: ...ring drive gear idler shaft and idler gear Fig 4 244 7 Remove the bearing 1 bearing holder 2 bushing 3 and developer sleeve 4 Fig 4 245 1 Remove the developer sleeve P 4 84 4 6 7 Development sleeve 2 Remove 2 clips 1 2 bushings 2 and the front bushing holder 3 Notes The parts 2 for the 45 50 ppm models are the bearings instead of the bushings Fig 4 246 ...

Page 223: ...e front side Fig 4 247 Notes When installing a separator turn the short collar 1 side to the left Fig 4 248 1 Remove the developer unit P 4 76 4 6 2 Developer unit 2 Press down the lever 1 and take off the cleaner unit 2 Notes Before removing the cleaner unit be sure to take off the developer unit for the corresponding color When installing the cleaner make sure to correspond to the color Fig 4 24...

Page 224: ...turn it clockwise to release the lock and then pull out the cleaner unit Fig 4 250 Notes When installing the cleaner unit 1 insert it carefully keeping it horizontal 3 If it is tilted especially if its leading edge is upward the upper part of the unit will catch the edge of the transfer belt 2 Pushing it will damage the belt Fig 4 251 1 Remove the cleaner unit P 4 87 4 6 9 Cleaner unit 2 Remove 1 ...

Page 225: ...TION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 89 3 Release 2 latches 1 and remove the cleaner cover 2 Fig 4 253 Fig 4 254 4 Pull down the main charger 1 and release 2 latches 2 Fig 4 255 ...

Page 226: ...ATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 90 4 6 11 Drum and bushing 5 Remove the main charger 1 Fig 4 256 1 Remove the main charger P 4 88 4 6 10 Main charger 2 Turn the bushing 1 clockwise and release the lock Fig 4 257 3 Remove the bushing 1 Fig 4 258 ...

Page 227: ...LACEMENT 4 91 4 Remove the drum 1 and bushing 2 from the cleaner Notes Be sure not to touch spit or scratch on the drum surface Avoid a direct sunlight onto the drum Move it to a dark place as soon as it is taken off Be sure not to touch or scratch the edge of the drum cleaning blade Fig 4 259 Fig 4 260 Fig 4 261 ...

Page 228: ...ights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 92 4 6 12 Drum cleaning blade 1 Remove the drum P 4 90 4 6 11 Drum and bushing 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the drum cleaning blade 1 Notes Be sure not to touch or scratch the edge of the cleaning blade Fig 4 262 Fig 4 263 Fig 4 264 ...

Page 229: ... 6 14 Waste toner unit gear 1 Remove the drum cleaning blade P 4 92 4 6 12 Drum cleaning blade 2 Remove the side seal 1 Fig 4 265 Fig 4 266 1 Remove the cleaner unit P 4 87 4 6 9 Cleaner unit 2 Remove the C ring 1 washer 2 spring 3 bushing 4 and waste toner unit gear 5 Notes To remove the gear and release the lock by raising the latch Fig 4 267 ...

Page 230: ... 4 94 4 6 15 Main charger grid 1 Remove the main charger P 4 88 4 6 10 Main charger 2 Pull the lever 1 Fig 4 268 3 Remove the main charger grid 1 Notes Do not touch the mesh area of the grid When installing the grid be careful not to let the urethane sheet adhered to the charge case get caught in it Fig 4 269 Fig 4 270 ...

Page 231: ...eserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 95 4 6 16 Main charger cleaner 1 Remove the main charger grid P 4 94 4 6 15 Main charger grid 2 Release the latch 1 and remove the main charger cleaner 2 Fig 4 271 Fig 4 272 ...

Page 232: ... the lever 1 Notes When installing the needle electrode be sure of the following Be sure that its needle comes at its top side Hook the needle electrode and the spring on both front and rear terminals securely Do not twist the needle electrode Do not touch the needle electrode directly with bare hands Fig 4 273 Fig 4 274 1 Remove the transfer belt unit P 4 130 4 7 3 Transfer belt unit TBU 2 Remove...

Page 233: ...SASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 97 5 Remove 3 screws Fig 4 276 6 Release the harness from the harness clamp 1 7 Remove 3 screws and take off the top frame of toner cartridge 2 by sliding it leftward to unlock it Fig 4 277 8 Remove 2 screws and take off the transfer belt cleaner guide upper 1 Fig 4 278 ...

Page 234: ...N All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 98 9 Remove 1 screw and take off the transfer belt cleaner guide lower 1 Fig 4 279 10 Remove 2 screws and take off the transfer belt rail rear 1 Fig 4 280 11 Remove 4 screws and take off 4 cleaner unit rails 1 Fig 4 281 ...

Page 235: ...ve 2 screws and take off the switch base 1 Fig 4 282 13 Release the latches and remove the drum old new detection switch 1 and developer unit old new detection switch 2 from the switch base Fig 4 283 14 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the drum old new detection switch 2 and developer unit old new detection switch 3 Fig 4 284 ...

Page 236: ...witches Y SW9 M SW10 C SW11 K SW12 Developer unit old new detection switches Y SW13 M SW14 C SW15 K SW16 Fig 4 285 1 Remove the discharge LED K P 4 27 4 4 2 Discharge LED 2 Remove 1 screw and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and take off drum thermistor 1 2 Fig 4 286 1 Remove the discharge LED M P 4 27 4 4 2 Discharge LED 2 Remove 1 screw and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and take off drum thermistor 2...

Page 237: ... 1 16 Front cover switch SW1 2 Lift the hook 1 and remove the temperature humidity sensor 2 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 3 Fig 4 288 Notes When installing align the temperature humidity sensor board to the groove and press it into the back until it is fixed Fig 4 289 1 Remove the waste toner paddle motor unit P 4 102 4 6 24 Waste toner paddle motor M7 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and remove the ...

Page 238: ... 6 4 1 16 Front cover switch SW1 2 Remove 1 screw and release the bracket 1 Fig 4 291 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 4 Remove 1 screw and release the duct 2 5 Release the harness from the harness guide 6 Remove the waste toner amount detection sensor 3 Fig 4 292 1 Remove the inner cover P 4 6 4 1 16 Front cover switch SW1 2 Remove 3 screws and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and then remove the wast...

Page 239: ...it 3 Remove the 2 E rings 1 1 washer 2 1 bushing 3 and 1 gear 4 Fig 4 294 4 Remove 2 screws and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and then take off the waste toner paddle motor 2 Fig 4 295 1 Remove the high voltage transformer P 9 9 9 1 8 High voltage transformer HVT 2 Release the harness from harness clamp remove 2 screws and take off the plate 1 Fig 4 296 ...

Page 240: ...Drum switching detection sensor S11 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 Fig 4 297 4 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 5 Remove 3 screws and take off the drum switching unit 2 Fig 4 298 1 Remove the drum switching unit P 4 103 4 6 25 Drum switching unit 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and remove the drum switching detection sensor 2 Fig 4 299 ...

Page 241: ...tor M3 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and release the harness from the harness guide 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the mono color switching motor bracket 2 Fig 4 300 4 Remove the arm 1 Notes When installing the mono color switching motor bracket put the gear projection 3 into the arm hole 2 Fig 4 301 Fig 4 302 ...

Page 242: ...e gear place a marking so that it can be re assembled at the same position Fig 4 303 6 Remove 1 screw and take off the mono color switching motor 1 Notes Pay attention to the size length of the screws If incorrect ones are used the motor could be damaged Fig 4 304 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 3 Remove 2 screws and then take off the paper feeding de...

Page 243: ...AND REPLACEMENT 4 107 4 6 29 Developer drive unit 1 Remove the drum TBU drive unit P 4 141 4 7 14 Drum and TBU drive unit 2 Remove the paper feed drive unit P 4 71 4 5 35 Paper feed drive unit 3 Release the harness from the harness clamp 1 4 Remove 4 screws and take off the developer drive unit 2 Fig 4 306 ...

Page 244: ...ive maintenance apply white grease Molykote EM 30L as noted below 1 Apply a thin coat of the grease to whole outer circumference of each shaft 2 Apply a thin coat of the grease to the tooth surface of each gear 3 Apply a coat of the grease to the whole sliding surface of each coupling 4 Apply a thin coat of the grease to whole outer circumference of each shaft Fig 4 307 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 245: ...e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 109 Notes When replacing the parts or performing machine refreshment apply 1 rice sized grain of white grease Molykote EM30 L to the front side 1 and the rear side 2 of the cam Fig 4 308 1 2 ...

Page 246: ... Toner motor M10 Toner cartridge K Toner motor M11 1 Remove the receiving tray P 4 2 4 1 3 Receiving tray 2 Pull out the toner cartridge 3 Release the latch and remove 4 toner cartridge rails 1 and 1 duct 2 Fig 4 309 Notes When installing the toner cartridge rail and duct securely align them so that the rail and duct latch are aligned in the toner cartridge holder groove Fig 4 310 4 Remove 2 screw...

Page 247: ...REPLACEMENT 4 111 4 6 31 Toner motor M8 M9 M10 M11 5 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 Fig 4 312 1 Remove the toner motor assembly P 4 110 4 6 30 Toner motor assembly 2 Release 2 latches and remove the gear 1 Fig 4 313 3 Remove 1 screw and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and then take off the motor bracket 2 Fig 4 314 ...

Page 248: ... AND REPLACEMENT 4 112 4 6 32 Ozone filter 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the toner motor 1 Notes Pay attention to the size length of the screws If incorrect ones are used the motor could be damaged Fig 4 315 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove the ozone filter 1 Fig 4 316 Fig 4 317 ...

Page 249: ... 113 4 6 33 Ozone exhaust fan F2 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the cover 1 Fig 4 318 3 Remove the harness clamp 1 and 3 screws and release the bracket 2 Fig 4 319 4 Remove the ozone exhaust fan duct hook and pull out the ozone exhaust fan duct 1 toward the front side Fig 4 320 ...

Page 250: ...ASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 114 5 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 6 Remove the ozone exhaust fan duct 2 Fig 4 321 7 Remove the ozone filter 1 8 Release 4 latches and remove the ozone exhaust fan duct 2 Fig 4 322 9 Release the harness from the harness guide and remove the ozone exhaust fan 1 Fig 4 323 ...

Page 251: ... 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 lift 2 latches up and remove the SYS board cooling fan 2 by sliding it toward the front side Fig 4 324 1 Remove the inner cover and front cover switch bracket P 4 6 4 1 16 Front cover switch SW1 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 and release the harness from the harness guide 3 Remove 1 screw and release the latch 3 and take off the suctioning fan cover 2 Fig 4 325 4 R...

Page 252: ...power supply unit cooling fan 1 Fig 4 327 1 Remove the drum and TBU drive unit P 4 141 4 7 14 Drum and TBU drive unit 2 Remove the drum TBU motor P 4 140 4 7 13 Drum TBU motor M6 3 Remove the 1st transfer contact release clutch P 4 138 4 7 11 1st transfer contact release clutch CLT2 4 Remove 4 screws and take off the K drum drive gear cover 1 Fig 4 328 Notes When installing the K drum drive gear c...

Page 253: ... TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 117 5 Remove 6 screws and take off the YMC drum drive gear cover 1 Fig 4 330 6 Remove the drum drive gear Fig 4 331 ...

Page 254: ...f each shaft 3 Apply a thin coat of the grease to whole outer circumference of each shaft 4 Apply a coat of the grease to the whole outer circumference of each shaft 5 Apply a coat of the grease to the whole inner circumference of each bearing 6 Apply 1 rice sized grain of the grease to the whole outer circumference of each gear boss 7 Apply 1 rice sized grain of the grease to the front side a and...

Page 255: ...l rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 119 Notes When replacing the parts or performing machine refreshment do not apply grease to the shaft 1 and the tooth surface of the gear 2 Fig 4 333 2 1 ...

Page 256: ...ENT 4 120 Notes When reassembling align arrows indicated on the gears 1 in the same direction as shown in the figure 2 Fig 4 334 4 6 38 Developer drive gear 1 Remove the drum and TBU drive unit P 4 141 4 7 14 Drum and TBU drive unit 2 Remove 3 screws and take off the developer drive gear cover 1 Fig 4 335 1 2 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 257: ...placing the parts or performing preventive maintenance apply an appropriate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the shaft 1 the tooth surface of the gear 2 and the sliding surfaces of the coupling 3 Fig 4 337 3 Remove the developer drive gear Notes When the gear has been replaced grease its teeth surface and the shaft Fig 4 336 2 1 1 3 ...

Page 258: ...ng fan F5 1 Remove the inner cover P 4 6 4 1 16 Front cover switch SW1 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and release the harness from the harness guide 3 Remove 1 screw and take off the suctioning fan cover 2 Fig 4 338 4 Disconnect the 4 connectors 1 and remove the main power switch 2 Fig 4 339 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 3 Release 2 latches and remo...

Page 259: ...23 4 Remove 2 screws Fig 4 341 5 Remove the harness and then release 2 latches and then remove the plate 1 Fig 4 342 6 Remove the developer unit cooling fan 1 Notes When installing place the developer unit cooling fan 1 as shown in the right figure Before installing the plate pass the harness through the duct window Fig 4 343 ...

Page 260: ...DH2 Notes Turn the power of the equipment OFF and unplug the power cable before the disassembly and installation 1 Pull out the 1st drawer 2nd drawer 2 Remove the waste toner box P 4 76 4 6 1 Waste toner box 3 Remove 1 screw and take off the cover Fig 4 344 4 Remove 1 screw and disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 345 5 Remove the drum damp heater Right side Fig 4 346 ...

Page 261: ...42 Drum damp heater Left side DH3 Notes Turn the power of the equipment OFF and unplug the power cable before the disassembly and installation 1 Remove the left cover P 4 1 4 1 2 Left cover 2 Loosen 2 screws and remove the shield cover Fig 4 347 3 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 348 4 Release the harness from 2 harness clamps Fig 4 349 ...

Page 263: ...nit 4 7 2 Transfer belt cleaning blade blade seal recovery blade 1 Remove the waste toner box P 4 76 4 6 1 Waste toner box 2 Hold the lever and pull the transfer belt cleaning unit 1 toward the front side to remove it Fig 4 351 1 Remove the transfer belt cleaning unit P 4 127 4 7 1 Transfer belt cleaning unit 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the transfer belt cleaning blade 1 Fig 4 352 ...

Page 264: ...erved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 128 3 Remove the front and rear blade seals Notes After the blade seals have been attached be sure that no gap is left between the blade seals and the edge of the transfer belt cleaning blade Fig 4 353 Fig 4 354 4 Remove the recovery blade 1 Fig 4 355 ...

Page 265: ...2 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 129 Transfer belt cleaning blade Fig 4 356 Blade seal Fig 4 357 Recovery blade Fig 4 358 ...

Page 266: ...hat you do not touch the surface of the transfer belt with bare hands 1 Remove the transfer belt cleaning unit P 4 127 4 7 1 Transfer belt cleaning unit 2 Pull the TBU release lever and turn it clockwise to release the 1st transfer roller Fig 4 359 3 Lower the 2nd transfer roller unit TRU 1 Fig 4 360 4 Pull the lever 1 loosen 2 screws to lower it and then pull out the transfer belt unit 2 Fig 4 36...

Page 267: ...o generate any friction between the transfer belt and the 2nd transfer roller unit when pulling out the transfer belt unit When installing the transfer belt unit make sure that the lever 1 is pulled out When installing the transfer belt unit push the handle unit 3 inside while the screw 2 is lowered Fig 4 362 1 Remove the transfer belt unit P 4 130 4 7 3 Transfer belt unit TBU 2 Remove the spring ...

Page 268: ... 1 on the front side Fig 4 365 5 Using the material that is packed with the transfer belt service part stand the transfer belt unit 1 on the waste toner box 2 Notes Use 1 piece of white urethane foam 138 x 138 x 25 mm with a 30 mm diameter hole Fig 4 366 Notes When installing make sure that the mark 1 of the transfer belt unit is aligned with the mark 2 of the waste toner box Fig 4 367 ...

Page 269: ...4 368 Notes When installing the transfer belt place the side with the serial number facing upward front side Install the transfer belt in the middle so that it does not move to one side Do not touch the belt surface directly with bare hands Be sure not to scratch the belt surface Check if the rib on both ends of the transfer belt does not run on the rollers Fig 4 369 ...

Page 270: ...ATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 134 4 7 5 Cleaner unit facing roller 1 Remove the transfer belt P 4 131 4 7 4 Transfer belt 2 Remove 1 screw gear 1 tensioner 2 2 bearings and take off the cleaner opposing roller 3 Fig 4 370 Fig 4 371 Fig 4 372 ...

Page 271: ...oller 1 Remove the transfer belt P 4 131 4 7 4 Transfer belt 2 Remove the drive roller 1 Fig 4 373 Notes When installing the driver roller correctly attach the spring 1 on the rear drive roller shaft Fig 4 374 1 Remove the transfer belt P 4 131 4 7 4 Transfer belt 2 Place the transfer belt frame upside down 3 Remove the rear shaft on the 1st transfer roller Fig 4 375 ...

Page 272: ... 7 8 2nd transfer roller 4 Pull the 1st transfer roller 1 toward the rear side and pull it out from the front shaft Fig 4 376 1 Open the side cover 2 Raise the stopper 1 and remove the 2nd transfer roller assembly 2 Fig 4 377 3 Remove the 2 E rings 1 collars 2 and stoppers 3 and then take off the 2nd transfer roller 4 Fig 4 378 ...

Page 273: ... 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 137 4 7 9 2nd transfer roller unit TRU Fig 4 379 1 Open the side cover 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the harness cover 1 Fig 4 380 3 Remove the 2 screws and 2 clips 1 disconnect the 1 connector 2 and then remove the 2nd transfer roller unit 3 Fig 4 381 ...

Page 274: ...ler unit TRU 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the paper clinging detection sensor 1 Fig 4 382 1 Remove the high voltage transformer P 9 9 9 1 8 High voltage transformer HVT 2 Release the harness from harness clamp remove 2 screws and take off the plate 1 Fig 4 383 3 Release the harness from harness guide 4 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and remove 1 screw Then pull up the latch toward the front side ro...

Page 275: ...nsor S12 5 Remove the 1st transfer contact release clutch 1 Fig 4 385 Notes When installing align the 1st transfer contact release clutch stopper 1 to the 1st transfer contact release clutch cover hole 2 Fig 4 386 1 Remove the drum and TBU drive unit P 4 141 4 7 14 Drum and TBU drive unit 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the 1st transfer contact release gear unit 1 Fig 4 387 ...

Page 276: ...g the 1st transfer roller status detection sensor pass the harness through the harness guide Fig 4 388 3 Remove the gear 1 4 Remove the 1st transfer roller status detection sensor 2 and disconnect the 1 connector 3 Fig 4 389 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove 2 screws and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and then take off the drum TBU motor 2 Fig 4 390 ...

Page 277: ...C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 141 4 7 14 Drum and TBU drive unit 1 Remove the high voltage transformer P 9 9 9 1 8 High voltage transformer HVT 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 Fig 4 391 3 Remove the flat cable cover 1 Fig 4 392 4 Disconnect the 4 LED connectors 1 and 4 flat cables 2 Fig 4 393 ...

Page 278: ...nd lock it securely Confirm that the tabs are in the positions shown in the right figure Fig 4 394 Notes Only rotation movement max 90 degrees is allowed for the locking lever of the connector Never apply excessive force to the lever In addition be sure not to pull the lever or not to catch its top with your nails Fig 4 395 Notes When installing the flat cable be careful not to insert it at an ang...

Page 279: ...rminals 1 Notes The number of the springs for the left side power supply terminal differs from the one for the right side power supply terminal Left side see from rear side 3 springs Right side see from rear side 2 springs Fig 4 398 7 Remove the drum switching unit P 4 103 4 6 25 Drum switching unit 8 Remove 7 screws disconnect the 3 connectors 1 release the upper hook and then take off the drum a...

Page 280: ...es When installing the drum and TBU drive unit insert the protrusion of transfer belt drive shaft release arm 1 into the lever hole 2 Fig 4 400 Notes When installing the drum and TBU drive unit put the drum and TBU drive unit hook 1 on the rear frame hole 2 Fig 4 401 9 Remove the transfer belt drive shaft release arm 1 Fig 4 402 ...

Page 281: ... transfer belt unit P 4 130 4 7 3 Transfer belt unit TBU 2 Remove 2 screws and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and then take off the image quality control unit 2 Notes The attachment screw on the rear side is a shoulder screw so exercise care when handling it during installation Fig 4 403 Fig 4 404 Notes Be sure to pass the harness of the image quality control unit through the harness clamp Fig 4 405...

Page 282: ...e quality control unit 2 Remove 2 screws and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and then take off the Image position aligning sensor Front 2 Fig 4 406 1 Remove the image quality control unit P 4 145 4 8 1 Image quality control unit 2 Remove 2 screws and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and then take off the image position aligning sensor Rear image quality sensor 2 Fig 4 407 1 Remove the image quality contr...

Page 283: ...e unit still heated should be removed wear a pair of gloves before working 1 Open the side cover 2 Press down the lever and remove the fuser unit 1 Notes The fuser unit is extremely hot When removing the fuser unit hold the handles of the unit to avoid a direct touch on the unit When installing the fuser unit be sure to press it in until the lever goes up If the lever goes down the fuser unit has ...

Page 284: ...SASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 148 Notes 50 is marked on the fuser unit for 45ppm 50ppm for identification To avoid incorrect assembly the fixing position of the bracket differs between the fuser units for 45ppm 50ppm and 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm Fig 4 412 Fig 4 413 Fig 4 414 ...

Page 285: ...the fuser unit P 4 147 4 9 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the front side cover 1 Fig 4 415 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 147 4 9 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the rear side cover 1 Notes When installing the cover put the harness into the harness guide so that it will not be pinched by the cover Fig 4 416 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 147 4 9 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 2 screws Fi...

Page 286: ...RATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 150 3 Release the latch 1 and take off the sensor cover 2 Fig 4 418 4 Remove 2 screws and then take off the separation finger 1 and springs 2 Notes Be careful not to pull springs out too far Fig 4 419 Fig 4 420 ...

Page 287: ...PLACEMENT 4 151 4 9 5 Separation guide 4 9 6 Exit sensor S13 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 147 4 9 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 7 screws and take off the separation guide 1 Fig 4 421 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 147 4 9 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 2 screws Fig 4 422 3 Release the latch 1 and take off the sensor cover 2 Fig 4 423 ...

Page 288: ... latch and take off the exit sensor 1 6 Disconnect the 1 connector 2 from the exit sensor 1 Fig 4 425 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 147 4 9 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove the front side cover P 4 149 4 9 2 Front side cover 3 Remove the rear side cover P 4 149 4 9 3 Rear side cover 4 Release the exit sensor P 4 151 4 9 6 Exit sensor S13 5 Remove the harness holder 1 6 Release the harness from the harness guid...

Page 289: ... 4 153 4 9 8 Fuser belt 7 Remove 1 screw and release the harness 1 from the harness holder Fig 4 427 8 Remove 2 screws and take off the paper exit guide 1 Fig 4 428 1 Remove the paper exit guide P 4 152 4 9 7 Paper exit guide 2 Release the stopper 1 and remove the harness holder 2 by sliding it to the rear side Fig 4 429 ...

Page 290: ...harness holder 1 Fig 4 430 4 Remove 4 screws and take off the separation guide frame 1 Fig 4 431 5 Remove 3 screws from the front side and take off the plate 1 6 Remove the gear 2 Notes When removing check that the pressure roller contact release cam 3 is located at the release position and also that the fuser belt and pressure roller are released 4 Fig 4 432 ...

Page 291: ...SSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 155 Notes When replacing the parts or performing preventive maintenance apply an appropriate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the shaft 1 and the points 2 where the shaft 1 and the bracket contact Fig 4 433 Release position Fig 4 434 Contact position Fig 4 435 1 2 ...

Page 292: ...ISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 156 7 Remove 1 screw in the rear side Fig 4 436 8 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 from the drawer connector 9 Remove 1 screw 10 Remove the harness guide 2 11 Release the harness from the harness guide 2 Fig 4 437 12 Remove the harness from the harness clamp 4 Fig 4 438 ...

Page 293: ... 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 157 13 Remove 3 screws 14 Remove the E ring 1 gear 2 pin and bushing 15 Remove the plate 3 Fig 4 439 16 Remove the fuser belt unit 1 Fig 4 440 17 Remove the collar 1 bearing 2 and gear 3 from the rear side Fig 4 441 ...

Page 294: ...l is running over more than 25 mm from the edge of the fuser belt wipe it off using alcohol If 25 mm or less wipe it off with a dry cloth Take care so that no damage or stains are detected on the fuser belt After reassembling the fuser belt check that there is no scratch on the surface and the edges of the belt and check that the grease has not adhered on the belt surface When installing the fuser...

Page 295: ...that the thermistor 6 of the fuser unit is not deformed when it is placed after the removal of the fuser belt The thermistor may be deformed if it is made to come to the lower side by turning the fuser unit Fig 4 445 Fig 4 446 1 Remove the fuser belt P 4 153 4 9 8 Fuser belt 2 Loosen 4 screws M2 6 Remove 1 screw 2 M2 6 Notes When handling the inside of the fuser belt unit position a towel or cushi...

Page 296: ...rved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 160 3 Remove the fuser belt pad 3 The fuser belt pad for the 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm models and for the 45ppm 50ppm models is different There are 2 protrusions in the center of the fuser belt pad for 45ppm 50ppm for identification Fig 4 448 Fig 4 449 Fig 4 450 ...

Page 297: ...reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 161 Notes When installing the fuser belt pad align 5 latches with the notches of the fuser belt unit Fig 4 451 4 Remove the fuser belt lubricating sheet Fig 4 452 Fig 4 453 ...

Page 298: ...ance evenly apply coat of the silicon oil over the whole surface of the fuser belt lubricating sheet Apply the silicon oil between the fuser belt pad and fuser belt lubricating sheet After applying the silicon oil check that there is no foreign matter adhering on the fuser belt lubricating sheet Reassemble immediately to prevent any foreign matter from adhering When reassembling check that there i...

Page 299: ...pm 1 Remove the fuser belt pad and fuser belt lubricating sheet P 4 159 4 9 9 Fuser belt lubricating sheet Fuser belt pad Notes Be careful that the thermistor of the fuser unit is not deformed when it is placed after the removal of the fuser belt The thermistor may be deformed if it is made to come to the lower side by turning the fuser unit The number of the thermistor differs between the 25ppm 3...

Page 300: ...ppm 50pm models 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm Silver 45ppm 50pm Black 1 Remove the fuser belt unit P 4 153 4 9 8 Fuser belt 2 Remove the 1 E ring 1 and 3 gears 2 Fig 4 459 Notes When replacing the parts or performing preventive maintenance apply an appropriate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the shaft 1 and the point 2 where the shaft 1 and the bracket contact Fig 4 460 3 Remove 2 screws from the re...

Page 301: ...12 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 165 4 Remove 2 screws from the front side and take off the pressure roller 1 Fig 4 462 ...

Page 302: ...e bearing flange is outside the plate The pressure roller for the 25 30 35ppm models and for the 45 50ppm models is different The edge of the shaft of the pressure roller for 45ppm 50ppm is colored blue for identification After a new pressure roller is installed in the frame of the fuser unit be sure to remove the protection sheet attached to the roller to avoid damaging or staining its surface Fi...

Page 303: ...over P 4 2 4 1 4 Tray rear cover 3 Remove the IH board cover P 9 5 9 1 5 IH board 4 Remove 2 screws and release 2 harnesses 1 from the harness holder 2 5 Feed out 2 harnesses 1 to the front side Fig 4 466 Notes Wire the IH harness as shown in the figure and secure the terminals horizontally Fig 4 467 Notes When assembling wire the IH harness pulled out from the rear frame by aligning it to the ins...

Page 304: ...55C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 168 6 Pull out 2 harnesses from the front side Fig 4 469 7 Pull out 2 harnesses from the IH COIL side Fig 4 470 ...

Page 305: ... All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 169 8 Remove 1 screw and take off the stopper 3 Notes When the IH coil is installed put its hook on the back side of the stopper Fig 4 471 Fig 4 472 ...

Page 306: ... AND REPLACEMENT 4 170 9 Lift the IH COIL 1 and remove 1 screw 10 Remove the IH COIL 1 by sliding it toward the left side Notes The IH coil differs between the 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm and 45ppm 50pm models To identify the IH coil for 45ppm 50ppm H is marked at the last digit as shown below Fig 4 473 Fig 4 474 ...

Page 307: ...EMENT 4 171 4 9 13 Fuser belt rotation detection sensor S27 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 147 4 9 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the mold 1 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 2 and remove the fuser belt rotation detection sensor 3 Notes When installing attach the mold projection 1 to the frame Fig 4 475 Fig 4 476 ...

Page 308: ...he fuser unit P 4 147 4 9 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the mold 1 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 2 and remove the pressure roller contact release detection sensor 1 3 Notes When installing attach the mold projection 1 to the frame Fig 4 477 Fig 4 478 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 147 4 9 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the plate 1 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 2 and remove the ...

Page 309: ...e P 9 2 9 1 2 SYS board case 2 Remove 3 screws and take off the fuser motor 1 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 2 Fig 4 480 1 Remove the SYS board case P 9 2 9 1 2 SYS board case 2 Release the harness from harness clamps remove 2 screws and take off the plate 1 Fig 4 481 3 Release the harness from harness clamps and disconnect 2 connectors 1 4 Remove 3 screws and take off the fuser drive unit 2 Fig 4 4...

Page 310: ...SSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 174 5 Remove the spring 1 Fig 4 483 6 Remove 3 screws and take off the bracket 1 Fig 4 484 7 Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket 1 bushing 2 gear 3 and pin Notes For 45 50ppm models the bushing 2 is replaced with the bearing and the color of gear 3 is white Fig 4 485 ...

Page 311: ...LACEMENT 4 175 8 Remove the clip 1 and gear 2 Fig 4 486 9 Remove 3 screws and take off the bracket 1 bushing and clip Fig 4 487 10 Remove the E ring 1 and take off the lever 2 Notes When installing the one way clutch 3 align the direction of the arrow shown on the one way clutch 3 with that on the plate Fig 4 488 ...

Page 312: ...elease motor M13 11 Remove 6 screws and take off the bracket 1 and gear Fig 4 489 Notes When replacing the parts or performing machine refreshment apply an appropriate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the shafts and the tooth surfaces of the gears Fig 4 490 1 Remove the fuser drive unit P 4 173 4 9 17 Fuser drive unit 2 Remove the spring 1 Fig 4 491 ...

Page 313: ...s reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 177 3 Remove 3 screws and take off the bracket 1 Fig 4 492 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket 1 bushing 2 gear 3 and pin Fig 4 493 5 Remove the gear 1 Fig 4 494 ...

Page 314: ...oller contact release motor 1 Notes Note the size length of the screws If incorrect ones are used the motor could be damaged Fig 4 495 1 Remove the high voltage transformer P 9 9 9 1 8 High voltage transformer HVT 2 Remove the SYS board case P 9 2 9 1 2 SYS board case 3 Release the harness from harness clamps remove 2 screws and take off the plate 1 Fig 4 496 4 Remove the flat cable cover 1 Fig 4 ...

Page 315: ...EMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 179 5 Disconnect the connectors connected to the LGC board 25 30 35ppm 35 connectors 45 50ppm 36 connectors Fig 4 498 6 Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket 1 Fig 4 499 7 Remove 5 screws and take off the LGC board case 1 Notes Hold the LGC board case and remove it Fig 4 500 ...

Page 316: ... All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 180 8 Remove 3 screws and take off the IH board cover 1 Fig 4 501 9 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and release the harness from the harness clamp Fig 4 502 10 Remove 2 screws and take off the IH board cooling fan 1 Fig 4 503 ...

Page 317: ...SEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 181 4 10 Paper Exit and Reverse Sections 4 10 1 Reverse unit 1 Remove the right rear cover P 4 4 4 1 10 Right rear cover 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the inner cover 1 Fig 4 504 3 Remove 2 screws Fig 4 505 4 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and remove the switch unit 2 Fig 4 506 ...

Page 318: ... Fig 4 507 6 Remove 1 screw Notes The screw on the front side is a shoulder screw When installing exercise care not to confuse it with other kinds of screws Fig 4 508 7 Lift the rear side 2 of the reverse unit 1 to release the rear side hook Slide the reverse unit 1 to the rear side 3 release the front side insertion and pull out the reverse unit 4 by tilting it Fig 4 509 ...

Page 319: ...ide of the reverse unit with the projection 2 Fig 4 510 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 147 4 9 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove the reverse unit P 4 181 4 10 1 Reverse unit 3 Remove 3 screws and take off the paper exit unit 1 Notes When installing the paper exit guide align the protrusion on the rear of the bottom of the screw hole with the frame hole and fit the drive gear shaft into the bearing Fig 4 511 Fig ...

Page 320: ...EMENT 4 184 4 10 3 Lower paper exit roller 1 Remove the reverse unit P 4 181 4 10 1 Reverse unit 2 Remove the 3 E rings 1 1 gear 2 and 2 bushings 3 then take off the upper roller 4 of the lower paper exit roller Fig 4 513 Fig 4 514 3 Remove the lower roller 1 and 2 springs 2 of the lower paper exit roller Fig 4 515 ...

Page 321: ...or M5 1 Remove the reverse unit P 4 181 4 10 1 Reverse unit 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 remove 3 screws and take off the reverse motor unit 2 Notes When installing the motor unit exercise care not to forget to attach the timing belt 1 Fig 4 516 Fig 4 517 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 remove 2 screws and take off the reverse motor 2 Fig 4 518 ...

Page 322: ...rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 186 4 10 5 Reverse gate solenoid SOL2 1 Remove the reverse motor unit P 4 185 4 10 4 Reverse motor M5 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the cover 1 Fig 4 519 3 Remove the harness from the harness guide 4 Remove the 1 spring 1 Fig 4 520 ...

Page 323: ...holding the plunger 1 with your hand remove the reverse gate solenoid 2 as shown in the figure on the right 6 Remove the plunger 1 Notes When installing insert the mold at the edge of the plunger into the groove of the reverse unit Fig 4 521 Fig 4 522 1 Remove the reverse motor unit P 4 185 4 10 4 Reverse motor M5 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the cover 1 Fig 4 523 ...

Page 324: ...ights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 188 3 Remove the 2 springs 1 applying pressure to the roller in the lower section of the upper paper exit roller Fig 4 524 4 Remove the 1 gear 1 1 clip 2 and 2 bushings 3 then take off the upper paper exit roller 4 Fig 4 525 Fig 4 526 ...

Page 325: ...fan F7 1 Remove the reverse motor unit P 4 185 4 10 4 Reverse motor M5 2 Remove the 1 gear 1 1 clip 2 and 2 bushings 3 then take off the revers roller 4 Fig 4 527 Fig 4 528 1 Remove the inner cover P 4 6 4 1 16 Front cover switch SW1 2 Remove the front right cover P 4 5 4 1 12 Front right cover 3 Remove 2 screws and disconnect the 1 connector 1 and take off the duct 2 Fig 4 529 ...

Page 326: ...e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 190 4 Release the latch and then remove the exit section cooling fan 1 Fig 4 530 ...

Page 327: ... from harness clamp Fig 4 531 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the wire end bracket 1 by holding up the automatic duplexing unit and sliding the bracket toward the rear side Notes When removing attaching the wire end bracket be sure to hold up the automatic duplexing unit so that the opening angle becomes smaller Fig 4 532 Notes After removing the wire end bracket hang it on the hook of the frame so ...

Page 328: ... outward and remove the rear shaft Notes During installation turn the rear hinge downward and then install the right rear cover Fig 4 534 4 Slightly lift up the automatic duplexing unit 1 and slide it toward the rear side to remove it Fig 4 535 Notes When installing the automatic duplexing unit fit the boss to the hole in the front hinge Fig 4 536 ...

Page 329: ...h CLT3 1 Remove the automatic duplexing unit P 4 191 4 11 1 Automatic duplexing unit ADU 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the clutch cover 1 Fig 4 537 3 Disconnect 1 connector 1 remove 1 leaf spring 2 and 1 bushing 3 and take off the bypass feed clutch 4 Notes When installing the bypass feed clutch attach the stopper to the projection Fig 4 538 Fig 4 539 ...

Page 330: ...sport unit 1 Remove the bypass feed clutch P 4 193 4 11 2 Bypass feed clutch CLT3 2 Remove the registration roller Rubber P 4 46 4 5 9 Registration roller Rubber 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 Fig 4 540 4 Remove 7 screws and take off the rear bracket 1 of the transport unit Fig 4 541 5 Remove 1 screw and take off the stopper 1 Fig 4 542 ...

Page 331: ...BLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 195 6 Remove 5 screws and take off the front bracket 1 of the transport unit Fig 4 543 7 Remove the bypass separation roller 1 separation roller holder 2 spring 3 paper guide lower 4 and paper guide upper 5 Fig 4 544 8 Remove 2 screws and take off the paper guide middle 1 Fig 4 545 ...

Page 332: ...ights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 196 4 11 4 ADU guide assembly 1 Remove the automatic duplexing unit P 4 191 4 11 1 Automatic duplexing unit ADU 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the cover 1 Fig 4 546 3 Remove 6 screws Fig 4 547 4 Remove 1 screw for earth wire Fig 4 548 ...

Page 333: ...4 197 4 11 5 ADU middle cover 5 Lift the 2nd transfer roller unit 1 up and remove the ADU guide assembly 2 by sliding it toward the right side Fig 4 549 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 196 4 11 4 ADU guide assembly 2 Remove 4 screws and take off the ADU upper cover 1 Fig 4 550 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 Fig 4 551 ...

Page 334: ...erved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 198 Notes For 45 50ppm disconnect the connector 1 of Fuser section cooling fan 2 Fig 4 552 4 Remove 3 screws and take off the ADU middle cover 1 Fig 4 553 Notes When installing the ADU middle cover align the transfer unit boss with the groove Fig 4 554 ...

Page 335: ...LACEMENT 4 199 4 11 6 ADU control PC board ADU board ADU 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 196 4 11 4 ADU guide assembly 2 Remove 2 springs and take off the side cover release lever 1 Fig 4 555 3 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 Fig 4 556 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the ADU control PC board ADU board 1 Fig 4 557 ...

Page 336: ...T 4 200 4 11 7 ADU motor M12 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 196 4 11 4 ADU guide assembly 2 Remove 2 springs and take off the side cover release lever 1 Fig 4 558 3 Remove 3 screws disconnect the 1 connector 1 and take off the ADU motor assembly 2 Fig 4 559 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the ADU motor 1 Fig 4 560 ...

Page 337: ... S14 4 11 9 ADU exit sensor S15 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 196 4 11 4 ADU guide assembly 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 release the latch and take off the ADU entrance sensor 2 Fig 4 561 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 196 4 11 4 ADU guide assembly 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 release the latch and take off the ADU exit sensor 2 Fig 4 562 ...

Page 338: ...he shaft 3 onto the rib and then take off the collar 4 on the opposite side to pull out the shaft Be sure to attach the belt when carrying out installation Fig 4 563 Fig 4 564 Notes When replacing both the transport roller and the collar or performing machine refreshment apply an appropriate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L inside of the collars 1 When applying the grease make sure that the ...

Page 339: ...3 1 Remove the ADU middle cover P 4 197 4 11 5 ADU middle cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector and release 2 latches and take off the reverse sensor 1 Fig 4 566 1 Remove the reverse unit P 4 181 4 10 1 Reverse unit 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the side cover interlock switch cover 1 Fig 4 567 3 Release the latches and take off the side cover interlock switch 1 Disconnect 2 connectors 2 Fig 4 568 ...

Page 340: ...sembly P 4 196 4 11 4 ADU guide assembly 2 Remove 4 screws and take off the ADU front cover 1 Fig 4 569 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and take off the fuser section cooling fan 2 Notes Install the fuser cooling fan so that the harness passes through the harness guide in the ADU middle cover Fig 4 570 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 196 4 11 4 ADU guide assembly 2 Remove 4 screws and take off ...

Page 341: ...A TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 205 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 and release 2 latches and take off the fuser section cooling fan 2 2 Fig 4 572 ...

Page 342: ...ng options turn the main power switch off and disconnect the power cable from the outlet 4 12 1 MR 3025 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the connector cover Fig 4 573 5 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 574 6 Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket Fig...

Page 343: ...3 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 207 7 Remove 1 screw and 1 washer Fig 4 576 8 Remove 1 screw Fig 4 577 9 Remove 2 screws Fig 4 578 ...

Page 344: ...Pedestal 10 Remove the reversing automatic document feeder by sliding it toward the rear side Fig 4 579 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove 5 screws and take off the cover Fig 4 580 5 Remove 1 screw and take off the harness holder Fig 4 581 ...

Page 345: ...RPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 209 6 Disconnect the connector and ground cable 1 Damp heater harness 2 Signal harness Fig 4 582 7 Install the cover Fig 4 583 2 1 ...

Page 346: ...55C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 210 8 Remove 3 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the rear side Fig 4 584 9 Pull out the drawer Fig 4 585 ...

Page 347: ...2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 211 10 Remove 3 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the front side Fig 4 586 ...

Page 348: ...LACEMENT 4 212 4 12 3 KD 1031 Large Capacity Feeder 11 Lift the equipment up and remove the paper feed pedestal Fig 4 587 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove 5 screws and take off the cover Fig 4 588 ...

Page 349: ...ights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 213 5 Remove 1 screw and take off the harness holder Fig 4 589 6 Disconnect the connector and ground cable 1 Damp heater harness 2 Signal harness Fig 4 590 2 1 ...

Page 350: ...055C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 214 7 Install the cover Fig 4 591 8 Remove 3 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the rear side Fig 4 592 ...

Page 351: ... 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 215 9 Pull out the drawer Fig 4 593 10 Pull out the large capacity feeder drawer Fig 4 594 ...

Page 352: ... 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 216 11 Remove 4 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the front side Fig 4 595 12 Lift the equipment up and remove the large capacity feeder Fig 4 596 ...

Page 353: ... the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the right rear cover P 4 4 4 1 10 Right rear cover 5 Remove 1 screw and take off the connector cover Fig 4 597 6 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 598 7 Remove 1 screw and take off the front cover of the bridge kit Fig 4 599 ...

Page 354: ...PORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 218 8 Remove 1 screw Fig 4 600 9 Remove 2 screws and take off the fixing bracket Fig 4 601 10 Lift the bridge kit up to pull out the hook and pull the bridge kit toward the front side to remove it Fig 4 602 ...

Page 355: ...Y AND REPLACEMENT 4 219 4 12 5 MJ 1036 Inner Finisher 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the connector cover Fig 4 603 5 Disconnect the connector Fig 4 604 6 Open the finisher cover Fig 4 605 ...

Page 356: ...OSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 220 7 Press the button to release the lock Pull out the finisher Fig 4 606 8 Remove 1 screw and take off 1 bracket Fig 4 607 9 Install the finisher inside the equipment Fig 4 608 ...

Page 357: ...012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 221 10 Remove 3 screws and take off the cover Fig 4 609 11 Remove 1 screw Fig 4 610 ...

Page 358: ...D REPLACEMENT 4 222 4 12 6 MJ 1108 Saddle Stitch Finisher 12 Remove the finisher Fig 4 611 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the connector cover Fig 4 612 5 Disconnect the connector Fig 4 613 ...

Page 359: ...ll rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 223 6 Remove 1 screw and pull out the lever Fig 4 614 7 Attach the caster front side with 2 screws and fix it Fig 4 615 8 Remove the finisher Fig 4 616 ...

Page 360: ...ACEMENT 4 224 4 12 7 MJ 1107 Finisher 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut down the machine 2 Turn the main power switch of the machine off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the connector cover Fig 4 617 5 Disconnect the connector Fig 4 618 6 Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket Fig 4 619 ...

Page 361: ... 8 MJ 6104 Hole punch unit 7 Remove the finisher Fig 4 620 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Take off the connector cover and disconnect the connector Fig 4 621 5 Take off the cover of the hole punch unit lower side Fig 4 622 ...

Page 362: ...ed DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 226 6 Remove 1 screw and take off the fixing plate Fig 4 623 7 Take off the finisher with the hole punch unit Notes Be careful not to fell the finisher when moving only the finisher unit Fig 4 624 8 Remove 2 screws and take off the connector cover Fig 4 625 ...

Page 363: ...erved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 227 9 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 626 10 Take off the cover of the hole punch unit lower side Fig 4 627 11 Remove 2 screws Lift up the hole punch unit and take it off Fig 4 628 ...

Page 364: ...rator 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the tray Fig 4 629 5 Remove 5 screws and take off the right rear cover P 4 4 4 1 10 Right rear cover 6 Remove 1 screw and take off the connector cover Fig 4 630 7 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 631 ...

Page 365: ...4 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 229 8 Remove 2 screws and take off the job separator Fig 4 632 ...

Page 367: ...mode 0 4 POWER Outputs the test patterns POWER OFF ON 100 P A4 TEST PRINT Adjustment mode 0 5 POWER Adjusts various items POWER OFF ON 100 A A4 TEST MODE Setting mode 0 8 POWER Sets various items POWER OFF ON 100 D TEST MODE Assist mode 3 C POWER Clears error flags or SRAM or safely deletes data in the HDD or SRAM to support the replacement of the SYS board SRAM or HDD POWER OFF ON HDD assist mode...

Page 368: ...l panel check mode 01 Operation procedure Notes A mode can be cancelled by POWER OFF ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking Button Check Buttons with LED Press to turn OFF the LED Buttons without LED Press to display the message on the control panel Button on touch panel Press to display the initial screen displayed at power ON Press execution on the touch panel and then the CLEAR button o...

Page 369: ...15 SELF DIAGNOSIS CODE 03 04 05 08 CODE Setting Code 08 Notes When the power should be turned OFF be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the ON OFF button for a few seconds Remarks In RAM the SRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated M stands for the LGC board SYS NIC or UTY stands for the SYS board Assist mode 3C Refer to P 5 20 5 9 Assist Mode 3C HDD assist ...

Page 370: ...555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE 5 4 Operation procedure SRAM data cloning mode 59 Refer to P 12 1 12 1 Data Cloning 4 8 9 POWER Operation started POWER OFF ON Exit ...

Page 371: ...USTMENT MODE 08 SETTING MODE 6S PM SUPPORT MODE 9S LIST PRINT MODE FAX LIST PRINT MODE CHART PRINT MODE Notes Not all codes of the self diagnostic mode can be used with Service UI Refer to 15 SELF DIAGNOSIS CODE 03 04 05 08 CODE for the codes available with Service UI 5 2 2 Login procedure 1 In the normal mode 1 Turn the power ON 2 Press the USER FUNCTIONS button 3 With the USER FUNCTIONS menu dis...

Page 372: ...steps below 1 Turn the power ON 2 Enter the user name and password on the USER AUTHENTICATION screen The password needs to be changed to log in for the first time Notes In case the password is forgotten ask the administrator to reset the service password In case both the service password and administrator password are forgotten the passwords can be reset in the password reset mode Note that the us...

Page 373: ...s up to the fifth level Then if you select the code and press the NEXT button the screen is switched to the adjustment mode or setting mode If you press the CLASSIC button on the screen in the first level the screen is switched to the adjustment mode or setting mode so that you can enter the code number When the modes other than 05 08 mode are selected The screen is switched to the selected mode 5...

Page 374: ...s when the input check is running Fig 5 5 Example of display during input check Refer to 15 SELF DIAGNOSIS CODE 03 04 05 08 CODE in this manual for the items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons A to H are highlighted The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the FAX button COPY button SCAN button and the digital keys in the test mode 03 0 3 POWER STAR...

Page 375: ...IS CODE 03 04 05 08 CODE in this manual for the codes available in the test mode 03 Status of the output signals can be checked in the test mode 03 0 3 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit START Code Operation ON Stop code Operation OFF START 0 3 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit START CLEAR Operation One direction Test mode standby Code 0 3 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Code START START Operation ON Test mode standby CLEAR O...

Page 376: ... Procedure 5 Notes When an error occurs it is indicated on the panel but the recovery operation is not performed Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error During test printing the CLEAR button is disabled when Wait adding toner is displayed Refer to 15 SELF DIAGNOSIS CODE 03 04 05 08 CODE in this manual for the codes available in the test print mode The embedded test pattern can be pr...

Page 377: ...START Test copy 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START OK or INTERRUPT Value unchangeable Value displayed FAX START Test copy 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START CANCEL UP or DOWN Adjust a value FUNCTION CLEAR Corrects value OK or INTERRUPT Stores value in RAM 0 5 POWER Digital key Code Digital key Sub code CLEAR Corrects value OK or INTERRUPT Press FUNCTION CLEAR to ent...

Page 378: ... 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key Sub code CLEAR Corrects value START START CANCEL or CLEAR CANCEL FAX START Test copy OK Stores value in RAM Automatic adjustment 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key Sub code START START START OK or INTERRUPT Value unchangeable Value displayed 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START CANCEL Digital key Key in a v...

Page 379: ...fore the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode In that case turn ON the power normally leave the equipment for approx 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START START Digital key Sub code FUNCTION CLEAR Corrects value CLEAR Corrects value OK or INTERRUPT FAX ...

Page 380: ... gradation steps C For checking the image of printer section 15 Secondary scanning direction 32 gradation steps K For checking the image of printer section 55 Grid pattern Full Color Thick paper 2 Refer to 6 1 6Paper alignment at the registration roller 56 Grid pattern Full Color Thick paper 3 Refer to 6 1 6Paper alignment at the registration roller 57 Grid pattern Full Color OHP Refer to 6 1 6Pap...

Page 381: ...paper 1 Refer to 6 3 1Automatic gamma adjustment 85 Printer gamma correction table confirmation pattern Special paper 1 Refer to 6 3 1Automatic gamma adjustment 86 Printer gamma correction table creation pattern Special paper 2 Refer to 6 3 1Automatic gamma adjustment 87 Printer gamma correction table confirmation pattern Special paper 2 Refer to 6 3 1Automatic gamma adjustment 88 Printer gamma co...

Page 382: ... Copier gamma confirmation pattern Color Thick paper 4 Refer to 6 2 1Automatic gamma adjustment 214 Copier gamma adjustment pattern Color black integrated Special paper 1 Refer to 6 2 1Automatic gamma adjustment 215 Copier gamma confirmation pattern Color Special paper 1 Refer to 6 2 1Automatic gamma adjustment 216 Copier gamma adjustment pattern Color black integrated Special paper 2 Refer to 6 2...

Page 383: ...er 4 PS 1200dpi Refer to 6 3 1Automatic gamma adjustment 244 Copier gamma adjustment pattern Special paper 1 PS 1200dpi Refer to 6 3 1Automatic gamma adjustment 245 Copier gamma confirmation pattern Special paper 1 PS 1200dpi Refer to 6 3 1Automatic gamma adjustment 246 Copier gamma adjustment pattern Special paper 2 PS 1200dpi Refer to 6 3 1Automatic gamma adjustment 247 Copier gamma confirmation...

Page 384: ...ue CLEAR Corrects value CANCEL 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START OK or INTERRUPT Adjustment value cannot be changed 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START CANCEL or CLEAR Automatic setting INITIALIZE or INTERRUPT Stores value in RAM 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key Sub code Digital key FUNCTION CLEAR Sets or changes value START START OK or INTER...

Page 385: ...T CANCEL OK or INTERRUPT CLEAR Corrects value Stores value in RAM 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key 1st setting Digital key 2nd setting START START CANCEL OK or INTERRUPT CLEAR Corrects value CLEAR Corrects value Stores value in RAM 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key or Software keyboard START CANCEL CLEAR Corrects value 2 Stores value in RAM 1 MONITOR ...

Page 386: ...n 5 9 3 Functions A Clearing update error flag Clear Error Flag in Software Installation Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally the Recovery Mode may accidentally start up and an F600 error occurs when the power is turned ON again In this case clear the Update Error flags used in the download process with this function Normally the flags are automatically cleared in the downl...

Page 387: ...on key and license Key Backup Restore When the SRAM board for the SYS board or the SYS board is replaced or initialized the encryption key and license are erased Therefore they need to be backed up or restored with this function Configurations and functions of the 5 Key Backup Restore menu 1 Key SRAM to FROM Restore the encryption key from SRAM to FROM 2 Key FROM to SRAM Back up the encryption key...

Page 388: ...ly Erase SRAM Securely This function is used before discarding the SRAM board for the SYS board It overwrites all the used areas on the SRAM board with the selected data and makes it unusable Immediately after selecting this function the processing starts and is completed H Clearing service tech password Clear Service Tech This function is needed after the HDD is replaced When the HDD is replaced ...

Page 389: ...Disposes of ADI HDD data safely without any of leakage Deletes image data when reusing a used ADI HDD 5 10 2 Operation procedure Turn the power ON while pressing the 4 and the CLEAR button simultaneously Then the type of the mounted HDD is checked and either of the following screens is displayed When the security HDD is mounted Fig 5 7 HDD data clear 4 C Power STOP Operation Failed for SATA HDD Ca...

Page 390: ...9 5 10 3 Functions A 1 Revert factory initial status HDD Select this to dispose of the ADI HDD as well as the equipment When this item is selected all data in the HDD are deleted and the HDD is reverted to its initial status at the factory shipment HDD Assist Mode Current HDD type SATA HDD Select number 1 2 and press START key 1 Revert factory initial status HDD 2 Remove key System Firmware Versio...

Page 391: ...an HDD mounting error occurs B 2 Remove Key Select this to reuse the ADI HDD as well as the equipment When this item is selected image data in the HDD are deleted This operation requires approx 20 minutes since the partition must be rebuilt HDD Assist Mode Current HDD type ADI HDD Select number 1 2 and press START key 1 Revert factory initial status HDD 2 Remove key System Firmware Version Update ...

Page 392: ...eusable without reinstalling the firmware HDD Assist Mode Current HDD type ADI HDD Select number 1 2 and press START key 1 Revert factory initial status HDD 2 Remove key System Firmware Version Update Mode xxxx x x x x 4c Mode Confirmation Screen Are you sure Press START to continue Press STOP to cancel HDD Assist Mode Current HDD type ADI HDD Select number 1 2 and press START key 1 Revert factory...

Page 393: ...ART Info Displays the various information in the HDD DISK Info Displays the usage rate of HDD HDD Utility Initializes log files 5 11 2 Operation procedure Notes Do not turn the main power switch OFF after you select a menu and processing has started during processing After the processing is completed a beep sounds 4 times and either Completed or Failed appears on the screen Turn ON the power while...

Page 394: ...ed number If damage is discovered recover or initialize the file system HDD B Recovery of the File System Recovery F S In case that an error occurs during the file system check each partition can be recovered Fig 5 16 Explanation for each item 1 Recovers all partitions 2 Recovers root partition only 3 8 Recovers each partition shown above Note More than one partition can be selected is displayed o...

Page 395: ...nitializes a partition storage and creates an initial file 7 Initializes a partition encryption and creates an initial file 8 Initializes a partition TAT and creates an initial file Remark More than one partition can be selected is displayed on the left of the selected number Notes If 1 Except or 7 encryption is selected applications and OS data in the equipment are also initialized In this case t...

Page 396: ...splayed is displayed for the items not supported Fig 5 19 Remark NAV Normalized Attribute Value Indicates the value of the specified HDD condition as compared to the manufacturer s optimum value Worst Worst Ever Normalized Attribute Value Indicates the worst value of NAV permitted by the manufacturer Notes The values of NAV and Worst should be treated as a rough reference since their basis may dif...

Page 397: ...g 5 20 Remark The disk information of a partition indicated as Encrypted Partition is not displayed as it is encrypted G Initialization of log file HDD Utility Normally it is not necessary to use this menu File System F S Recovery Mode DISK Info 0 Main menu ALL Mbyte 8737 10326 3099 1036 24778 26873 FREE Mbyte 5401 9563 2861 949 23343 25332 USE 33 1 2 3 2 6 3 3 0 7 0 7 MT OK MT OK MT OK MT OK MT O...

Page 398: ... in with their password and therefore cannot use the 3C mode Functions Sets the serial number of this equipment Clears SRAM data when the 3C mode cannot be used Clears F800 error Clears F900 error 5 12 2 Operation procedure Turn the power ON while pressing the 6 and the CLEAR button simultaneously Then the following screen is displayed Key in the desired item number and then press the START button...

Page 399: ...Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board for the SYS board C 2 Reset Date and Time Select this to clear an F800 error which occurred when the date and time were set as after the end of the year 2037 or when the actual end of the year 2037 has come After selecting this start the equipment in the normal mode to reset the date and time D 3 SRAM Re Initialize Support Since an F900 error...

Page 400: ...tion of pixel counter toner cartridge reference 105 Stored information of pixel counter service technician reference 106 Error history Maximum 1000 items 107 Error history Latest 80 items 108 Firmware update log Maximum 200 items 110 Power ON OFF log Maximum 100 items 111 Version list 114 Total counter list 121 05 adjustment value difference 122 08 setting value difference Digital keys Key in the ...

Page 401: ...MSS csv 222 08DIFFERENCE_CODE_LIST_serial_date and time YYYYMMDDHHMMSS csv 5 13 2 List Printing Lists below are output in the list print mode List data are printed out or output in a CSV format by storing them in a USB device Paper sizes available for this printing are A4 or LT or larger This section introduces a sample of each list To start the list print mode turn the power on while pressing 9 S...

Page 402: ...des and the current adjustment value for each code are output in a list See the following page for the adjustment code 05 Refer to 15 SELF DIAGNOSIS CODE 03 04 05 08 CODE Adjustment Code 05 05 ADJUSTMENT MODE DATA LIST 20xx xx xx xx xx CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA 2000 128 3860 88 4830 128 5920 128 S N xxxxxxxxx TOSHIBAe STUDIOxxx TOTAL 9999999 DFTOTAL 9999999 ...

Page 403: ...ting codes and the current setting value for each code are output in a list See the following page for the setting code 08 Refer to 15 SELF DIAGNOSIS CODE 03 04 05 08 CODE Setting Code 08 08 SETTING MODE DATA LIST 20xx xx xx xx xx CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA 2010 2 2880 12 3040 0 3070 0 S N xxxxxxxxx TOSHIBAe STUDIOxxx TOTAL 9999999 DFTOTAL 9999999 ...

Page 404: ...NCE PM PM SUPPORT CODE LIST 20xx xx xx xx xx UNIT OUTPUT PAGES PMOUTPUT PAGE DRIVE COUNTS PMDRIVE COUNTS DEVELOP COUNTS DEVELOP COUNTS DRUM K 2516 70000 11735 170000 DRUMBLADE K 2516 70000 11735 170000 GRID K 2516 70000 11735 170000 MAINCHARGERNEEDLE K 2516 70000 11735 170000 CHARGERCLEANINGPAD K 2516 70000 11735 170000 DRUM Y 411 70000 8625 170000 DRUMBLADE Y 411 70000 8625 170000 GRID Y 411 7000...

Page 405: ...Y Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 1 20xx xx xx Y Average Pixel Count 2 70 1 74 2 51 2 20xx xx xx Y Latest Pixel Count 6 15 0 39 0 39 3 20xx xx xx M Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 4 20xx xx xx M Average Pixel Count 6 11 2 5 29 5 20xx xx xx M Latest Pixel Count 6 82 2 15 2 15 6 20xx xx xx C Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 7 20xx xx xx C Average Pixel Count 5 46 2 4 81 8 20xx xx xx C Latest Pixel Count 6 42 ...

Page 406: ... Count LT A4 181 45 226 4 20xx xx xx Y Average Pixel Count 2 7 1 74 2 51 5 20xx xx xx Y Latest Pixel Count 6 15 0 39 0 39 6 20xx xx xx M Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 7 20xx xx xx M Average Pixel Count 6 11 2 5 29 8 20xx xx xx M Latest Pixel Count 6 82 2 15 2 15 9 20xx xx xx C Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 10 20xx xx xx C Average Pixel Count 5 46 2 18 4 81 11 20xx xx xx C Latest Pixel Count 6 42 2 7...

Page 407: ...110 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000 F110 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000 F110 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000 EAD0 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000 E860 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000 E731 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000...

Page 408: ...nter counter data black when firmware was updated PRINT 2 Printer counter data twin color when firmware was updated PRINT C Printer counter data full color when firmware was updated LIST List print counter data when firmware was updated FAX Fax print counter data when firmware was updated STATUS Result of update FW UPGRADE LOG 20xx xx xx xx xx MANUFACTUREDATE 20xx xx xx UNPACKINGDATE 20xx xx xx US...

Page 409: ...tion TOTAL Total counter data when the power was turned OFF and then back ON POWER ON_OFF LOG 20xx xx xx xx xx DATE TIME FUNCTION TOTAL xxxx xx xx xx xx xx ON 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx OFF 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx ON 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx OFF 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx ON 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx OFF 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx ON 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx OFF 99999999 xxxx...

Page 410: ...ER ROM VERSION xxxM xxx SCANNER ROM VERSION xxxS xxx PFC ROM VERSION xxxF xxx RADF ROM VERSION DF xxx FINISHER STACKER ROM VERSION FIN FINISHER SADDLE ROM VERSION SDL FINISHER PUNCH ROM VERSION PUN FAX BOARD FIRMWARE ROM VERSION Fxx xxx SYSTEM FIRMWARE INTERNAL OS VERSION Vx xxx x x HDD DATA VERSION Txxxxxxxxxxx SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS VERSION Txxxxxxxxxxx LANGUAGE VERSION English US xxx xxx xxx xxx xx...

Page 411: ... of engine firmware is output ENGINE FW LOG 20xx xx xx xx xx TOSHIBA e STUDIOxxxx Cxxxxxxxx FIN S N xxxxxxxx TOTAL 9999999 DF TOTAL 9999999 CODE SUB DATA 4624 0 0 4624 1 0 4624 2 58 4624 3 3 4624 4 58 4624 5 3 4624 6 0 4624 7 56 4624 8 3 4624 9 0 4624 10 41 4624 11 1 4624 12 29 4624 13 7 4624 14 0 4624 15 0 4624 16 0 4624 17 0 4624 18 0 4624 19 0 4624 20 0 ...

Page 412: ...L 0 0 0 0 PRINTER FULL COLOR TWIN MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL SMALL 118 0 60 178 LARGE 4 0 0 4 TOTAL 122 0 60 182 LIST FULL COLOR TWIN MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL SMALL 0 0 0 0 LARGE 0 0 0 0 TOTAL 0 0 0 0 CALIBRATION COUNTER 0 TOTAL COUNTER LIST 20xx xx xx xx xx SCAN COUNTER TOTAL FULL COLOR TWIN MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL COPY 7 0 1 8 FAX 0 0 0 0 NETWOR 0 0 0 0 TOTAL 7 0 1 8 COPY FULL COLOR TWIN MONO COLOR BLA...

Page 413: ...ce list between the current values and backed up values of 05 adjustment value and 08 setting values is output is output on the left side of code if there is a difference and is output on the left side of code if there is no backed up value 05 DIFFERENCE LIST xx xx xx xx xx S N xxxxxxxxx TOSHIBAe STUDIOxxxx TOTAL 9999999 DFTOTAL 9999999 CODE 2400 BACKUP 128 CURRENT 160 CODE BACKUP CURRENT ...

Page 414: ...output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under the condition that the data of print ratio 6 is printed on the standard paper size A4 LT at a normal temperature and humidity However users do not always print under the above condition As for the type of original copy print mode and environment each user has different tendency and as a result the number of output pages per ...

Page 415: ...old The threshold to be used is selectable in the setting mode 08 6506 between the pixel count and output pages 0 Output pages 1 Pixel counter The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting mode 08 6508 and that of output pages is set in the setting mode 08 6507 When the new toner cartridge is judged as installed the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and replaced with the dat...

Page 416: ...ince the image has 4 margins it never becomes 100 actually Ex Printing 5 pages on A4 LT size with solid copy LED heads emit to all pixels Pixel count 100 Print count 5 Printing 5 pages on A4 LT size with blank copy LED heads never emit Pixel count 0 Print count 5 Printing 2 pages on A4 LT size with solid copy LED heads emit to all pixels Printing 2 pages on A4 LT size with blank copy LED heads nev...

Page 417: ... detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output pages is counted Pixel counter clearing There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows 08 6501 All information related to the pixel count is cleared 08 6502 All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared 08 6503 All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count...

Page 418: ...o display it at the service technician reference or toner cartridge reference is selected 0 Service technician reference 1 Toner cartridge reference in the setting mode 08 6505 The following screen is displayed when the buttons COUNTER and PIXEL COUNTER are pressed in this order after Displayed is selected with the code above and the power is as usual turned ON The displayed buttons are depending ...

Page 419: ...in the above screen each pixel counter screen is displayed TONER CARTRIDGE button Information screen of toner cartridge reference is displayed SERVICE COLOR button Information screen of service technician reference full color is displayed SERVICE BLACK button Information screen of service technician reference black is displayed The following screen is displayed when pressing the TONER CARTRIDGE bu...

Page 420: ...LF DIAGNOSTIC MODE 5 54 Fig 5 5 Information screen of toner cartridge reference The following screen is displayed when pressing the SERVICE COLOR button Fig 5 6 Information screen of service technician reference full color The following screen is displayed when pressing the SERVICE BLACK button ...

Page 421: ...5 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE 5 55 Fig 5 7 Information screen of service technician reference black ...

Page 422: ...PC PRN FAX TOTAL 0 20080208 Y Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 1 20080208 Y Average Pixel Count 2 70 1 74 2 51 2 20080208 Y Latest Pixel Count 6 15 0 39 0 39 3 20080208 M Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 4 20080208 M Average Pixel Count 6 11 2 5 29 5 20080208 M Latest Pixel Count 6 82 2 15 2 15 6 20080208 C Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 7 20080208 C Average Pixel Count 5 46 2 4 81 8 20080208 C Latest Pixel...

Page 423: ...5 20080208 Y Latest Pixel Count 6 15 0 39 0 39 6 20080208 M Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 7 20080208 M Average Pixel Count 6 11 2 5 29 8 20080208 M Latest Pixel Count 6 82 2 15 2 15 9 20080208 C Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 10 20080208 C Average Pixel Count 5 46 2 18 4 81 11 20080208 C Latest Pixel Count 6 42 2 73 2 73 12 20080208 K Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 13 20080208 K Average Pixel Count 5 5...

Page 424: ...ount 6619 6620 6621 6622 6623 6624 Latest pixel count 6636 6637 6638 6639 6724 Printer function Print count page 6568 6570 6572 6564 6565 Average pixel count 6625 6626 6627 6628 6629 6630 Latest pixel count 6640 6641 6642 6643 6725 FAX function Print count page 6566 Average pixel count 6635 Latest pixel count 6644 Total Average pixel count 6631 6632 6633 6634 Full color Twin color Black Total Yell...

Page 425: ...e reference count started date is displayed 08 6519 Toner cartridge Y 08 6520 Toner cartridge M 08 6521 Toner cartridge C 08 6522 Toner cartridge K Service technician reference cleared date The service technician reference cleared date 08 6510 is displayed The date 08 6502 was performed is stored Toner cartridge reference cleared date The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed The dat...

Page 427: ... 2 Adjustment of the auto toner sensor 2 Developer material Image quality sensor 1 Needle electrode Transfer belt 1 Image position aligning sensor 1 Drum cleaning blade LED head 1 1st transfer roller 1 Main charger grid Photoconductive drum 6 1 6 Image dimensional adjustment Items Code in mode 05 6 1 6 Paper alignment at the registration roller Order 6 1 7 Image dimensional adjustment at the print...

Page 428: ...power ON The following message will be displayed Fig 6 2 3 Key in a code and press the START button Fig 6 3 4 The message below will be displayed approx 2 minutes later and the adjustment starts During the adjustment Current sensor voltage V shown in B automatically changes and gradually approaches to Target value V for adjustment reference voltage shown in A Fig 6 4 Code 2400 All developer materi...

Page 429: ... the OK button to store the adjustment result in the memory 7 Turn the power OFF and install the toner cartridges Notes When Waste toner box replacement is displayed at adjustment follow the steps below When Waste toner box replacement is displayed Basic Manual E Waste toner box replacement 1 Replace the waste toner box with a new one and close the front cover 2 Key in 4833 Recovery from toner emp...

Page 430: ...en above are replaced do the Forced performing of image quality closed loop control 05 2742 procedure before Automatic gamma adjustment Code Item to be adjusted Contents 2742 Forced performing of image quality closed loop control Procedure 1 While pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously turn the power ON Adjustment Mode 2 Key in 2742 and press the START button 3 WAIT is displayed 4 When the adjustment fin...

Page 431: ...ly the equipment returns to the initial state of Adjustment Mode If the following errors are displayed after performing 05 4719 clear the error by following the steps below and then perform 05 4719 again When Waste toner box replacement is displayed Basic Manual E Waste toner box replacement 1 Replace the waste toner box with a new one and close the front cover 2 Key in 4833 Recovery from toner em...

Page 432: ...10 4111 4115 4116 4117 4118 4120 4128 4129 2 Printer related image dimensional adjustment Primary scanning data writing start position 4006 Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction Fine adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed 4526 Secondary scanning data writing start position 4402 4058 4059 4060 4560 4061 4062 Primary scanning data writing start position at duplexing 4019 3 Sca...

Page 433: ...est copying can be performed normal copy mode Fig 6 6 100 A A3 TEST MODE 100 A A3 TEST MODE 100 A A3 Wait Warming Up 100 A A3 COPYING 100 XXX A3 TEST MODE YYY ZZZ Current adjustment value Adjustment value newly keyed in If no entering YYY is displayed Code No 1 0 5 POWER OK INTERRUPT Digital keys START Key in codes Operation keys Display Power OFF ON Exit the Adjustment Mode Test copy Digital keys...

Page 434: ...eserved SETTING ADJUSTMENT 6 8 6 1 6 Paper alignment at the registration roller A Adjustment with touch panel Paper alignment at the registration roller can be adjusted in the following procedure by performing the code 05 4579 1 Select the drawer Fig 6 7 2 Select the paper size Fig 6 8 ...

Page 435: ...ed e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C SETTING ADJUSTMENT 6 9 3 Select the media type Fig 6 9 4 Key in the adjustment value Fig 6 10 5 Press the OK button to finish the adjustment Press the FUNCTION CLEAR or CANCEL button to return to the previous menu ...

Page 436: ...s 4 159 mm or shorter 6 26 inches or shorter Plain paper 4115 0 1 2 3 4 Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 2nd drawer CST2 4101 0 1 2 3 4 Plain paper 4116 0 1 2 3 4 Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 3rd drawer CST3 4108 0 1 2 3 4 Plain paper 4117 0 1 2 3 4 Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 4th drawer CST4 4109 0 1 2 3 4 Plain paper 4118 0 1 2 3 4 Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 ...

Page 437: ...The paper jam occurred between the registration pass sensor and the paper clinging detection sensor may occur Pay attention to the above and select the appropriate value 1 1 3 55 56 57 58 59 60 98 Single sided grid pattern in Black Mode Double sided grid pattern in Black Mode Grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Full Color Mode Grid pattern of thick paper 3 in Full Color Mode Grid pattern of OHP film ...

Page 438: ...t grid pattern Fig 6 12 Adjustment Tolerance Detail of adjustment A 52 0 5mm P 6 13 A Primary scanning data writing start position Printer B 200 0 5mm P 6 14 B Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction Fine adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed C 52 0 5mm P 6 15 C Secondary scanning data writing start position D 52 0 5mm P 6 16 D Primary scanning data writing start position at ...

Page 439: ...left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern 4 Check if the distance A is within 52 0 5 mm If not use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again Procedure Adjustment Mode Key in the code 4006 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 OK or INTERRUPT Stored in memory 100 A is displayed Press 98 FAX A grid pattern is printed out The larger the adjus...

Page 440: ...n memory When the value is not within the recommended values the trailing edge area of the image may be out of position for the paper length or the density at the trailing edge area of the image may become lower Perform the adjustment confirming the image 100 A is displayed Press 98 FAX A grid pattern is printed out The larger the adjustment value is the longer the distance B becomes approx 0 1 mm...

Page 441: ...the top side of the grid pattern 4 Check if the distance C is within 52 0 5 mm 5 If not use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again Procedure Adjustment Mode Key in the code shown above START Key in an acceptable value shown above OK or INTERRUPT Stored in memory 100 A is displayed Press 98 3 for duplexing FAX A grid pattern is printed out The larger the adjustmen...

Page 442: ...itch is printed out Use A4 LT from the 1st drawer 3 Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance D from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern 4 Check if the distance D is within 52 0 5 mm 5 If not use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again Procedure Adjustment Mode Key in the code 4019 START 1 START Key in a value acc...

Page 443: ...and adjust the value of 05 4019 2 again as required Adjustment procedure summarization for A to D 0 5 Power ON 98 3 05 4062 4019 for duplexing FAX A 05 4006 2nd drawer A3 LD 52 0 5 mm 0 04 mm step B 05 4526 0 2nd drawer A3 LD 200 0 5 mm 0 1 mm step C 05 4402 2nd drawer A3 LD 52 0 5 mm 0 1 mm step 05 4058 1st drawer A4 LT 05 4059 2nd drawer A3 LD 05 4060 3rd drawer A4 LT 05 4560 4th drawer A4 LT 05...

Page 444: ...multaneously turn the power ON 2 Press FAX to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3 LD paper 3 Key in 3033 and press the START button to move the carriage to the adjustment position 4 Make an adjustment in the order of step 1 and 2 Step 1 In case of A Tighten the mirror 3 adjustment screw Rear 1 CW In case of B Loosen the mirror 3 adjustment screw Rear 1 CCW Fig 6 14 Feeding direction Feeding ...

Page 445: ... values and repeat step 3 to 5 above Procedure Adjustment Mode Key in code 3030 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 OK or INTERRUPT Stored in memory The larger the adjustment value is the longer the distance B becomes approx 0 04 mm step C Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 1 While pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously turn the power ON Adjustment Mode 2 Place Test Chart No T...

Page 446: ... 3 Press FAX START to make a copy at the mode of A4 LT 100 Full color and Text Photo 4 Measure the distance D from the top paper edge to the 10 mm line of top grid pattern on the copy with a ruler 5 Check if the distance D is within 10 0 5 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3 to 5 above Procedure Adjustment Mode Key in the code 3031 START Key in a value accept...

Page 447: ...o 5 above Procedure Adjustment Mode Key in the code 4050 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 OK or INTERRUPT Stored in memory 100 A is displayed The larger the adjustment value is the wider the blank area becomes approx 0 04 mm step Fig 6 16 Notes Paper jams tend to occur in equipment in which thin paper such as 64g m2 17lb Bond paper is used or a large amount of high density images su...

Page 448: ...wer 4 Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image 5 Check if the blank area F is within the range 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above Procedure Adjustment Mode Key in the code 4052 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 OK or INTERRUPT Stored in memory 100 A is displayed The larger the adjustment value is the wider the...

Page 449: ...er 4 Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image 5 Check if the blank area G is within the range 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above Procedure Adjustment Mode Key in the code 4053 START Key in value acceptable values 0 to 255 OK or INTERRUPT stored in memory 100 A is displayed The larger the adjustment value is the wider the...

Page 450: ... Chart No TCC 1 TCC 2 Following items can be checked with the Test Chart No TCC 1 TCC 2 1 Points to be measured in the chart Fig 6 19 Adjustment order 0 5 Power ON Chart TCC 1 TCC 2 FAX START A3 LD 100 Full color and Text Photo B 05 3030 5 0 5 mm 0 04 mm step C 05 3032 150 0 5 mm 0 03 mm step D 05 3031 10 0 5 mm 0 08 mm step C D B Feeding direction ...

Page 451: ...ration 6 Pictures For checking color reproduction and moire 7 Magnification lines For checking the magnification error of primary and secondary scanning directions 8 Center lines Center lines for A4 LT sizes 9 Arrow A mark for placing the chart properly onto the original glass place it to the left rear corner of the original glass 10 Halftone band For checking uniformity 11 White text on the black...

Page 452: ...This adjustment may cause image troubles such as moire disappearance or breaking of thin lines on the printed image Therefore check if there is no such image trouble while you are performing the adjustment Procedure 1 While pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously turn the power ON 2 Key in a code and press the START button 3 Key in the adjustment value To correct a value press the CLEAR button 4 Press the...

Page 453: ...ler Notes Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in P 6 4 6 1 3 Performing Image Quality Control and P 6 6 6 1 5 Image Dimensional Adjustment Procedure 1 While pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously turn the power ON Adjustment Mode 2 Select the A4 LT A3 LD drawer Key in the pattern number and press the FAX button to output a Patch chart for gamma adjustment Adjustment...

Page 454: ...ress the CANCEL button to clear the error display When it is cleared the control panel display will return to the ready state Then check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass and then repeat step 3 and afterward Remarks To select the paper type for the automatic gamma adjustment in user calibration change the cod...

Page 455: ...ck to the ready state 5 Press the FAX button and then press the START button to make a test copy 6 If the desired image quality has not been attained repeat step 2 to 5 Color mode Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo 1 Text Printe d Image 2 Photo Map Custo m Mode Red Seal Color Mode Full color 7713 7714 7715 7716 7717 7718 7719 Manualdensity mode center value The larger the value i...

Page 456: ...th digital keys 0 1 or 2 and press the START button 0 Low density 1 Medium density 2 High density 4 Key in an adjustment value To correct the value once keyed in press the CLEAR button 5 Press the OK or INTERRUPT button to store the value in memory Color Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Text Printed Image Photo Map Custom mode Red Seal Color Yellow 7960 0 7961 0 7962 0 7963 0 7...

Page 457: ... 3555C 4555C 5055C SETTING ADJUSTMENT 6 31 The equipment goes back to the ready state 6 For resetting the value repeat step 2 to 5 7 Press the FAX button and then press the START button to make a test copy 8 If the desired image quality has not been attained repeat step 2 to 7 ...

Page 458: ...nsity medium density high density The color from 10 to 30 low density from 40 to 70 medium density and from 80 to 100 high density in No TCC 1 TCC 2 chart can be used as a guide for the range of the density area influenced by the change of the adjustment value low density medium density high density Fig 6 21 Low density Medium density High density ...

Page 459: ...make adjustments according to the following procedure Notes Be sure that this adjustment is made after performing P 6 27 6 2 1 Automatic gamma adjustment Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 30 6 2 3 Color balance adjustment Color mode Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Text Photo Gray scale Custom mode Black 7190 0 7191 0 7192 0 7956 0 7276 0 Low density The larger...

Page 460: ...ses of originals on the original glass for copier functions and network scanning functions and those placed on the RADF Adjustment Mode 05 Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings if necessary and make adjustment Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 29 6 2 2 Density adjustment Color mode Original mode Remarks Text Photo Text Printed Image Photo Map Cu...

Page 461: ...nt by balancing between moire and sharpness Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 29 6 2 2 Density adjustment Code Color mode Original mode Contents 7796 Full Color Text Photo The larger the value is the sharper the image becomes while the smaller the value is the softer the image becomes The smaller the value is the less moire tends to appear Acceptable values 0 to 255 Default 128 77...

Page 462: ...2 9 Adjustment of smudged faint text The smudge faint text at a Black Mode can be set at the following codes Adjustment Mode 05 Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings if necessary make adjustment Notes Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the standard when the setting value is changed from the default value Procedure...

Page 463: ...KER mode 7 If the desired image quality has not been attained repeat step 1 to 6 Code Item to be adjusted Relation between the adjustment value and the color Acceptable values 0 to 6 0 to 2 3 Default 4 to 6 7850 0 Yellow The smaller the value is the more reddish the color becomes Yellow The larger the value is the more greenish the color becomes 7850 1 Magenta The smaller the value is the more blu...

Page 464: ...s higher Do not increase this order when setting the values Usually LED emission level 4 4 is most effective in the black mode 6 2 12 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type The maximum toner adhesion amount can be adjusted for each paper type It is used when offsetting occurs Adjustment Mode 05 Code Item to be adjusted Remarks 7212 0 LED emission level 0 4 The smaller the value is the smal...

Page 465: ... mode can be adjusted Text Photo reproduction level adjustment can be switched to Photo oriented 1 Photo oriented 2 Text oriented 1 or Text oriented 2 in the following codes Adjustment Mode 05 Notes The text reproduction level is lower when the mode is switched from the default value to the Photo oriented When you change the setting from the default value to Text oriented noise occurs in a printed...

Page 466: ...e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING ADJUSTMENT 6 40 Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 29 6 2 2 Density adjustment ...

Page 467: ...modes Acceptable values 0 to 8 Default 0 If the value is set to 0 the table specified by default is used The default tables are as follows Text Photo mode 4 Text mode 4 User custom setting in the Text Photo Map or Text mode base 4 User custom setting in the Photo or Printed image mode base 3 7812 Text 7816 Custom mode 7817 Red Seal Color Mode Mode Code Item to be adjusted Remarks Twin color mode w...

Page 468: ...r RADF common for copy scan and fax The background level for scanning originals with the RADF is adjusted when the background fogging at the scanning of a manually set original and an original used with the RADF is different This is to adjust the level of the background image removed when the scanning of the originals with the RADF is performed Adjustment Mode 05 Procedure The procedure is the sam...

Page 469: ...ON the power of the equipment and make a copy 8 If the desired image quality has not been attained repeat step 1 to 7 Code Subcode Remarks Y M C K Magenta 7644 0 7644 1 7644 2 7644 3 The larger the value is the darker the density becomes and the smaller the value is the lighter the density becomes When 255 is set the specified solid color is used for printing When 0 is set nothing is printed For e...

Page 470: ... 2 2 Density adjustment Code Paper type Remarks 7902 Plain paper The smaller the value is the lower the density of the whole image becomes Acceptable values 0 to 255 Default Plain paper 255 Recycled paper 255 Thick paper 1 255 Thick paper 2 255 Thick paper 3 255 Thick paper 4 255 Special paper 1 255 Special paper 2 255 Special paper 3 255 Thin paper 255 Envelope 255 OHP film 240 7904 Recycled pape...

Page 471: ... and press the START button 3 Key in an adjustment value To correct a value once keyed in press the CLEAR button 4 Press the OK or INTERRUPT button to store the value The equipment goes back to the ready state 5 Press the FAX button and then press the START button to make a test copy 6 If the desired image quality has not been attained repeat step 2 to 5 Code Original mode Item to be adjusted Rema...

Page 472: ...magenta becomes 7666 1 Text Yellow The larger the value the darker the green becomes The smaller the value the darker the red becomes 7666 2 Text Green The larger the value the darker the cyan becomes The smaller the value the darker the yellow becomes 7666 3 Text Cyan The larger the value the darker the blue becomes The smaller the value the darker the green becomes 7666 4 Text Blue The larger th...

Page 473: ...er the yellow becomes 7669 3 Map Cyan The larger the value the darker the blue becomes The smaller the value the darker the green becomes 7669 4 Map Blue The larger the value the darker the magenta becomes The smaller the value the darker the cyan becomes 7669 5 Map Magenta The larger the value the darker the red becomes The smaller the value the darker the blue becomes 7670 0 Custom Red The large...

Page 474: ...o 4 to make the setting again 6 Press the FAX button and then press the START button to make a test copy 7 If the desired image quality has not been attained repeat step 2 to 6 7671 2 Red seal color Green The larger the value the darker the cyan becomes The smaller the value the darker the yellow becomes Acceptable value 0 to 255 Default value 128 7671 3 Red seal color Cyan The larger the value th...

Page 475: ... 5 Text Photo Magenta 7676 0 Text Red 7676 1 Text Yellow 7676 2 Text Green 7676 3 Text Cyan 7676 4 Text Blue 7676 5 Text Magenta 7677 0 Printed image Red 7677 1 Printed image Yellow 7677 2 Printed image Green 7677 3 Printed image Cyan 7677 4 Printed image Blue 7677 5 Printed image Magenta 7678 0 Photo Red 7678 1 Photo Yellow 7678 2 Photo Green 7678 3 Photo Cyan 7678 4 Photo Blue 7678 5 Photo Magen...

Page 476: ...N 2 Key in a code and press the START button e g 7675 3 Key in a value to adjust the color 0 Red 1 Yellow 2 Green 3 Cyan 4 Blue 5 Magenta To correct a value once keyed in press the CLEAR button 4 Press the OK or INTERRUPT button to store the value The equipment goes back to the ready state 5 Repeat step 2 to 4 to make the setting again 6 Press the FAX button and then press the START button to make...

Page 477: ...acement 1 When unpacking or any of the following parts has been replaced be sure to make this adjustment Photoconductive drum Developer material LED head LED gap spacer Transfer belt 1st transfer roller Drum cleaning blade Needle electrode Main charger grid Image position aligning sensor Front Image position aligning sensor Rear Image quality sensor SRAM board SYS board EEPROM LGC board HDD 2 When...

Page 478: ...rformed 82 Thick paper 4 Used when the code 8004 6 is performed 84 Special paper 1 Used when the code 8004 7 is performed 86 Special paper 2 Used when the code 8004 8 is performed 88 Special paper 3 Used when the code 8004 9 is performed 90 Thin paper Used when the code 8004 10 is performed Pattern No Paper type Remarks 230 Plain paper Used when the code 8005 0 is performed 234 Recycled paper Used...

Page 479: ...ate Then check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass and then repeat step 3 and afterward To select the paper type for the automatic gamma adjustment in user calibration change the code below to 1 copy print Code Paper type Remarks 8005 0 Plain paper When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate the grada...

Page 480: ...the START button 0 Low density 1 Medium density 2 High density Highest density 4 Key in the adjustment value To correct the value once keyed in press the CLEAR button Color mode Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Remarks PS PS PCL PCL XPS XPS Black 600dpi 7315 0 7316 0 7317 0 7318 0 7319 0 7320 0 The larger the value is the density of the item to be adjusted becomes darker Acceptable values...

Page 481: ...ed repeat step 1 to 7 Range of the density area low density medium density high density The color from the 1st to the 7th stage low density from the 8th to the 11th stage medium density and from the 12th to the 13th stage high density in Patch chart for gamma adjustment 71 FAX output as a confirmation in P 6 51 6 3 1 Automatic gamma adjustment can be used as a guide for the range of the density ar...

Page 482: ... Acceptable values 0 to 255 Default 128 8050 1 8054 1 8058 1 8062 1 8042 1 8046 1 8050 2 8054 2 8058 2 8062 2 8042 2 8046 2 Magenta 600dpi 8051 0 8055 0 8059 0 8063 0 8043 0 8047 0 8051 1 8055 1 8059 1 8063 1 8043 1 8047 1 8051 2 8055 2 8059 2 8063 2 8043 2 8047 2 Cyan 600dpi 8052 0 8056 0 8060 0 8064 0 8044 0 8048 0 8052 1 8056 1 8060 1 8064 1 8044 1 8048 1 8052 2 8056 2 8060 2 8064 2 8044 2 8048...

Page 483: ...nsity in Patch chart for gamma adjustment 71 FAX output in P 6 51 6 3 1 Automatic gamma adjustment can be used as a guide for the range of the density area influenced by the adjustment with the printer driver and the change of the adjustment value low density medium density and high density Refer to P 6 55 Fig 6 22 Color specified for twin color print Item to be adjusted Remarks Black Yellow Magen...

Page 484: ...e printing job 7 If the desired image has not been attained repeat step 1 to 6 6 3 5 Upper limit value in the Toner Saving Mode The upper limit value of the density when Toner save is selected in the Custom tab of the printer driver can be adjusted Adjustment Mode 05 Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 54 6 3 2 Gamma balance adjustment Black Mode Black mode Color mode Remarks PS PCL...

Page 485: ...he procedure is the same as that of P 6 54 6 3 2 Gamma balance adjustment Black Mode Color Code Paper type Remarks Color 600dpi 8145 OHP film The smaller the value is the toner amount adhered decreases of the high density area ex prevention of fusing offsetting etc Acceptable values 0 to 255 Default 200 Color 1200dpi 8149 Black mode Color mode Remarks PS PCL XPS PS PCL 7322 0 7322 1 7322 2 8102 0 ...

Page 486: ...ecomes The smaller the value is the narrower this color range becomes Acceptable values 1 to 255 8214 Graphics 8215 Image Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks General Photogra phic Presentat ion Line art Color profile 8252 0 8252 1 8252 2 8252 3 8252 4 Text The larger the value is the wider the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes The smaller the value is the narrower t...

Page 487: ... Plain paper When you set a larger value the density becomes high in some parts of the high density area since the maximum amount of toner adhering increases When you set a smaller value the reproduction of the gradation tends to be reduced since the maximum amount of toner adhering decreases and the maximum density becomes low Note that if the value is too large offsetting or jam in the fuser uni...

Page 488: ...s General Photo Present ation Line art Red Seal Color Text 8110 0 8111 0 8112 0 8113 0 8109 0 8108 0 8118 0 The larger the value is the sharper the image becomes The smaller the value is the softer the image becomes Acceptable values 0 to 255 Default 128 Graphics 8110 1 8111 1 8112 1 8113 1 8109 1 8108 1 8118 1 Image 8110 2 8111 2 8112 2 8113 2 8109 2 8108 2 8118 2 ...

Page 489: ...ral Photo Present ation Line art Red Seal Color Text Others 8110 0 8111 0 8112 0 8113 0 8109 0 8108 0 8118 0 The larger the value is the sharper the image becomes The smaller the value is the softer the image becomes Acceptable values 0 to 255 Default 128 Thin text 8110 1 8111 1 8112 1 8113 1 8109 1 8108 1 8118 1 Image 8110 2 8111 2 8112 2 8113 2 8109 2 8108 2 8118 2 Code Remarks 8240 600dpi Sets ...

Page 490: ...the twin color mode Adjustment Mode 05 Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 58 6 3 4 Adjustment of faint text Mode PS PCL XPS 1200dpi Remarks Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Color 8010 0 8013 0 8010 1 8013 1 8010 2 8013 2 8016 8017 The larger the value is the darker the background becomes The smaller the value is the lighter the background becomes Acceptable v...

Page 491: ...the LED emission level number 0 to 4 becomes higher Do not increase this order when setting the values Usually LED emission level 4 4 is the most effective in the black mode It is not applied to the images printed in the Black mode by the printer driver Code Item to be adjusted Remarks 7330 0 LED emission level 0 4 The smaller the value is the smaller the LED emission level of the primary scanning...

Page 492: ... value 0 to 5 Default 3 8242 1 The density of the line in Yellow Magenta Cyan and Black in the line density range specified by 05 8243 2 or 05 8243 3 can be adjusted The larger the value is the darker the line density becomes Acceptable value 0 to 5 Default 1 Color mode Code Remarks Color Black 8243 0 The effective range lower limit of the density adjustment for the line in Black can be set Accept...

Page 493: ...to be adjusted 0 1 or 2 and press the START button 0 Low density L 1 Medium density M 2 High density H 4 Key in the adjustment value To correct the value once keyed in press the CLEAR button 5 Press the OK or INTERRUPT button to store the value in memory The equipment goes back to the ready state 6 For resetting the value repeat step 2 to 5 7 Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning job ...

Page 494: ...ory The equipment goes back to the ready state 5 Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning 6 If the desired image quality has not been attained repeat step 1 to 5 Color Mode Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Text Photo Custom mode Color 8339 8340 8341 8380 Manual density center value The larger the value is the darker the image becomes Acceptable values 0 to 255 Default...

Page 495: ...5 Procedure 1 While pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously turn the power ON 2 Key in the codes and press the START button 3 Key in the adjustment values Acceptable values 0 to 255 To correct the value once keyed in press the CLEAR button 4 Press the OK or INTERRUPT button to store the value in memory The equipment goes back to the ready state 5 Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning job 6 If...

Page 496: ...ted at color modes The same adjustment value is simultaneously applied to all cases of originals on the original glass for copier functions and network scanning functions and those placed on the RADF Adjustment Mode 05 Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 68 6 4 2 Density adjustment Code Color mode Original mode Remarks 7436 Black Text Photo The smaller the value is the background be...

Page 497: ...have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 68 6 4 2 Density adjustment Code Color mode Original mode Contents 8354 Full Color Text Photo The larger the value is the sharper the image becomes while the smaller the value is the softer the image becomes The smaller the value is the less moire tends to appear The acceptable value...

Page 498: ... to 5 6 4 8 RGB conversion method selection The color space conversion method of image is decided at color scanning Adjustment Mode 05 Procedure 1 While pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously turn the power ON 2 Key in the codes and press the START button 3 Key in the adjustment values Acceptable values 0 to 3 To correct the value once keyed in press the CLEAR button 4 Press the OK or INTERRUPT button to...

Page 499: ...eat step 1 to 5 6 4 10 Background offsetting adjustment for RADF common for copy scan and fax The background level for scanning originals with the RADF is adjusted when the background fogging at the scanning of a manually set original and an original used with the RADF is different This is to adjust the level of the background image removed when the scanning of the originals with the RADF is perfo...

Page 500: ...ge due to the subtle difference in the original sizes This shadow can be eliminated by adjusting the setting value The setting value is applied to all resolutions and color modes Adjustment Mode 05 Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 68 6 4 2 Density adjustment Code Item to be adjusted Remarks 9104 Compression quality of SlimPDF background processing The smaller the value the less t...

Page 501: ...re color is selected the colors other than pure colors of CMY might change Procedure 1 While pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously turn the power ON 2 Key in the codes to be adjusted and press the START button 3 Key in the adjustment value To correct a value once keyed in press the CLEAR button 4 Press the OK or INTERRUPT button to store the value in memory The equipment goes back to the ready state 5 L...

Page 503: ... START button 3 Key in an adjustment value To correct the value once keyed in press the CLEAR button 4 Press the OK or INTERRUPT button to store the value The equipment goes back to the ready state 5 Turn the power OFF Confirmation If possible perform a Fax transmission and check the adjusted density with the image on the recipient s side Color mode Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text P...

Page 504: ...ission level 4 4 is the most effective in the black mode 6 5 3 Background offsetting adjustment for RADF common for copy scan and fax The background level for scanning originals with the RADF is adjusted when the background fogging at the scanning of a manually set original and an original used with the RADF is different This is to adjust the level of the background image removed when the scanning...

Page 505: ...ight top cover 3 Take off the original glass P 4 12 4 3 1 Original glass 4 Take off the left top cover P 4 2 4 1 5 Left top cover 5 Move the carriage 1 1 toward the exit side Notes Rotate the drive pulley to move the carriage 6 Loosen the 2 fixing screws of the wire Tighten the screws by aligning the sections 5 and 6 of the carriage 1 with the inside of the exit side frame 2 Notes Confirm that the...

Page 506: ...ens unit the same number of lines needs to be visible P 4 13 4 3 4 Lens unit CCD driving PC board 6 6 3 Belt tension adjustment of the Scan motor 1 Take off the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Hook the belt tension jig 1 to the motor bracket 2 and hook section of the flame 3 3 Loosen the screws 4 and 5 4 The scan motor 6 is pulled by the belt tension jig 1 When it is stopped tighten the screw...

Page 507: ...JUSTMENT 6 81 6 7 Writing Section 6 7 1 Image Adjustment in the Writing Section Refer to the following pages for details P 6 13 A Primary scanning data writing start position Printer P 6 15 C Secondary scanning data writing start position P 6 16 D Primary scanning data writing start position at duplexing ...

Page 508: ...earance between the paper and the side guides is too wide it can be adjusted to between 0 and 1 mm using the following procedure the clearance between the paper and the guides is 1 to 2 mm including both front and rear sides Procedure 1 Take out the drawer 2 Move the side guide 1 Loosen 2 screws Fig 6 28 Fig 6 29 3 Move the side guide adjustment piece 1 to the front and tighten the screws by 0 5 m...

Page 509: ...rd since the output adjustment has been performed at the shipment for the high voltage transformer supplied as a service part Also do not perform the setting change when the high voltage power supply is replaced CH1 1 Main charger bias Y 2 Main charger bias M 3 Main charger bias C 4 Main charger bias K CH2 1 Main charger grid bias Y 2 Main charger grid bias M 3 Main charger grid bias C 4 Main char...

Page 510: ...ve gap For the adjustment of the doctor to sleeve gap perform the same procedure for the Y M C and K developer units Adjustment tool to use Doctor sleeve gap jig Adjustment procedure 1 Take out the developer unit Then discharge the developer material P 4 77 4 6 3 Developer material 2 Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws 1 Fig 6 31 3 Insert the doctor sleeve gap jig 1 to adjust the gap Insert the ga...

Page 511: ...the doctor blade from the sleeve before inserting the gauge Also be sure not to damage the protection sheet 1 Fig 6 33 4 Insert the gauge 0 55 of the doctor sleeve gap jig 1 between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade to make sure that the gauge can move smoothly in the front rear direction and the gauge 0 65 cannot be inserted into the gap Fig 6 34 ...

Page 512: ...embled Separation guide Fixing plate of separation guide Confirm the gap when the following parts are replaced or disassembled Fuser belt Thermistor Thermostat Fuser belt lubricating sheet Fuser belt pad Notes Wait until the fuser unit is completely cooled down and then start the adjustment Place the fuser unit on a flat surface Be sure not to damage the fuser belt with the gap adjustment jig Adju...

Page 513: ...de viewed from the front and then adjust the position of the fixing plate of the separation guide 2 Adjust it with a screw so that the 0 3 mm jig can be inserted between the separation guide and the fuser belt but the 0 8 mm jig cannot 3 Insert the jig into the last window on the fixing plate of the separation guide viewed from the front and then adjust it in the same manner 4 Insert the jig into ...

Page 514: ...C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING ADJUSTMENT 6 88 If the 0 8 mm jig can be inserted the gap is too wide Adjust it again Fig 6 38 1 Window for adjustment 2 Screw ...

Page 515: ...played when the counter exceeds the setting value according to the display condition based on the setting value which determines the display conditions Setting value treated as a threshold of the PM display Notes When 0 is entered as the setting value PM timing is not displayed 08 6190 Setting value of PM counter process unit K 08 6191 Setting value of PM time counter process unit K 08 6192 Settin...

Page 516: ...lue of PM counter developer material C 08 5575 Current value of PM time counter developer material C 08 5576 Current value of PM counter parts other than the PM parts of the process unit 08 5577 Current value of PM time counter parts other than the PM parts of the process unit Setting value which determines the display conditions 08 6198 Switching of output pages driving counts at PM process unit ...

Page 517: ...al C 0040 Parts other than the PM parts of the process unit 0100 If multiple parts have reached the maintenance time the sum of the corresponding code values listed above is displayed in hexadecimal numbers For example if the PM parts of the process units K and C and the developer materials K and C reach the maintenance time the 4 digit hexadecimal number code will be 00CC in hexadecimal numbers 0...

Page 518: ...he PM support mode is cleared the counter is reset In addition when the cleaner unit is recognized as a new one by the old new detection switch of CLEANER DRUM CHARGER M the counter is also reset 08 5566 Current value of PM counter process unit C 08 5567 Current value of PM time counter process unit C When the current value of CLEANER DRUM CHARGER C on the main screen or DRUM C on the sub screen i...

Page 519: ...pies and store them See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode 6S or list printing mode 9S 103 6S 6 START POWER ON 9S 103 9 START POWER ON 103 START Fig 7 1 Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment 2 Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations Refer to the Service Manual if necessary 3 Plug in the equipm...

Page 520: ...OK Enter the password if one has been set To finish the PM support mode shut down the equipment by pressing and holding ON OFF on the main screen for a few seconds The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is performed or the CANCEL button is pressed after moving from the main screen while it goes back to the sub screen after moving from the sub screen PM support mode activate...

Page 521: ...ve counts to replace the unit parts Displaying of the present drive counts is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its PM standard number Displaying of the present number of print develop pages When there are differences among the sub units parts _ is displayed and CHECK SUBUNIT is displayed at the top is displayed next to the present number when the nu...

Page 522: ...e for a chosen sub unit Moving to the next previous page Displaying of the standard number of drive counts to replace the sub unit parts Displaying of the present drive counts is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its PM standard number Displaying of the standard number of print develop pages to replace the sub unit parts Displaying of the present num...

Page 523: ...ENANCE PM 7 9 3 Clear screen Fig 7 5 When the INITIALIZE button is pressed Present number of print develop pages and Present driving counts are cleared and Previous replacement date is updated When the CANCEL button is pressed the counter is not cleared and the display returns to the main or sub screen 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 524: ...P SPACER Y LED GAP SPACER Y CLEANER DRUM CHARGER M Process unit M DRUM M DRUM BLADE M Drum cleaning blade GRID M Main charger grid MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE M Needle electrode CHARGER CLEANING PAD M Main charger cleaner DRUM GAP SPACER M LED GAP SPACER M CLEANER DRUM CHARGER C Process unit C DRUM C DRUM BLADE C Drum cleaning blade GRID C Main charger grid MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE C Needle electrode CHARGER C...

Page 525: ...counter 08 6230 2nd drawer Reset the feeding retry counter 08 6231 PFP upper drawer Reset the feeding retry counter 08 6232 PFP lower drawer Reset the feeding retry counter 08 6233 Bypass unit Reset the feeding retry counter 08 6234 LCF Reset the feeding retry counter 08 6235 SFB Bypass unit FEED ROLLER SFB SEP PAD SFB Separation roller RADF PICK UP ROLLER RADF FEED ROLLER RADF SEP ROLLER RADF Sep...

Page 526: ...ng the specified drive counts The life span of some parts such as feed roller is heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than the drive counts The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of print develop pages Example 1 When the number of print develop pages has reached the specified level Fig 7 6 Example 2 When the image failure occu...

Page 527: ...sheets fed from each paper source Be careful not to put oil on the rollers belts and belt pulleys when lubricating Parts list P I represents the page item in e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C Service Parts List Item Description Cleaning A Clean with alcohol B Clean with soft pad cloth or vacuum cleaner Lubrication Coating L Launa 40 SI Silicon oil W1 White grease Molykote EM 30L W2 White greas...

Page 528: ...ides of the original glass and ADF original Make sure that there is no dust on the mirrors 1 2 3 and lens after cleaning Then install the original glass and ADF original glass Notes Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be scanned When cleaning the...

Page 529: ... 15 7 6 2 LED unit Fig 7 9 For the items to check at the preventive maintenance refer to Appendix Preventive Maintenance Checklist B1 LED print head B2 Discharge LED When cleaning the LED print heads or discharge LED wipe them with soft pad or dry cloth Do no use vacuum cleaner since static generation may break them B2 B1 ...

Page 530: ... 7 16 7 6 3 Feed unit Fig 7 10 For the items to check at the preventive maintenance refer to Appendix Preventive Maintenance Checklist C6 Separation roller guide For lubrication refer to the following P 4 52 4 5 15 1st drawer separation roller guide P 4 54 4 5 17 2nd drawer separation roller guide C4 C1 C2 C6 C5 C3 C4 ...

Page 531: ...l rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 7 17 7 6 4 Automatic duplexing unit Fig 7 11 For the items to check at the preventive maintenance refer to Appendix Preventive Maintenance Checklist D1 D2 D1 ...

Page 532: ...055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 7 18 7 6 5 Bypass feed unit Fig 7 12 For the items to check at the preventive maintenance refer to Appendix Preventive Maintenance Checklist E1 E3 E2 ...

Page 533: ... MAINTENANCE PM 7 19 7 6 6 Main charger Fig 7 13 For the items to check at the preventive maintenance refer to Appendix Preventive Maintenance Checklist F1 Main charger case Clean the main charger case with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly and then wipe them with a dry cloth F4 F1 F2 F5 F3 F6 ...

Page 534: ...must be cleared to 0 zero This clearing can be performed in PM support mode Drum counter Drum K 08 6250 0 3 6 7 Drum Y 08 6252 0 3 6 7 Drum M 08 6254 0 3 6 7 Drum C 08 6256 0 3 6 7 Storage location of photoconductive drums The drum should be stored in a dark place where the ambient temperature is between 10 C to 35 C no condensation Be sure to avoid places where drums may be subjected to high humi...

Page 535: ...ce the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors such as the adherence of paper dust Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad Do not leave oil or fingerprints etc on the edge Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge Do not place the b...

Page 536: ...covery blade with a soft pad or cloth if dirt cannot be removed with a vacuum cleaner If the edge of recovery blade is damaged replace the blade regardless of the number of output pages Notes Never use water or alcohol for cleaning the transfer belt recovery blade G7 Drum gap spacer When replacing the drum gap spacer apply Floil GE 334C on the shaft of drum gap spacer ...

Page 537: ... PM 7 23 7 6 8 Developer unit K Y M and C Fig 7 16 For the items to check at the preventive maintenance refer to Appendix Preventive Maintenance Checklist H9 Development drive unit For lubrication refer to the following P 4 107 4 6 29 Developer drive unit P 4 120 4 6 38 Developer drive gear H7 H4 H6 H8 H3 H1 H5 H4 H2 ...

Page 538: ...m is being replaced Space the front seal from the developer sleeve and then insert a doctor blade cleaning jig into the doctor sleeve gap Then clean the doctor blade by running the jig for 3 times to and fro along with the edge of the blade Fig 7 17 2 Removal of foreign matter in the developer unit 1 Take off the developer unit 2 Space the front seal 3 Insert the cleaning jig all the way in the de...

Page 539: ...l on to a sheet of clean paper and then remove any foreign matter found If you cannot find any foreign matter exchange the developer material 3 Removal of foreign matter on the developer sleeve 1 Apply a sheet of paper to the developer sleeve 2 Scrape off foreign matter and developer material on the developer sleeve using the jig Fig 7 20 H2 Developer material After replacing the developer materia...

Page 540: ...4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 7 26 H7 Auto toner sensor Clean the surface of the auto toner sensor with a cotton swab or soft cloth with sufficient alcohol filled in ...

Page 541: ...g procedure Fully clean up the toner and such adhering to the roller with alcohol and then wipe it with a dry cloth until no trace remains Take care not to have the transfer belt surface being damaged or dented Replace the transfer belt with a new one regardless of the number of output pages if any crack or major scar is found J2 1st transfer roller Since the sponge may be damaged do not clean the...

Page 542: ...determined by the condition of its edge Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad Do not leave oil or fingerprints etc on the edge Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge Do not place the blade near a heat source Cleaning procedure Clean the blade edge with a c...

Page 543: ...E MAINTENANCE PM 7 29 7 6 10 Image quality control unit Fig 7 22 For the items to check at the preventive maintenance refer to Appendix Preventive Maintenance Checklist K2 Actuator If toner adheres to the actuator paper contact section clean it with a soft pad cloth or electric vacuum cleaner K4 K1 K3 K2 ...

Page 544: ...tenance refer to Appendix Preventive Maintenance Checklist L2 Paper clinging detection sensor Open the 2nd transfer unit and clean the paper clinging detection sensor with a cotton swab Notes Be sure to clean the entire surface of the sensor L3 2nd transfer roller paper guide If toner adheres to the ribs of the 2nd transfer roller paper guide clean it with a soft pad cloth or electric vacuum clean...

Page 545: ...new one regardless of the number of output pages which have been made Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning The finger may be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily M6 M8 Thermistor Thermostat Replace the thermistor or thermostat with a new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degr...

Page 546: ...013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 7 32 7 6 13 Paper exit section Reverse section Fig 7 25 For the items to check at the preventive maintenance refer to Appendix Preventive Maintenance Checklist N4 N2 N1 N3 ...

Page 547: ...g Replacement Operation check Parts list P I x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts 1 Pickup roller A 120 5 27 2 Separation roller A 120 4 10 3 Feed roller A 120 5 27 4 Registration roller A 4 30 5 Intermediate transfer roller A 3 13 6 Front read roller A 3 14 7 Rear read roller A 3 1 8 Reverse registration roller A 3 10 9 Exit reverse roller A 4 25 10 Platen sheet B or A 1 25 1 3 7 4 2 6 5 8 9 10 ...

Page 548: ...placement Operation check Parts list P I x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts 1 Pickup roller upper lower A 80 or every 2 5 years whichever comes first 5 26 2 Feed roller upper lower A 80 or every 2 5 years whichever comes first 5 26 3 Separation roller upper lower A 80 or every 2 5 years whichever comes first 5 30 4 Transport roller tooth face A R 2 35 2 40 5 Paper guide O 4 1 4 11 1 2 3 4 4 2 3 ...

Page 549: ... PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 7 35 7 6 16 LCF KD 1031 Fig 7 28 Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Operation check Parts list P I x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts 1 Pickup roller A 160 4 4 2 Feed roller A 160 4 3 3 Separation roller A 160 5 8 4 Drive gear tooth face 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 550: ...e stored in a dark place where the ambient temperature is between 10 C to 35 C no condensation Be sure to avoid places where drums may be subjected to high humidity chemicals and or their fumes 3 Drum cleaning blade Transfer belt cleaning blade This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10 C to 35 C and should also be protected against high humidity chemica...

Page 551: ...Developer material Y 1 Developer material M 1 Developer material C 1 LED spacer front side 3 34 11 LED spacer rear side 3 34 10 FR KIT FC50H Pressure roller 1 38 34 Fuser belt 1 38 13 Fuser belt pad 1 38 26 Fuser belt lubricating sheet 1 38 26 Separation finger 2 39 5 Ozone filter 2 7 41 Drum gap spacer front 4 34 15 Drum gap spacer back 4 34 12 Silicon oil 1 TBU KIT FC50 Transfer belt cleaning bl...

Page 552: ...bag Storing the drum 101 9 9 Download jig K PWA DLM 320F Updating the FAX firmware 102 1 10 Download jig 1 K PWA DLM 320 Updating the FAX firmware 11 ROM Installing the DLM board 102 10 12 Download jig PWA DWNLD JIG2F Updating the system firmware 102 2 13 Download jig PWA DWNLD JIG1F Updating the system firmware 14 Download jig 2 PWA DWNLD JIG1 Updating the system firmware 15 Download jig 2 PWA DW...

Page 553: ...7 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 7 39 Fig 7 29 1 2 9 10 11 3 4 25 7 12 13 14 15 8 16 17 18 20 21 19 22 23 24 5 6 ...

Page 554: ...s follows Part list P I represents the page item in e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C Service Parts List Symbol Grease name Volume Container Parts list P I L Launa 40 100 cc Oiler 101 21 W1 White grease Molykote EM 30L 100 g Bottle 101 24 W2 White grease Molykote HP 300 10 g Bottle 101 22 AV Alvania No 2 100 g Tube 101 23 FL FLOIL GE 334C 20 g Bottle 101 26 SI Silicon oil 100 cc Bottle 101 28 ...

Page 555: ...rication Coating W1 White grease Molykote EM 30L W2 White grease Molykote HP 300 Replacement Value Replacement cycle R1 Replacement R2 For preventive maintenance check if the parts are damaged and replace them as required If the parts are not replaced at the machine refreshing interval inspect them at the subsequent PM R3 Replace if deformed or damaged If the parts are not replaced at the machine ...

Page 556: ... 4 107 4 6 29 Developer drive unit 4 Fuser unit drive gear For lubrication refer to P 4 173 4 9 17 Fuser drive unit 5 Gear of registration motor For lubrication refer to P 4 70 4 5 34 Registration motor M14 D1 ADU transport roller For lubrication refer to P 4 202 4 11 10 Transport roller Upper and lower E2 Bypass separation roller For lubrication refer to P 4 40 4 5 3 Bypass separation roller J2 1...

Page 557: ...enter along with the following information This information will help the service center understand your problem and take quick action to find the solution 1 Serial Number 2 List Print Refer to the appropriate Service Manual Service Handbook for the detailed procedure to obtain a List Print A Enter the value given below to obtain a List Print by CSV file 9S 300 All CSV files B Enter the value give...

Page 558: ...og collection or how the customer recovered it E g You checked the problem and connected a USB device to the equipment No problem occurred when an attempt to collect the debug log was made however the customer did turn the main power switch OFF when the problem occurred so the log can be collected 2 Collection procedure 1 Note When collecting a log be sure to obtain consent from the user in advanc...

Page 559: ...IO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 3 XXXX Serial number of the equipment YYYY year MM month DD day HH hour mm minute SS second After the debug logs have been collected be sure to send them to the service center together with a report ...

Page 560: ... jam Power ON jam The paper is remaining on the paper transport path when power is turned ON P 8 63 E061 Incorrect paper size setting for 1st drawer The size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size setting of the equipment P 8 64 E062 Incorrect paper size setting for 2nd drawer The size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment P 8 64 E063 Incorrect paper size sett...

Page 561: ...r feed sensor P 8 50 E190 LCF misfeeding Paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor The paper fed from the LCF does not reach the LCF feed sensor P 8 51 E200 Paper transport jam 1st drawer transport jam Paper not reaching the registration sensor The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the 1st drawer feed sensor P 8 52 E210 2nd drawer transport jam Paper not reaching the re...

Page 562: ... feed sensor after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor P 8 54 E3C0 LCF transport jam Paper not reaching the registration sensor Paper fed from the LCF and passed through the 1st drawer feed sensor does not reach the registration sensor P 8 52 E3D0 LCF transport jam Paper not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor Paper fed from the LCF and passed through the 2nd drawer feed sensor does not...

Page 563: ...sed the ADU entrance sensor P 8 56 E550 Other paper jam Paper remaining jam on the transport path The paper is remaining on the transport path when printing is finished P 8 65 E551 Paper remaining jam on the transport path when a service call occurs P 8 66 E552 Paper remaining jam on the transport path when the cover is closed P 8 66 E570 Paper transport jam Reverse section Jam not reaching the re...

Page 564: ...d from the scanning section to exit section P 8 73 E724 Stop jam at the original registration sensor The trailing edge of the original does not pass the original registration sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor P 8 74 E725 Stop jam at the read sensor The trailing edge of the original does not pass the read sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor P 8 74 E726 Transpor...

Page 565: ... 79 E951 Stop jam at the job separator transport sensor The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the job separator transport sensor P 8 79 E9F0 Finisher jam Puncher unit Punching jam Jam occurred at the HP detection of punch motor MJ 1036 Punching jam Punching is not performed properly MJ 1107 1108 when MJ 6104 is installed P 8 105 EA10 Finisher jam Finisher section 1st transport motor M8 faul...

Page 566: ...r is being transported in the Finisher MJ 1107 1108 P 8 85 EA27 Paper transport jam paper not inserted The equipment detects a paper not inserted jam but the entrance sensor is turned ON before the equipment is stopped MJ 1107 1108 P 8 85 EA28 Paper transport jam paper holder plate operation delay An attempt to start the arm assisting operation for dropping paper on the finishing tray is made but ...

Page 567: ...ceived 2 A paper jam occurs when the supplying of the voltage of 24V is stopped during the transporting of paper MJ 1036 Cover open error 1 The front cover or stationary tray is opened during paper transport 2 A paper jam occurs when the supplying of the voltage of 24V is stopped during the transporting of paper MJ 1107 1 The front upper cover or stationary tray is opened during paper transport 2 ...

Page 568: ...irmware at the end of printing P 8 107 EAE0 Receiving time time out jam The printing has been interrupted because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher when the paper is transported from the equipment to the finisher P 8 107 EAF1 Finisher jam Stack exit roller nip home position detection error MJ 1036 P 8 100 EB30 Other paper jam Ready time time out jam The equipment judges...

Page 569: ... 8 110 ED14 Rear alignment plate home position error The rear alignment plate is not at the home position MJ 1107 1108 P 8 111 ED15 Paddle home position error The paddle is not at the home position MJ 1107 1108 P 8 112 ED16 Buffer tray home position error The buffer tray is not at the home position MJ 1107 1108 P 8 113 EF10 Finisher jam Saddle Stitcher section Paper not supported for Saddle Stitch...

Page 570: ...ition detection abnormality The stacker motor home position cannot be detected MJ 1108 P 8 117 EF17 Saddle Stitch Finisher folding blade home position detection abnormality The folding blade home position cannot be detected MJ 1108 P 8 117 EF18 Saddle Stitch Finisher additional folding roller home position detection abnormality The additional folding roller home position cannot be detected MJ 1108...

Page 571: ...124 C160 PFP lower drawer tray abnormality The PFP lower drawer tray up motor is not rotating or the PFP lower drawer tray is not moving normally the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP lower drawer P 8 124 C180 LCF tray up motor abnormality The LCF tray up motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving normally the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the L...

Page 572: ...gment temperature abnormality at high temperature P 8 132 C471 IH board initialization abnormality P 8 133 C472 Power supply abnormality P 8 133 C473 Surge pressure detection power and voltage upper limit abnormality P 8 134 C474 Power and voltage lower limit abnormality P 8 134 C475 IH power voltage abnormality power supply abnormality when door is opened P 8 134 C480 IGBT high temperature abnorm...

Page 573: ...it related service call Connection error between SYS board and LGC board P 8 146 C911 Toner cartridge IC chip access board abnormality P 8 147 C940 Engine CPU abnormality P 8 148 C962 LGC board ID abnormality P 8 148 C964 LGC board boot process abnormality P 8 148 C970 Process related service call High voltage transformer abnormality Leakage of the main charger is detected P 8 210 C9E0 Circuit rel...

Page 574: ...CB14 Paper holding arm motor abnormality MJ 1108 P 8 158 CB30 Movable tray shift motor abnormality The movable tray shift motor or the movable tray does not work properly MJ 1036 Movable tray shift motor abnormality The movable tray shift motor is not rotating or the movable tray is not moving normally MJ 1107 1108 P 8 158 P 8 160 CB31 Movable tray paper full detection error The actuator of the mo...

Page 575: ...U program error MJ 1107 1108 P 8 168 CB83 Saddle Stitch Finisher Main CPU program error MJ 1108 P 8 168 CB84 Hole Punch Unit Main CPU program error MJ 1107 1108 6104 P 8 168 CB91 Saddle Stitch Finisher flash ROM abnormality MJ 1108 P 8 168 CB92 Saddle Stitch Finisher RAM abnormality MJ 1108 P 8 169 CB93 Additional folding motor abnormality MJ 1108 P 8 169 CB94 Saddle transport motor abnormality MJ...

Page 576: ...y MJ 1036 P 8 176 CC61 Punch motor abnormality MJ 1036 Punch motor M3 home position detection error Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally MJ 1107 1108 when MJ 6104 is installed P 8 176 P 8 177 CC71 Punch ROM checksum error Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on MJ 1107 1108 when MJ 6104 is installed P 8 178 ...

Page 577: ...C control test pattern is not printed normally P 8 196 CE50 Temperature humidity sensor abnormality The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range P 8 197 CE60 Copy process related service call Drum thermistor 2 abnormality The output value of the drum thermistor 2 is out of a specified range P 8 197 CE70 Image control related service call Drum drive switching abnormality The drum swi...

Page 578: ... mounted caused by damage to areas other than those described in the F101_1 and F101_4 to F101_9 errors P 8 214 F101_4 Partition mount error The HDD cannot be connected mounted caused by damage to the work partition P 8 215 F101_5 Partition mount error The HDD cannot be connected mounted caused by damage to the registration partition P 8 216 F101_6 Partition mount error The HDD cannot be connected...

Page 579: ...ey consistency error HDD encryption parameter damage P 8 226 F109_4 Key consistency error license data damage P 8 227 F109_5 Key consistency error Encryption key for ADI HDD is damaged P 8 228 F109_6 Key consistency error Administrator password error for ADI HDD authentication P 8 229 F110 Communication related service call Communication error between System CPU and Scanner CPU P 8 231 F111 Scanne...

Page 580: ...t error P 8 235 F521 Integrity check error P 8 235 F550 Encryption partition error P 8 235 F600 Software update error P 8 236 F700 Overwrite error P 8 236 F800 Date error P 8 236 F900 Machine information alignment error P 8 236 F902_1 System firmware System software model information error Invalid system firmware software is installed P 8 237 F902_4 SYS board model information error P 8 238 Error ...

Page 581: ... P 8 239 1C31 File creation failure P 8 239 1C32 File deletion failure P 8 239 1C33 File access failure P 8 239 1C40 Image conversion abnormality P 8 239 1C60 HDD full failure during processing P 8 239 1C61 Address Book reading failure P 8 239 1C63 Terminal IP address unset P 8 239 1C64 Terminal mail address unset P 8 239 1C65 SMTP address unset P 8 240 1C66 Server time time out error P 8 240 1C69...

Page 582: ...or in parameters or arguments HOST NAME error RFC 501 Destination mail address error RFC 501 Terminal mail address error RFC 501 P 8 241 2503 Bad sequence of commands Destination mail address error RFC 503 P 8 241 2504 Command parameter not implemented HOST NAME error RFC 504 P 8 241 2550 Mailbox unavailable Destination mail address error RFC 550 P 8 241 2551 User not local Destination mail addres...

Page 583: ... 2B80 Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing nearly full Hard disk space in BOX partition is nearly full 90 2B90 Insufficient Memory Insufficient memory capacity P 8 242 2BA0 Invalid Box password specified Invalid Box password P 8 242 2BA1 Incorrect paper size invalid color mode invalid resolution The specified paper size color mode or resolution is not available P 8 242 2BB0 Job canceled Job cance...

Page 584: ... not available Disabled WS Scan P 8 243 2A40 System fatal error System error P 8 243 2A50 Job canceling Job canceling 2A51 Power failure Power failure P 8 243 2A60 Authentication for WS Scan failed WS Scan user authentication failure P 8 243 2A70 Insufficient permission to execute RemoteScan Remote Scan privilege check error P 8 243 2A71 Insufficient permission to execute WS Scan WS Scan privilege...

Page 585: ...43 Encryption error Failed to create file Encryption error P 8 244 2C44 Creating the image file was not permitted Encryption PDF enforced mode error P 8 244 2C45 Failed in making meta data Meta data creation error Scan to Email P 8 244 2C60 Failed to process your Job Insufficient disk space HDD full failure during processing P 8 244 2C61 Failed to read AddressBook Address Book reading failure P 8 ...

Page 586: ...a data Meta data creation error Scan to File P 8 246 2D62 Failed to connect to network destination Check destination path File server connection error P 8 246 2D63 Specified network path is invalid Check destination path Invalid network path P 8 246 2D64 Logon to file server failed Check username and password Login failure P 8 246 2D65 There are too many documents in the folder Failed in creating ...

Page 587: ...8 247 2E15 Document size exceeded limit or maximum size Exceeding the maximum size for file sharing P 8 247 2E30 Failed to store document s in USB folder Creation of a directory failed P 8 247 2E31 Failed to store document s in USB folder File creation failure in USB storage P 8 247 2E32 Failed to store document s in USB folder File deletion failure in USB storage P 8 247 2E33 Failed to store docu...

Page 588: ...been detected in the received mail Content Type error P 8 249 3B40 Decode Error has been detected in the received mail E mail decode error P 8 249 3C10 Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail TIFF analysis error P 8 249 3C13 Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail P 8 249 3C20 Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail TIFF compression error P...

Page 589: ...50 3E20 POP3 Connection Timeout Error has been occurred in the received mail POP3 server connection time out error P 8 250 3E30 POP3 Login Error has been occurred in the received mail POP3 login error P 8 250 3E40 POP3 Login Error occurred in the received mail POP3 login method error P 8 250 3F10 File I O Error has been occurred in this mail The mail could not be received until File I O is recover...

Page 590: ...e user code P 8 251 4113 Quota over error The number of the assigned pages set by department management has reached 0 The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the department code P 8 251 4121 Job canceling due to external counter error P 8 251 4211 Printing data storing limitation error Printing with its data being stored to the HDD temporarily Proof print Private print Sched...

Page 591: ...failure exceeding maximum number of registrations A new font cannot be registered because the number of fonts registered in this equipment has reached the limit P 8 252 4612 Font download failure HDD full A new font cannot be registered because there is not sufficient space in the font storage area of this equipment P 8 252 4613 Font download failure others A new font cannot be registered due to o...

Page 592: ...L certificate is not valid P 8 254 5016 Expired SSL certificateIncorrect time in MFP Expired SSL certificate SSL certificate is expired P 8 254 5017 Other SSL certificate related error Other SSL certificate related error SSL certificate is invalid P 8 254 5018 Invalid DNS error Invalid DNS error DNS address is invalid P 8 254 5019 Connection error Connection error Settings for initial URL and prox...

Page 593: ...Illegal period Card related error Expired card The card cannot be used because it has expired P 8 257 6033 No entering record Card related error Invalid flag data no room entry data The card cannot be used because no room entry data are recorded in it P 8 257 6034 Illegal entering record Card related error Invalid flag data invalid card data The card cannot be used because the data required for th...

Page 594: ...hts reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 38 6121 SecureErase fails Automatic Secure Erase failure P 8 259 6131 SNTP server synchronization failure Synchronization with the SNTP server failed P 8 259 Error code Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Contents Troubleshooting ...

Page 595: ...te Reversing Automatic Document Feeder ROM DF firmware installation failure P 8 260 7119 Failed to update PFC ROM PFC firmware installation failure P 8 260 711D Failed to remove License Key License key returning failure P 8 261 711F Failed to install License Key License key installation failure P 8 261 71A4 Failed in consistency confirmation of cryptographic key Cryptographic key consistency confi...

Page 596: ...cation failed Ipsec error if auth for shared key failed P 8 265 8034 Invalid Certificate Ipsec error if invalid certificate uploaded P 8 266 8035 Certificate Type unsupported Ipsec error if certificate not supported P 8 266 8036 Invalid certificate authority Ipsec error if invalid certificate authentication P 8 266 8037 Certificate unavailable Ipsec error if certificate are not avialable P 8 266 8...

Page 597: ...S update error P 8 270 8064 Secure Update to Secondary IPv6 DDNS failed Secure secondary DDNS update error P 8 270 8065 IPv6 Update to Primary DDNS failed IPv6 primary DDNS update error P 8 270 8066 IPv6 Update to Secondary DDNS failed IPv6 secondary DDNS update error P 8 270 8067 IPv4 Update to Primary DDNS failed IPv4 primary DDNS update error P 8 270 8068 IPv4 Update to Secondary DDNS failed IP...

Page 598: ...in Clock Skew error due to difference in Time between Server and MFP Active Directory Domain Clock Skew error due to difference in Time between Server and MFP P 8 273 8129 Active Directory Domain Kerberos Ticket has expired and cannot be used for Authentication Active Directory Domain Kerberos Ticket has expired and cannot be used for Authentication P 8 273 812A Active Directory Domain Verificatio...

Page 599: ...de staple mode 0 Non sort Non staple 1 Group 2 Sort 7 Front staple 8 Double staple 9 Rear staple A Saddle stitch B Center fold D ADF mode 0 Unused 1 AUTO FEED SADF 2 STACK FEED E APS AMS mode 0 Not selected 1 APS 2 AMS F Duplex mode 0 Not selected 1 Book 2 Double sided Single sided 4 Double sided Duplex copying 8 Single sided Duplex copying G Unused H Image shift 0 Unused 1 Book 2 Left 3 Right 4 T...

Page 600: ...aper 8 Plain paper 1 9 Plain paper 2 A Thin paper B OHP film C Thick 1 reverse D Thick 2 reverse E Thick 3 reverse F Thick 4 reverse G Special paper 1 reverse H Special paper 2 reverse I Envelope J Tab paper K Plain paper reverse L Recycled paper reverse M Thin paper reverse N Special paper 3 reverse O Special paper 3 reverse P Envelope reverse Z Unused Q RADF size mixed 0 Unused 1 Size mixed 2 Si...

Page 601: ...r transport jam Jam not reaching the exit sensor Phenomenon of paper jamming Check item Measures Paper jamming immediately after the removal and installation of the transfer belt unit Transfer belt unit Check if the transfer belt unit is installed properly P 4 130 4 7 3 Transfer belt unit TBU Paper separation failure at separation guide in the Fuser Unit Fuser unit Paper transport check Check the ...

Page 602: ...lace the transfer belt unit Paper folded in one side and fused during duplex printing Check if toner adheres to the fuser entry guide Clean it if needed All Exit sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 ALL OFF 9 C Actuator check Connector check Harness check LGC board Board check Connector check CN355 CN361 CN362 Harness check DRV board Board check Connector check CN450 CN451 CN461 Harness ...

Page 603: ...ing edge margin Adjust the margin with 05 4402 Leading edge position adjustment to Color 5 5 mm Specification Black 4 2 mm Color 5 mm Use A3 LD paper It is easy to check skew with a copy of a solid image about 10 mm on its leading edge Refer to P 6 15 C Secondary scanning data writing start position Scratches on the leading edge of paper Check if toner adheres to the exit gate Clean it if needed P...

Page 604: ... check DRV board Board check Connector check CN450 CN451 CN462 Harness check LGC board Board check Connector check CN361 CN362 Harness check ADU Check if the connector between the ADU and equipment is connected Parts to be replaced Remark Registration sensor DRV board LGC board Rollers in the ADU Clean or replace it Classification Error content Paper transport jam Bypass misfeeding paper not reach...

Page 605: ...01 Connector check CN391 J1016 Harness check DRV board Board check Connector check CN462 CN450 CN451 Harness check LGC board Board check Connector check CN361 CN362 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Feed sensor DRV board LGC board 1st drawer feed clutch 1st drawer feed roller Replace it if it is worn out 1st drawer separation roller Replace it if it is worn out 1st drawer pickup roller Rep...

Page 606: ...pper drawer misfeeding paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor Check item Measures PFP upper drawer feed sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 0 C Connector check CN247 J959 J975 Harness check PFP upper drawer feed clutch Clutch check Perform the output check 03 226 Connector check CN246 J960 J963 Harness check LGC board Board check Connector check CN371 Harness check P...

Page 607: ...rawer feed clutch LGC board PFP board PFP lower drawer feed roller Replace it if it is worn out Separation roller Replace it if it is worn out Pickup roller Replace it if it is worn out Classification Error content Paper transport jam LCF misfeeding paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor Check item Measures LCF feed sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 COPY ON 9 F Connector check CN1 CN6...

Page 608: ...eaching the registration sensor LCF transport jam not reaching the registration sensor Check item Measures Registration sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 ALL OFF 9 A Connector check CN462 J1114 J1077 Harness check 1st drawer feed clutch Clutch check Perform the output check 03 201 Connector check CN391 J1016 Harness check 2nd drawer feed clutch Clutch check Perform the output check 03...

Page 609: ... reaching the feed sensor LCF transport jam not reaching the feed sensor Check item Measures Feed sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 ALL OFF 9 B Connector check CN462 J1114 J1078 Harness check Transport clutches high speed Clutch check Perform the output check 03 230 Connector check CN453 J1089 Harness check Transport clutches low speed Clutch check Perform the output check 03 233 Conn...

Page 610: ...AX ON 1 F Connector check J1085 J1111 CN454 Harness check LGC board Board check Connector check CN371 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark 2nd drawer feed sensor LGC board Feed roller Replace it if it is worn out Separation roller Replace it if it is worn out Pickup roller Replace it if it is worn out Transport roller Replace it if it is worn out Classification Error content Paper transport j...

Page 611: ... D Connector check J1064 J1104 Harness check ADU entrance sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 ALL OFF 9 G Connector check J1067 CN421 Harness check Reverse motor Motor check Perform the output check 03 121 171 Connector check J1001 J1118 CN351 Harness check LGC board Connector check CN353 CN390 Harness check Board check ADU board Connector check CN420 CN421 CN422 J1064 Harness check Boa...

Page 612: ...heck Bracket check Parts to be replaced Remark ADU entrance sensor ADU motor LGC board ADU board Rollers in the ADU Replace it if it is worn out Pressure spring Classification Error content Paper transport jam Jam not reaching the reverse sensor Check item Measures Reverse sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 ALL OFF 9 D Connector check J1064 J1104 Harness check Fuser motor Motor check P...

Page 613: ...everse sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 ALL OFF 9 D Connector check J1064 J1104 Harness check Reverse motor Motor check Perform the output check 03 121 171 Connector check J1001 J1118 CN351 Harness check Reverse gate solenoid Solenoid check Perform the output check 03 222 03 223 Connector check J1010 J1118 CN351 Harness check LGC board Connector check CN353 CN390 Harness check Board ...

Page 614: ... board Separation roller Replace it if it is worn out Check item Measures Feed sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 ALL OFF 9 B Connector check J1078 J1114 CN462 Harness check DRV board Board check Connector check CN462 CN450 CN451 Harness check LGC board Board check Connector check CN361 CN362 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark 1st drawer feed sensor DRV board LGC board Separatio...

Page 615: ... Replace it if it is worn out Check item Measures Feed sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 ALL OFF 9 B Connector check J1078 J1114 CN462 Harness check 2nd drawer paper feed sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 4 D Connector check J1085 J1111 CN454 Harness check DRV board Board check Connector check CN454 CN462 CN450 CN451 Harness check LGC board Board check Connector ch...

Page 616: ...TROUBLESHOOTING 8 60 DRV board Board check Connector check CN462 CN450 CN451 Harness check LGC board Connector check CN361 CN362 Board check Drive unit Rollers Gear check Roller check Parts to be replaced Remark Registration sensor DRV board LGC board Rollers Replace it if it is worn out Check item Measures ...

Page 617: ...tection sensor Phenomenon of paper jamming Check item Measures Paper jamming immediately after the removal and installation of the transfer belt unit Transfer belt unit Check if the transfer belt unit is installed properly P 4 130 4 7 3 Transfer belt unit TBU Paper stop jam at transfer belt Drawer Check if paper is folded at the leading edge No scratches on the paper leading edge Drawer Check if p...

Page 618: ...ler bias correction factor of the leading trailing edge of the paper The larger the value the smaller the transfer voltage of the leading trailing edge of the paper Codes to be changed Initial value of the transfer bias of the leading edge of the paper 0 Color mode print top side 05 2938 Color mode print back side 05 2939 Black mode print top side 05 2940 Black mode print back side 05 2941 Sub cod...

Page 619: ...e unit check Gear check Roller check Developer unit Replace the Developer unit Parts to be replaced Remark Rollers Developer unit Classification Error content Other paper jam Power ON jam Check item Measures Sensor in the jamming area Sensor check Refer to the table below Connector check Harness check LGC board Board check Connector check Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Sensor in the jam...

Page 620: ...cover PFP upper drawer feed sensor 03 FAX ON 0 C PFP lower drawer feed sensor 03 FAX ON 0 D Bridge unit Bridge unit Bridge unit transport sensor 1 Entrance sensor 03 ALL OFF 0 A Bridge unit transport sensor 2 Exit sensor 03 ALL OFF 0 B Finisher Finisher door Sensors in the finisher Classification Error item Other paper jam Image data to be printed cannot be prepared Check item Measures Other Remov...

Page 621: ...HDD check Replace parts Remarks SYS board LGC board HDD Classification Error content Other paper jam Image transport ready time out jam Check item Measures LGC board Connector check Parts to be replaced Remark LGC board Classification Error content Other paper jam Paper remaining on the transport path when printing is finished caused by a multiple paper feeding Step Check Item Result Measure Next ...

Page 622: ...F 9 F Feed sensor 03 ALL OFF 9 B Exit area Fuser cover Exit sensor 03 ALL OFF 9 C ADU ADU ADU entrance sensor 03 ALL OFF 9 G ADU exit sensor 03 ALL OFF 9 H Bypass feed unit Side cover 2nd drawer feed sensor 03 FAX ON 4 D LCF LCF side cover LCF feed sensor 03 COPY ON 9 F PFP PFP side cover PFP upper drawer feed sensor 03 FAX ON 0 C PFP lower drawer feed sensor 03 FAX ON 0 D Bridge unit Bridge unit ...

Page 623: ...a Cover Sensor Test Mode Input check Registration area Jam access cover Registration sensor 03 ALL OFF 9 A Paper clinging detection sensor 03 ALL OFF 9 E Registration pass sensor 03 ALL OFF 9 F Feed sensor 03 ALL OFF 9 B Exit area Fuser cover Exit sensor 03 ALL OFF 9 C ADU ADU ADU entrance sensor 03 ALL OFF 9 G ADU exit sensor 03 ALL OFF 9 H Bypass feed unit Side cover 2nd drawer feed sensor 03 FA...

Page 624: ... check Connector check CN374 CN372 CN373 CN369 Harness check Front cover switch Switch check Perform the input check 03 ALL OFF 7 C Connector check J1052 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Switching regulator LGC board High voltage transformer Front cover switch Classification Error content Cover open jam PFP side cover open jam Check item Measures PFP side cover opening closing switch Is t...

Page 625: ...GC board Board check Connector check CN354 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Side cover switch LGC board Classification Error content Cover open jam Jam access cover open jam Check item Measures Jam access cover opening closing switch Is the jam access cover opening closing switch working Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 4 A Connector check J1083 J1111 Harness check DRV board Board check ...

Page 626: ...open jam LCF side cover open jam Check item Measures LCF side cover opening closing switch Is the switch working Perform the input check 03 COPY ON 9 A Connector check CN7 CN70 Harness check LCF board Board check Connector check CN7 CN1 Harness check LGC board Board check Connector check CN371 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark LCF side cover opening closing switch LCF board LGC board ...

Page 627: ...he input check 03 ALL OFF 7 B Connector check J805 Harness check LGC board Board check Connector check CN354 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Bridge unit cover opening closing detection sensor LGC board Classification Error content Cover open jam Job separator cover open jam Check item Measures Job separator cover switch Is the Job separator cover switch working Perform the input check 03...

Page 628: ...ck Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 7 H Connector check CN74 J88 J86 Harness check RADF board Board check Connector check CN74 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Original registration sensor RADF board Pickup roller Replace it if it is worn out Feed roller Replace it if it is worn out Separation roller Replace it if it is worn out Classification Error content RADF jam Feed signal reception...

Page 629: ...ck CN75 J94 Harness check RADF board Board check Connector check CN75 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Reading start guide of the RADF Paper guide of the RADF Read sensor RADF board Registration roller Replace it if it is worn out Read roller Replace it if it is worn out Classification Error content RADF jam Jam not reaching the original exit reverse sensor during scanning Check item Meas...

Page 630: ... J94 Harness check Original width detection sensor 2 Sensor check Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 8 G Connector check J94 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Registration sensor RADF board Registration roller Replace it if it is worn out Original width detection sensor 1 Original width detection sensor 2 Classification Error content RADF jam Stop jam at the read sensor Check item Measures ...

Page 631: ...g power supply Check if the 24V and 5V outputs of the switching power supply are normal Board check Connector check Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark RADF board SYS board Switching power supply Classification Error content RADF jam Stop jam at the original exit reverse sensor Check item Measures Exit roller Clean the exit roller if it is stained Stop jam at the original exit reverse sensor...

Page 632: ...RADF jam access cover sensor RADF board Classification Error content RADF jam RADF open jam Check item Measures RADF opening closing sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 7 D Connector check J87 CN80 Harness check Is the RADF opening closing sensor adjusted within the specified range RADF board Board check Connector check CN80 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark RADF opening ...

Page 633: ... TROUBLESHOOTING 8 77 Original jam access cover opening closing sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 7 C Connector check J97 J92 CN75 Harness check RADF board Connector check CN75 Board check Replace parts Remarks Original jam access cover opening closing sensor RADF board Check item Measures ...

Page 634: ...LD paper It is easy to check skew with a copy of a solid image about 10 mm on its leading edge Refer to 6 1 1 Image Related Adjustment There are scratches on the leading paper edge Replace it if needed Check if the guide is not deformed Replace it if needed All Bridge unit exit Check that Mylar on the bridge unit exit is not deformed Replace it if needed E920 Finisher Check if paper jamming occurs...

Page 635: ... system of the equipment and bridge unit Check if the rollers in the exit roller the pressure spring and the bridge unit are worn out Parts to be replaced Remark Bridge unit transport sensor 2 exit sensor LGC board Classification Error content Job separator jam Jam not reaching the job separator transport sensor Stop jam at the job separator transport sensor Proce dure Check item Result Measure Ne...

Page 636: ...OSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 80 3 Replacing board Replace the JSP board Replace the LGC board Parts to be replaced Remark JSP feed sensor JSP board LGC board Proce dure Check item Result Measure Next Step ...

Page 637: ...conducted replace the motor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Finisher control PC board FIN CN14 Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing the motor and the connector exchange the finisher control PC board FIN Classification Error c...

Page 638: ...F 1 5 to 2 1 mm solenoid ON 2 3 to 2 9 mm If it is not adjust it Entrance motor M1 Check the harness between the entrance motor M1 and the finisher controller board CN26 If there is any abnormality correct it Interface PC board I F Check the harness between the transport path switching solenoid SOL5 and the interface PC board CN6 If there is any abnormality correct it Board check Connector check C...

Page 639: ... the finisher control PC board FIN Classification Error content Paper jam in finisher section Paper transport delay jam Phenomenon of paper jamming Check item Measures All Transport sensor Sensor check Connector check S2 Harness check Finisher controller PC board Board check CN22 Parts to be replaced Remark Transport sensor Finisher controller PC board Classification Error content Paper jam in fin...

Page 640: ...CN7 CN22 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Entrance sensor Transport sensor Finisher contoller PC board Phenomenon of paper jamming Check item Measures All Finisher Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it if there is Entrance sensor S1 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Transport sensor S2 Sensor check Connector check Harn...

Page 641: ...t sensor Sensor check S2 Connector check CN7 CN22 Harness check Paper position sensor Sensor check S6 1 S6 2 Connector check CN1 CN2 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Entrance sensor Transport sensor Paper position sensor Finisher contoller PC board Phenomenon of paper jamming Check item Measures All Finisher Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equip...

Page 642: ... on the transport path of the equipment and remove it if there is Entrance sensor S1 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Transport sensor S2 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Processing tray sensor S12 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Paper holding cam Is there any mechanical problem when the paper holding cam is rotated Buffer roller drive motor M6 Motor check Connector ...

Page 643: ...nsor S12 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Paper holding cam Is there any mechanical problem when the paper holding cam is rotated Assist arm motor M10 Motor check Connector check Harness check Buffer tray guide Open and close the buffer tray guide If there is any mechanical problem fix its mechanism Buffer tray guide motor M2 Motor check Connector check Harness check Finisher control PC ...

Page 644: ...rt motor M8 abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the motor 2nd transport motor M4 abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the motor Entrance path sensor S19 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP86 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measu...

Page 645: ...he Finisher Entrance path sub path sensor Probable cause Checking and measures 1st transport motor M8 abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the motor 2nd transport motor M4 abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the motor Entrance path sensor S19 abnormality ...

Page 646: ...or S11 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP26 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is no...

Page 647: ... check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Middle path sensor S7 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP84 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded ...

Page 648: ...f paper jamming Check item Measures All Finisher Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it if there is Entrance sensor S1 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Feeding sensor S22 Sensor check S22 Connector check CN8 Harness check Paper position sensor Sensor check S6 1 S6 2 Connector check CN1 CN2 Harness check Transport sensor S2 Sens...

Page 649: ...ge is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Finisher control PC board FIN CN5 Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the e...

Page 650: ...isher controller PC board Sensor check Connector check CN11 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Processing tray sensor Finisher controller PC board Phenomenon of paper jamming Check item Measures All Finisher Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it if there is Processing tray sensor S12 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Fin...

Page 651: ...ithin the range of 3 3V 5 when OFF If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the switch Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Finisher control PC board FIN CN10 CN13 Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing the sw...

Page 652: ...able cause Checking and measures Staple unit stapling start position sensor S17 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP23 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when the sensor is ON and within the range of 3 3V 5 when OFF If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the staple unit Staple unit staple empty sensor S18 abnormality M...

Page 653: ...clip from the side and then reattach it Connector check CN2 Harness check Finisher controller PC board Board check Connector check CN2 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Stapler Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Stapler Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment or on the finishing tray Remove it if there is Is the jam cleared by tak...

Page 654: ...r terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Finisher control PC board FIN CN22 Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing the sensor and the connector exchange the finisher control PC board FIN Check item Measures Entrance sensor Sensor check S1 Connector check CN7 Harness check Finisher controller PC board Board check Connec...

Page 655: ...ransport motor Is the harness between the stack transport motor M5 and the finisher control PC board CN10 disconnected or open circuited Parts to be replaced Remark Stack belt exit home position sensor Stack transport motor Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Stack belt exit home position sensor Check if there is a disconnection of the connector incorrect installation or breakage of t...

Page 656: ... home position sensor S13 The stack exit roller home position sensor S13 does not detect that the exit roller is not at the upper position after the stack exit roller motor M6 has been driven in the specified time when the exit roller is moved down The stack exit roller home position sensor S13 does not detect that the exit roller is at the upper position after the stack exit roller shift motor M6...

Page 657: ...n the saddle stitch unit opening closing switch SW5 and the CN13 of the saddle control PC board or the CN2 of the interface PC board I F is disconnected or open circuited Correct if so Replace parts Remarks Saddle stitch unit opening closing switch Finisher controller PC board Interface PC board Classification Error item Finisher jam Saddle stitcher section Check item Measures Finisher saddle stit...

Page 658: ...the on the transport path of the equipment Remove it if there is Use paper accepted in the specifications Paper Do not use the paper longer than the specification Transport roller Fix any mechanical problem occurring when the transfer roller is rotated Feeding sensor S22 Sensor check S22 Connector check Harness check Junction box paper detection sensor S24 Sensor check S24 Connector check CN8 Harn...

Page 659: ...trance motor M1 Transport path switching solenoid SOL9 Interface PC board I F Saddle stitcher controller board Finisher controller board Classification Error item Finisher jam Saddle stitcher section Short paper jam in Saddle Stitch Finisher Check item Measures Finisher saddle stitcher Check if there is any paper in the finisher saddle stitcher or the on the transport path of the equipment Remove ...

Page 660: ...cting roller sensor Sensor check S29 Connector check CN20 Harness check Saddle stitcher controller board Connector check CN10 Board check Replace parts Remarks Feeding sensor Junction box paper detection sensor Transport path 2 sensor Transport path 3 sensor Ejecting roller sensor Saddle stitcher controller board Check item Measures ...

Page 661: ...hole punch control PC board Then check that the measured voltage is 3 0V or higher when not shielded and 1 2 or lower when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Hole punch control PC board CN3 C...

Page 663: ...back ON SYS board Connector check Board check LGC board Connector check Board check Parts to be replaced Remark SYS board LGC board Classification Error content Other paper jam Receiving time out jam Check item Measures Finisher Is the finisher working Check if the voltage 24V is being supplied to the finisher Check if the harness connecting the I F connector of the finisher side and LGC board is ...

Page 664: ...rk PFC board LGC board Classification Error content Other paper jam Skew adjustment motor M1 home position detection abnormality Check item Measures Skew adjustment motor M1 Rotate skew adjustment motor and fix its mechanism if it does not rotate smoothly Skew HP sensor S2 Skew adjustment motor M1 Hole punch control PC board Check if the connectors on the hole punch controller PC board HP board ar...

Page 665: ...heck item Measures Movable tray paper full sensor Fix any mechanical problem occurring when the actuator is moved Check if there is a disconnection of the connector incorrect installation or breakage of the movable tray paper full sensor S16 If there is reinstall the sensor correctly or replace it Check if the connector CN13 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the movable tray...

Page 666: ...disconnected from the shutter opening closing sensor S4 and the harnesses are open circuited Correct if so Shutter clutch Check if the connector CN10 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the shutter clutch CLT1 and the harnesses are open circuited Correct if so Parts to be replaced Remark Movable tray paper full sensor Shutter opening closing sensor Shutter clutch Finisher cont...

Page 667: ...r PC board is disconnected from the front alignment motor M5 and the harnesses are open circuited Correct if so Parts to be replaced Remark Front alignment plate home position sensor Front alignment motor Finisher controller PC board Classification Error content Other paper jam Rear alignment plate home position error Check item Measures Rear alignment plate Move the rear alignment plate Fix any m...

Page 668: ...nt motor Check if the connector CN17 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the rear alignment motor M6 and the harnesses are open circuited Correct if so Parts to be replaced Remark Rear alignment plate home position sensor Rear alignment motor Finisher controller PC board Classification Error content Other paper jam Paddle home position error Check item Measures Paddle Rotate t...

Page 669: ... buffer tray home position sensor S5 and the buffer tray guide motor M3 or the harnesses are open circuited Correct if any Parts to be replaced Remark Buffer tray home position sensor Buffer tray guide motor Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Buffer tray guide Open and close the buffer tray guide Fix any mechanical problem Buffer tray home position sensor Check if there is a disconne...

Page 670: ...OUBLESHOOTING 8 114 EF10 Paper not supported for Saddle Stitch Finisher MJ 1108 Check the paper size paper type or number of pages for stapling Change them if they are unsupported Parts to be replaced Remark Buffer tray home position sensor Assist arm motor Buffer tray guide motor Finisher controller PC board ...

Page 671: ...ase Front saddle stapler drive unit Unit check Connector check Harness check Saddle controller board Connector check CN3 Board check Replace parts Remarks Front saddle stapler drive unit Saddle controller board Classification Error item Finisher jam Saddle section Rear stapling is not correctly done Check item Measures Finisher Is there any paper remaining on the paper transport path in the Finish...

Page 672: ... Classification Error item Finisher jam Saddle section Outputting paper is not completed within a fixed time Check item Measures Finisher Is there any paper remaining in the paper transport path of the equipment or the saddle stitch section of the Finisher Exit sensor S31 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Saddle controller board Connector check CN19 Board check Replace parts Remarks Exit ...

Page 673: ... carrier Is there any mechanical problem when the stacker carrier is moved Stacker home position sensor S33 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Stacker motor M14 Motor check Connector check Harness check Saddle controller board Connector check CN4 Board check Replace parts Remarks Stacker home position sensor S33 Stacker motor M14 Saddle controller board Classification Error item Finisher j...

Page 674: ...rier is moved Additional folding home position sensor S39 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Additional folding motor M20 Motor check Connector check Harness check Saddle controller board Connector check CN18 CN19 Board check Replace parts Remarks Additional folding home position sensor S39 Additional folding motor M20 Saddle controller board Classification Error item Finisher jam Saddle s...

Page 675: ...on Transported paper cannot be detected in the stacker Check item Measures Finisher Is there any paper remaining in the paper transport path in the equipment or the saddle stitch section of the Finisher Stacker paper detection sensor S30 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Saddle controller board Connector check CN19 Board check Replace parts Remarks Stacker paper detection sensor S30 Saddl...

Page 676: ...ated normally 03 112 Connector check Harness check Drum TBU drive unit Check if there is any foreign matter in the row of the color developer drive gears Check if there is any damage on the tooth surface of the color developer drive gears Check if there is any scratch on the caliber or the shaft of each color developer drive gear Check if the proper amount of grease is applied to the caliber or th...

Page 677: ...ORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 121 LGC board 1st 2nd drawer feed roller Bypass unit Paper feeding drive section Transport roller Parts to be replaced Remark ...

Page 678: ... CN371 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board PFP board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 2 Is the LED on the PFP motor board lit without flashing Yes 3 No Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited Check if the co...

Page 679: ...r open circuited 2 Is the tray up sensor working Perform the input check 03 ALL OFF 0 E 03 FAX ON 4 E Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected CN460 J1088 J1094 J1097 J1103 Check if the connector on the DRV board is disconnected CN450 CN451 CN460 Check if the connector on the LGC board is disconnected CN361 CN362 Check if the slit reaches the sensor Check if the connector pins...

Page 680: ...ted Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 2 Is the tray up sensor working Perform the input check 03 COPY ON 5 A 03 COPY ON 5 E Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected Check if any of the connectors CN241 CN244 and CN246 on the PFP bo...

Page 681: ...ited Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 2 Are the LCF tray up sensor and LCF tray bottom sensor working Perform the input check 03 COPY ON 8 A 03 COPY ON 8 E Yes 3 No Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected CN6 CN63 CN64 Check if any of the connectors CN100 CN104 and CN105 on the LCF board is disconnected Check if th...

Page 682: ... Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 2 Are the LCF end fence home stop position sensors working Perform the input check 03 COPY ON 8 H 03 COPY ON 8 G Yes 3 No Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected CN4 CN40 CN400 CN403 Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN107 on the LCF board is disconnected Check if the conn...

Page 683: ...onnector CN100 on the LCF board is disconnected Check if the power line connector CN101 on the LCF board is disconnected Check if the connector CN371 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited 2 LCF transport motor LGC board Check if the connector ...

Page 684: ...connector 3 When the carriage is driven check if the harness interferes with it or parts are caught in it CCD board Lens unit 1 Check if the connector of the CCD board is connected properly 2 Check if the CCD board is installed properly Check that the lens unit is not tilted or the screw is securely tighten SYS board 1 Check if the connector of the SYS board CN122 CN126 is connected properly 2 Che...

Page 685: ...onnected properly 2 Check if the harness is caught or open circuited 3 SYS board 1 Check if the connector of the SYS board CN121 CN125 CN127 is connected properly 2 Check if the mounted parts on the SYS board are damaged or abnormal 3 Check if 24 V CN127 on the SYS board is short circuited 4 Check if 24 V is supplied to the SYS board CN127 4 Scan motor 1 Check if the belt tension is loosened 2 Che...

Page 686: ...tor properly 4 Check if the harness of the motor is caught or open circuited Parts to be replaced Remark Carriage home position sensor Carriage home position sensor harness SYS board Scan motor Scan motor harness Classification Error content Scanning system related service call The scanning system does not operate due to a blowout of the fuse in the scanning system Check item Result Measure Is 24V...

Page 687: ... 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 131 Parts to be replaced Remark SYS board Fuse F204 Power supply harness LVPS ...

Page 688: ...sures 1 Power voltage Check if the power voltage is normal Is the voltage during the operation 10 of the rated voltage 2 Thermistor Check if the center and edge thermistor are installed properly Check if the harnesses of the center and edge thermistor are open circuited Check if the connectors of the center and edge thermistor are disconnected J1101 3 Switching regulator and fuser unit Is the fuse...

Page 689: ...A paper jam occurred 29 Classification Error item Fuser unit related service call Power is not supplied to the IH board Check item Measures Power supply Check if the power voltage is normal Is the voltage during the operation 10 of the rated voltage Side cover interlock switch Connector check J1008 CN354 Harness check Fuser unit Drawer connector check Thermostat check Unit check LGC board Connecto...

Page 690: ...he operation 10 of the rated voltage Fuser unit Drawer connector check Thermostat check Unit check IH board Connector check CN357 CN561 CN562 CN563 Board check Status counter 1 0 8 Power ON 2 Key in 2002 then press START 3 Change the current status counter value 08 2002 13 or 16 to 0 4 Turn the power OFF and then back ON Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready state Replace parts Rema...

Page 691: ...e normal ready state Replace parts Remarks Side cover interlock switch LGC board FIL board IH board Power supply Classification Error item Fuser unit related service call IGBT overheating abnormality Check item Measures IH board cooling fan Fan motor check Perform the output check 03 442 Connector check J1098 Harness check IH board Connector check CN561 CN562 CN563 Harness check LGC board Connecto...

Page 692: ...re that the equipment enters the normal ready state Replace parts Remarks IH board LGC board Power supply Classification Error content Fuser unit related service call Fuser unit counter abnormality Check item Measure LGC board Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited Check if EEPROM is mounted Status counter 1 Turn the power ON while 0 and 8 are pressed simu...

Page 693: ...or check CN355 CN356 Harness check Board check Parts to be replaced Remark Fuser unit LGC board Classification Error content Fuser unit related service call Fuser thermistor abnormality Check item Measure Fuser unit Drawer connector check Thermostat check Unit check Thermistor Connector check J1101 Check if the harnesses of the center and edge thermistor are open circuited LGC board Connector chec...

Page 695: ...heck J1116 J1117 Harness check Pressure roller contact release motor M13 Motor check Perform the output check 03 272 Connector check CN353 Harness check Fuser unit Drawer connector check Thermostat check Unit check LGC board Connector check CN355 CN356 Board check Replace parts Remarks Pressure roller contact release detection sensor Pressure roller contact release motor LGC board Classification E...

Page 696: ... is not broken Check that the gear is not damaged or worn One way clutch check Grease check in the gear shaft tooth flank LGC board Connector check CN355 CN356 Board check Replace parts Remarks Fuser belt rotation detection sensor Detection plate rotor Dirty damaged Fuser belt Deformed damaged Bushing of fuser belt drive shaft Worn Bushing of fuser drive unit Worn Drive plate Bend section broken G...

Page 697: ... is short circuited or open circuited Connector check SYS board Check if the conductor pattern on the SYS board is short circuited or open circuited Connector check Parts to be replaced Remark RADF board SYS board Classification Error item Optional communication related service call Communication error between Engine CPUs Check item Measures LGC board Turn the power OFF and then back ON using the ...

Page 698: ...SYS board and the connector CN350 on the LGC board are completely inserted Check if the connector pin between the SYS board connector CN128 and the LGC board connector CN350 is disconnected Check if the connectors CN380 CN381 CN382 CN383 CN384 CN385 CN386 and CN387 of the LED head are completely inserted and the harness is disconnected or open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC b...

Page 699: ...oard Y color CN382 M color CN380 C color CN386 K color CN384 Harness power supply LGC board Y color CN383 M color CN381 C color CN387 K color CN385 Harness flat calbe LED head Y color CN592 M color CN593 C color CN594 K color CN595 Harness power supply LED head Y color CN596 M color CN597 C color CN598 K color CN599 2 Check firmware version Check the version of the system firmware on the SYS board...

Page 700: ... 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 144 SYS board LED head Harness of LED head flat cable Harness of LED head power supply Parts to be replaced Remark ...

Page 701: ...ated service call Incorrect RADF installed to the equipment Check item Measure RADF Replace the RADF with the correct one Parts to be replaced Remark RADF Classification Error content Optional communication related service call The system has to be stopped because the control abnormality occurred Check item Measure Power Turn the power OFF and then back ON to check if the equipment operates normal...

Page 702: ... Check item Measure EEPROM EEPROM check LGC board IC socket check IC52 Board check Replacement part Measure EEPROM LGC board Classification Contents Circuit related service call SRAM board data abnormality LGC board Check item Measure EEPROM EEPROM check LGC board IC socket check IC52 Board check Replacement part Measure EEPROM LGC board Classification Contents Circuit related service call Connect...

Page 703: ... that the CTRG board of each cartridge Y M C and K is installed properly Avoid touching the contact point Wipe the contact point with a soft cloth if it s stained 3 Contact point on the equipment side Check that the spring of the contact point for each color Y M C and K is not deformed 4 Is the spring of the contact point returned when it is pushed lightly Yes No Check that the CTIF board is insta...

Page 704: ...ed or open circuited LGC board Board check Replacement part Measure LGC board Classification Contents Circuit related service call LGC board ID abnormality Check item Measure Error code Turn the power OFF and then back ON using the main power switch and then check if the error code changes to another one If it changes to another one follow the procedure for the changed error code LGC board Connect...

Page 705: ... the destination and then press the START button If the destination is not correct key in the correct one and then press the START button SRAM is initialized 3 After the confirmation message is displayed press the INTERRUPT button 4 Perform the panel calibration 08 9050 5 Enter the serial number 08 9601 Match it with the serial number on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment 6 Init...

Page 706: ...ved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 150 Check item Measure SYS board Board check Combination of the firmware version Check the combination of the firmware version of the system firmware engine firmware and scanner firmware Reinstall the scanner firmware Replacement part Measure SYS board ...

Page 707: ...ation error Check each color with its corresponding self diagnosis mode Y 08 4706 0 M 08 4706 1 C 08 4706 2 K 08 4706 3 Remarks The self diagnosis value other than 0 Normal indicates that an error has occurred Self diagnosis values 1 5 9 and 13 LED head unconnected error 2 Self diagnosis values 2 6 10 and 14 LED head mix error 4 Self diagnosis values 4 8 and 12 Checksum mismatch Gradation module e...

Page 708: ... at the LGC board side Y CN383 M CN381 C CN387 K CN385 Harness FFC at the LED head side Y CN592 M CN593 C CN594 K CN595 Harness power supply at the LED head side Y CN596 M CN597 C CN598 K CN599 Yes 4 No Repair it 5 4 The LED head used for the colors in which errors have occurred Repair it 5 5 Reset the self diagnosis value Change the setting value of the LED head communication error details to 0 N...

Page 709: ...head and LGC board Proce dure Check item Result Measure Next Step 1 Perform 08 4723 to identify the color of LED head in error 0 bit Y 1st bit M 2nd bit C 3rd bit K Remarks The value of each bit becomes 1 if error occurs e g Y color 1 M color 2 C color 4 K color 8 Y and K color 9 2 2 Is the LGC board normal Check the connectors of the LED head identified in step 1 Y color CN382 CN383 M color CN380...

Page 710: ...r CN380 C color CN386 K color CN384 Harness power supply LGC board Y color CN383 M color CN381 C color CN387 K color CN385 Harness flat cable LED head Y color CN592 M color CN593 C color CN594 K color CN595 Harness power supply LED head Y color CN596 M color CN597 C color CN598 K color CN599 Yes 4 No Replace it 4 LED head in error Replace it Replacement part Measure LGC board Harness of LED head f...

Page 711: ...rror has occurred between the equipment and finisher Check item Measure Finisher Check if the harness connecting the equipment and the finisher controller PC board is disconnected or open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is open circuited or short circuited Update the finisher firmware LGC board Check if the harness connecting the finisher and the LGC bo...

Page 712: ...ntrance motor M1 Finisher controller PC board Check Item Measure Feeding roller Rotate the feeding roller Fix any mechanical problem Entrance motor Check if the connector CN26 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the entrance motor M1 and the harnesses are open circuited Correct if so Replacement part Measure Entrance motor Finisher control PC board Classification Contents Fini...

Page 713: ...call Buffer roller drive motor abnormality The buffer roller drive motor is not rotating or the buffer roller is not moving normally Check Item Measure Buffer roller If there is mechanical problem when the buffer roller is rotated fix the mechanism Buffer roller drive motor M6 Check the connectors and harnesses between the buffer roller drive motor M6 and the finisher control PC board CN18 Replace...

Page 714: ...isher control board Connector check CN13 Board check Replace parts Remarks Exit motor Finisher control board Classification Error item Finisher related service call Check item Measures Paper pusher cam Is there any mechanical problem when the paper pusher cam is rotated Assist arm motor M10 Motor check Connector check Harness check Finisher control board Connector check CN13 Board check Replace pa...

Page 715: ...e measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity among the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connectors Finisher control PC board FIN CN4 CN10 Finisher control PC board FIN ...

Page 716: ...tray shift motor M7 and the finisher control PC board CN8 Movable tray position A B and C sensors S13 S14 and S15 Connector check Sensor check Replacement part Measure Movable tray shift motor M7 Movable tray position A B and C sensors S13 S14 and S15 Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Movable tray If there is mechanical problem when the movable tray is moved fix the mechanism Movabl...

Page 717: ...aper full detection sensor S16 and the finisher control PC board CN13 Replacement part Measure Movable tray paper full detection sensor S16 Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Movable tray paper full sensor Fix any mechanical problem occurring when the actuator is moved Check if there is a disconnection of the connector incorrect installation or breakage of the movable tray paper full...

Page 718: ...Rear alignment plate home position sensor S6 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP16 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector te...

Page 719: ... staple unit after the specified time during the clinching movement of the staple unit The staple unit clinching home position sensor S16 does not detect the opening of the staple unit at the start of the clinching Probable cause Checking and measures Staple motor M10 abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the staple unit Staple...

Page 720: ...sor does not work Check Item Measure Stapler Check the connectors and harnesses between the stapler M4 and finisher controller PC board CN2 Check the harnesses in the stapler Replacement part Measure Stapler Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Stapler Check the connectors and harnesses between the stapler and finisher controller PC board CN19 Check the harnesses in the stapler Parts t...

Page 721: ...e unit sliding home position sensor S3 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP18 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminal...

Page 722: ...d is disconnected from the stapler unit shift motor M9 and the harnesses are open circuited Correct if so Parts to be replaced Remark Stapler unit home position sensor Finisher controller PC board Classification Contents Finisher related service call Stapler shift motor abnormality Stapler shift motor is not rotating or staple unit is not moving normally Check Item Measure Stapler If there is mech...

Page 723: ... data writing Probable cause Checking and measures Finisher control PC board FIN abnormalit Replace the finisher control PC board FIN as the cause is a fault in the IC of the backup RAM Classification Contents Finisher related service call Backup RAM data abnormality Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON Check Item Measure Main power ...

Page 724: ...on of the finisher control PC board FIN Board check Replace parts Remarks Finisher control board Classification Error item Finisher related service call Saddle main program error Check item Measures Saddle control PC board Update the firmware version of the saddle control PC board SDL Board check Replace parts Remarks Saddle control PC board Classification Error item Finisher related service call ...

Page 725: ...h Finisher RAM abnormality Check item Measures Reproducibility Turn the power OFF and then back ON Saddle controller PC board SDL Check if the conductor pattern on the saddle controller PC board SDL is open circuited or short circuited Connector check Board check Replace parts Remarks Saddle controller PC board Classification Error item Finisher related service call The CB93 error also occurs when...

Page 726: ... Motor check Connector check Harness check Saddle control PC board SDL Connector check CN18 Board check Replace parts Remarks Saddle transport motor Saddle control PC board Classification Error item Finisher related service call The CB95 error also occurs when the error EF16 has occurred consecutively for 3 times Check item Measures Stacker carrier Is there any mechanical problem when the stacker ...

Page 727: ...m Measures Rear saddle stapler clinch unit Harness check Saddle control PC board SDL Connector check CN7 Board check Replace parts Remarks Rear saddle stapler clinch unit Saddle control PC board Classification Contents Finisher related service call An encoder pulse interruption error or rotation abnormality occurs in the saddle stitch finisher folding motor Check Item Measure Folding motor encoder...

Page 728: ...iven in the specified time when the exit roller is moved up Classification Contents Finisher related service call Saddle communication error Check Item Measure Interface PC board I F Connector check Harness check Finisher control PC board FIN Connector check Harness check Saddle control PC board SDL Connector check Harness check Interface PC board I F Board check Finisher control PC board FIN Boar...

Page 729: ...uited Correct if so Parts to be replaced Remark Stack transport motor Finisher control PC board Classification Contents Finisher related service call Transport motor abnormality The transport motor is not rotating or the stack transport roller 1 and 2 is not rotating normally Check Item Measure Stack transport roller If there is mechanical problem when the stack transport roller 1 and 2 are rotate...

Page 730: ...paper holder cam is rotated fix the mechanism Paper holder home position sensor S6 Check the connectors and harnesses between the paper holder home position sensor S6 and the finisher control PC board CN17 Replacement part Measure Paper holder home position sensor S6 Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Paper pusher cam Rotate the paper pusher cam Fix any mechanical problem Paper holde...

Page 731: ...king and measures Punch unit sliding motor M12 abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the motor Punch sliding unit home position sensor S23 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP26 on the hole punch control PC board HP Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 5V 5 when shielded...

Page 732: ...he hole punch control PC board HP and skew adjustment motor M1 Skew home position sensor S2 Sensor check Harness check Replacement part Measure Skew home position sensor S2 Skew adjustment motor M1 Hole punch control PC board HP Error Timing of detection Paper detection sensor S24 S25 adjustment erro The adjustment of the paper detection sensors S24 and S25 has been failed Probable cause Checking ...

Page 733: ...ty Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the motor Rear punch shaft home position sensor S22 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP25 on the hole punch control PC board HP Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 5V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned r...

Page 734: ...r M3 Punch home position sensor S4 Sensor check Harness check Replacement part Measure Punch home position sensor S4 Punch motor M3 Hole punch control PC board HP Classification Contents Finisher related service call Punch ROM checksum error Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on Check Item Measure Hole punch control PC board HP Boar...

Page 735: ...ment motor M2 abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the motor Front alignment plate home position sensor S5 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP15 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall ...

Page 736: ... that the knurled roller is at the upper position after the 2nd transport motor M4 has been driven at the specified number of pulses during the initial rising movement of the knurled roller The knurled roller home position sensor S10 does not detect that the knurled roller is not at the upper position after the 2nd transport motor M4 has been driven at the specified number of pulses during the ini...

Page 737: ...ard Replacement part Measure Tray safety switch SW2 Stack tray shift motor M2 Finisher control PC board Classification Contents Finisher related service call Paddle motor abnormality The paddle motor is not rotating or the paddle is not rotating normally Check Item Measure Paddle Rotate the paddle Fix any mechanical problem Paddle motor Check if the connector CN22 on the finisher controller PC boa...

Page 738: ...heck item Measures Hole punch control PC board HP Check the connectors and harnesses between the hole punch control PC board HP and the finisher control PC board Board check Parts to be replaced Remark Hole punch control PC board HP Finisher control PC board Classification Contents Finisher related service call Communication module writing failure Check item Measure Finisher Check if the harness c...

Page 739: ...RRUPT button 6 Key in 2530 and then press the START button 7 Rewrite the displayed status counter from 1 16 to 0 and then press the OK or INTERRUPT button 8 Key in 2531 and then press the START button 9 Rewrite the displayed status counter from 1 16 to 0 and then press the OK or INTERRUPT button 10 Turn the power OFF and then back ON Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready state CA00 ...

Page 740: ... registration control Turn the power ON while 0 and 8 are pressed simultaneously Key in 4546 then press the START button 08 4546 Position adjustment control Mode setting Set the value to 0 not performed automatically Turn the power OFF 9 Checking the abnormal status on color registration Turn the power ON while 0 and 5 are pressed simultaneously Key in 4720 then press the START button 05 4720 Disp...

Page 741: ...on the front side detection abnormality 1 16 48 C on the front and rear sides detection abnormality 16 64 K on the rear side detection abnormality 1 16 85 All colors on the rear side detection abnormality 11 128 K on the front side detection abnormality 1 16 170 All colors on the front side detection abnormality 11 192 K on the front and rear sides detection abnormality 16 255 All colors on the fr...

Page 742: ... sensor LED ON 7 Press the START button 8 Press the FAX button then check how items A and B are displayed while 1 is pressed 9 Compare them with the statues of A and B displayed in 3 Both A and B are changed The image position aligning sensors on both sides are operating normally A remains same The image position aligning sensor on the rear side is not operating normally B remains same The image p...

Page 743: ...ge position aligning sensor emitting LEDs 1 Key in 125 to open the sensor shutter 2 The light emitting area of the sensor should emit LEDs when 126 is keyed in Yes 16 No 15 15 Image position aligning sensor Connector and harness check Clean the light emitting and receiving areas of the image position aligning sensor If the sensor shutter is damaged replace it If the sensor shutter solenoid is not ...

Page 744: ...in the printed image turned to black solid Yes 26 No 25 25 Abnormality in the main high voltage transformer corresponding to the color or abnormality in the LED head Switch one of 4 main high voltage transformers which possibly contains abnormality with the one possibly normal Then print the same test pattern If the color which turned into black solid changes along with the replacement of the main...

Page 745: ...or of the main high voltage transformer is disconnected Check if the harness between the LGC board and the main high voltage transformer is broken Replace the transfer transformer Replace the main high voltage transformer 16 28 Checking with the enforced image position adjustment Does the error CA00 occur during the position adjustment control 1 Turn the power ON while 0 and 5 are pressed simultan...

Page 746: ...oard and the image quality sensor Check the harnesses between the LGC board and the switching power supply Replacement part Measure Switching power supply Image quality sensor LGC board Classification Contents Image control related service call Image quality sensor abnormality no pattern level The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range when the image quality control test pattern i...

Page 747: ...ng normally check if their drive gears are damaged or if they contact the equipment Correct it if needed 19 6 Is the sensor shutter of the image quality sensor opening or closing normally Or is it normal without any damage Is the sensor surface of the image quality sensor clean Yes 9 No 7 7 Sensor unit Take off the transfer belt unit so that you can see the sensor unit 8 Sensor shutter Check if th...

Page 748: ... control Contrast voltage 08 2486 to 0 Invalid 14 Perform Enforced performing of image quality open loop control 05 2740 15 Output the image quality control test pattern 04 270 more than one time and the list print 9 START Is the image normal Yes 17 No 16 16 Abnormal image Correct the abnormal image Blank print Solid print White banding Color banding White spots Poor transfer Uneven image density ...

Page 749: ...TUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 193 Go to step 13 for the second time 22 Reset all of the values in the codes Abnormality detection count Y M C K Display 0 clearing 08 2528 to 08 2531 Step Check Item Result Measure Next Step ...

Page 750: ...any stain or scratch on the LED head Clean or correct if there is 4 Check if there is any stain on the image quality sensor Rear 5 Check if the sensor shutter is working properly 6 Transfer belt Check if the transfer belt is properly operated ON 03 101 OFF 03 151 If the transfer belt rotates normally check if any abnormal stains cleaning defects large scratches or breaking are on the surface of tr...

Page 751: ...image quality open loop control 05 2740 13 Output several number of sheets of the image quality control test pattern 04 270 and the list print 9 START 101 and check the pattern of the color identified in step 9 Is the image normal Yes 15 No 14 14 Abnormal image Correct the abnormal image Blank print Solid print White banding Color banding White spots Poor transfer Uneven image density Faded image ...

Page 752: ... developer material around the LED head clean it if there is any Correct the problem by referring to Troubleshooting for the Image P 8 277 8 5 Troubleshooting for the Image 3 Change the setting of the image quality TRC control to Enabled Set the values of 08 2600 and 08 8103 to 1 4 4 Perform the automatic gamma adjustment If the adjustment is normally finished this is the end of the procedure If t...

Page 753: ...bnormality The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range Check Item Measure Temperature humidity sensor Check the connectors and harnesses between the temperature humidity sensor and LGC board CN369 Replacement part Measure Temperature humidity sensor LGC board Classification Error item Copy process related service call The output value of the drum thermistor 2 is out of a specified ...

Page 754: ...ighlighted in the black mode Yes 8 No 6 6 Drum switching detection sensor S11 Sensor connector joint connector check Check if there is any foreign matter such as grease in the detection area of the drum switching detection sensor 7 LGC board Connector check CN391 CN392 Board check 8 Is the drum switching motor assembled in the drum drive unit able to be rotated smoothly by hand Yes 10 No 9 9 Drum ...

Page 755: ...GC board Classification Contents Image control related service call Drum thermistor 1 abnormality The output value of the drum thermistor 1 is out of a specified range Check Item Measure Drum thermistor 1 Thermistor check Perform the input check 03 COPY ON 3 Connector check J1053 Harness check LGC board Connector check CN370 Replacement part Measure Drum thermistor 1 LGC board Replacement part Mea...

Page 756: ...nts Copy process related service call Auto toner sensor K abnormality upper limit Step Check Item Result Measure Next Step 1 Developer unit Check if the developer unit is installed properly Check that the developer unit and coupling on the equipment side are properly engaged Check that the mixer of the developer unit is rotated Check if the developer material is too dark visually Check if the amou...

Page 757: ...de are properly engaged Check that the mixer of the developer unit is rotated Check if the developer material is too light visually Check if the amount of the developer material is too large or too small Remove any toner or dust on the ATC sensor connector and the drawer connector of the process cover Remove any toner or dust on the EPU sensor connector and the drawer connector on the equipment si...

Page 758: ...xer of the developer unit is rotated Check if the developer material is too dark visually Check if the amount of the developer material is too large or too small Remove any toner or dust on the ATC sensor connector and the drawer connector of the process cover Remove any toner or dust on the EPU sensor connector and the drawer connector on the equipment side 2 Auto toner sensor Harness LGC board C...

Page 759: ...ixer of the developer unit is rotated Check if the developer material is too light visually Check if the amount of the developer material is too large or too small Remove any toner or dust on the ATC sensor connector and the drawer connector of the process cover Remove any toner or dust on the EPU sensor connector and the drawer connector on the equipment side 2 Auto toner sensor Harness LGC board...

Page 760: ...xer of the developer unit is rotated Check if the developer material is too dark visually Check if the amount of the developer material is too large or too small Remove any toner or dust on the ATC sensor connector and the drawer connector of the process cover Remove any toner or dust on the EPU sensor connector and the drawer connector on the equipment side 2 Auto toner sensor Harness LGC board C...

Page 761: ...ixer of the developer unit is rotated Check if the developer material is too light visually Check if the amount of the developer material is too large or too small Remove any toner or dust on the ATC sensor connector and the drawer connector of the process cover Remove any toner or dust on the EPU sensor connector and the drawer connector on the equipment side 2 Auto toner sensor Harness LGC board...

Page 762: ...xer of the developer unit is rotated Check if the developer material is too dark visually Check if the amount of the developer material is too large or too small Remove any toner or dust on the ATC sensor connector and the drawer connector of the process cover Remove any toner or dust on the EPU sensor connector and the drawer connector on the equipment side 2 Auto toner sensor Harness LGC board C...

Page 763: ...ixer of the developer unit is rotated Check if the developer material is too light visually Check if the amount of the developer material is too large or too small Remove any toner or dust on the ATC sensor connector and the drawer connector of the process cover Remove any toner or dust on the EPU sensor connector and the drawer connector on the equipment side 2 Auto toner sensor Harness LGC board...

Page 764: ...hat it is moved to the escape position 5 Check that the coupling of the paper feed developer drive unit is driven properly Yes Correct the engagement of the couplings in the paper feed developer drive unit and the developer unit 9 No 6 6 Check that the paper feeding developer unit drive motor rotates properly Input check 03 112 Yes 9 No 7 7 Check that the connector of the paper feeding developer u...

Page 765: ...he coupling of the drum cleaner unit is rotated by hand Is a driving in the old new detection pusher section transmitted Yes 3 No Correct the drum old new detection pusher so that it is moved to the escape position 5 Check that the coupling of the drum TBU drive unit is driven properly Yes Correct the engagement of the couplings in the drum TBU drive unit and the drum cleaner unit 9 No 6 6 Check t...

Page 766: ...transformer abnormality Leakage of the main charger is detected Check Item Measure Main charger Check if the main charger is installed securely Spring of high voltage supply contact point Check if the spring of high voltage supply contact point is deformed Needle electrode Check if the needle electrode is broken or the main charger grid is deformed Check if any foreign matter is on the needle elec...

Page 767: ...1 Install the system firmware P 11 5 11 2 Firmware Updating with USB Device Classification Contents Other service call HDD format error Encryption key data of either the SYS board or the SRAM board for the SYS board are damaged Check item Measures Encryption key status Check the displayed message 3 C POWER 5 Key Backup Restore SRAM Key Status FROM Key Status Measure OK AccessFailed Replace the SYS...

Page 768: ... SYS board all steps Classification Contents Other service call HDD format error Encryption key data of both the SYS board and the SRAM board for the SYS board are damaged Check item Measures Encryption key status Check the displayed message 3 C POWER 5 Key Backup Restore SRAM Key Status FROM Key Status Measure AccessFailed Replace the SYS board P 9 22 9 2 4 Precautions and Procedures when replaci...

Page 769: ... with USB Device With USB backup data All key data recovery 1 Recover all the data on the SRAM board 5 9 POWER 2 Restore SRAM Data from USB For details see 12 1 4Cloning procedure B Restore procedure 2 Recover the encryption key license on the SYS board Follow the procedures below noted in 9 2 4Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board C Restore ADI key only when ADI HDD is installed...

Page 770: ... Setting 1 Turn the power of the equipment OFF and check the connection of the HDD Connector and harness check Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent Check if HDD for other equipment is not installed Check if SRAM for other equipment is not installed 2 If the error still occurs after step 1 perform the following Perform 3C 5 Key Backup Restore and check that each Key Status is OK If not r...

Page 771: ...ill occurs after step 1 perform the following Perform 3C 5 Key Backup Restore and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 3 work and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 2 work and then restart the ...

Page 772: ...ll occurs after step 1 perform the following Perform 3C 5 Key Backup Restore and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 4 registration and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 3 registration and th...

Page 773: ...ill occurs after step 1 perform the following Perform 3C 5 Key Backup Restore and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 5 backup and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 4 backup and then restart ...

Page 774: ...ll occurs after step 1 perform the following Perform 3C 5 Key Backup Restore and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 6 imagedata and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 5 imagedata and then res...

Page 775: ...ill occurs after step 1 perform the following Perform 3C 5 Key Backup Restore and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 7 storage and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 6 storage and then restar...

Page 776: ...ll occurs after step 1 perform the following Perform 3C 5 Key Backup Restore and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 8 encryption and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 7 encryption and then r...

Page 777: ... Replacement part Measure HDD SYS board Classification Error item Other service call ADI HDD error The ADI HDD has been replaced illegally to SATA HDD normal type Check item Measures Setting Check if the HDD has been replaced with a SATA HDD normal type 1 Start the equipment in the 4C mode 4 C POWER 2 Check the type of the HDD shown on the top left of the control panel display Current HDD type 2a ...

Page 778: ...ype of the HDD shown on the top left of the control panel display Current HDD type Normal status ADI HDD or SATA HDD Abnormal status Unknown HDD If Unknown HDD is displayed reinstall the system software Classification Error item Other service call ADI HDD error Downloading of or consistency check for ADI HDD encryption key fails Check item Measures Setting Checking of ADI HDD encryption key status...

Page 779: ...the system software by performing 4 9 POWER 4 System Software HD data Notes The following items will be deleted by performing 3 C POWER 3 Format HDD Message Log Job Log Spool Data Print Email reception Template Classification Error item Other service call ADI HDD error The generation of a random number for authentication data fails Check item Measures Setting Perform 3 C POWER 3 Format HDD and the...

Page 780: ... SRAM 1 Start the equipment in the 3C mode 3 C POWER 2 The authentication menu is displayed Press OK Not required in the default setting 3 Select 5 Key Backup Restore and then press the START button 4 Select 6 ADIKey FROM to SRAM and then press the START button 5 After the restoring of the encryption key has completed Operation Complete is displayed 6 After the operation has completed shut down th...

Page 781: ...are SRAM board for SYS board If the error is not cleared after the software reinstallation replace the SRAM board P 9 26 9 2 5 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board for the SYS board SYS board If the error is not cleared after this see above replace the SYS board P 9 22 9 2 4 Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board Replacement part Measure SRAM board SYS board Cla...

Page 782: ... key status confirmation Check the message displayed by 3 C POWER 5 Key Backup Restore SRAM Key Status FROM Key Status Measure AccessFailed Replace the SYS board P 9 22 9 2 4 Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board all steps With USB backup data All key data recovery 1 Recover all the data on the SRAM board 5 9 POWER 2 Restore SRAM Data from USB For details see 12 1 4Cloning proced...

Page 783: ...etails see 12 1 4Cloning procedure B Restore procedure 2 Recover the encryption key license on the SYS board Follow the procedures below noted in 9 2 4Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board C Restore ADI key only when ADI HDD is installed D Restore encryption key E Restore license Classification Contents Other service call Key consistency error The license data are damaged Check i...

Page 784: ... Transfer the license from SYS FROM to SYS SRAM P 9 26 9 2 5 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board for the SYS board I Backup license Classification Contents Other service call Key consistency error Encryption key for ADI HDD is damaged Check item Measures Encryption key status confirmation Check the message displayed by 3 C POWER 5 Key Backup Restore SRAM Key Status FROM Key Sta...

Page 785: ...in E Replace Format HDD With USB backup data All key data recovery 1 Recover all the data on the SRAM board 5 9 POWER 2 Restore SRAM Data from USB For details see 12 1 4Cloning procedure B Restore procedure 2 Recover the encryption key license on the SYS board Follow the procedures below noted in 9 2 4Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board C Restore ADI key only when ADI HDD is in...

Page 786: ...on the SRAM board P 9 26 9 2 5 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board for the SYS board G Backup ADI key KeyNull KeyBroken KeyNull KeyBroken No USB backup data 1 Create the partition in the HDD and reinstall the system software P 9 17 9 2 3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the HDD Perform step 3 or later in E Replace Format HDD With USB backup data All key data recovery 1...

Page 787: ...N123 Harness check CN123 Parts to be replaced Remark SYS board Classification Error item Other service call Database abnormality Database is not operating normally Check item Measures Setting 1 Check that no jobs remain and rebuild the databases 5 C POWER 4 Initialize database 1 LDAP DB and 2 Log DB Job Msg 2 If the error is not recovered reinstall the system software 4 9 POWER 4 System Software H...

Page 788: ...er service call Login after the startup fails in any starting mode because log management database is corrupted Check item Measures Setting 1 Delete the log in the following procedure 5 C POWER 4 Initialize database 2 Log database jobs and messages Note that all job and message logs will be deleted 2 If the error is not recovered reinstall the system software 4 9 POWER 4 System Software HD data No...

Page 789: ...rvice call The filtering function is not working properly due to the damage to the file for the filtering setting Check item Measures Setting 1 Check the bad sector of the HDD 08 9072 If the result is NG replace the HDD Notes It may take more than 30 minutes to finish the checking 2 Perform 3 C POWER 3 and then reinstall the HDD software Notes User data will be deleted when 3 C POWER 3 is performe...

Page 790: ...bler GP 1070 If F200 occurs while High 3 is set for the security level 08 8911 it cannot be released by installing the firmware using the USB device Install the Data Overwrite Enabler GP 1070 by 08 3840 Classification Contents Circuit related service call SYS cooling fan abnormality Check item Measures SYS cooling fan Check if the fan is rotating properly If not check if any foreign object is adhe...

Page 791: ... The operating system fails to start Check item Measures Setting 1 Reboot 2 If it has still not recovered reinstall the system software 3 If it still persists after step 2 perform 3 C POWER 3 and then reinstall the system software Notes User data will be deleted when 3 C POWER 3 is performed Classification Error item Other service call The program data fails to be authenticated Check item Measures...

Page 792: ...on Error item Other service call Overwriting fails Check item Measures Setting If a service call occurs again after the reboot replace the HDD Classification Error item Other service call The year 2038 problem Check item Measures Setting Reset the date and request the administrator to set the date and time 1 Turn the power on while pressing the 6 and CLEAR button 2 Select 2 key and then press the ...

Page 793: ...nd the CLEAR button simultaneously 5 Enter the password on the Authentication screen If no password is set for Service press the OK button without entering anything If the High Security Mode has been set enter 1048 6 Key in 5 to select 5 Key Backup Restore and then press the START button 7 Key in 2 to select 2 Key FROM to SRAM and then press the START button 8 After the operation is completed shut...

Page 794: ...is installed to the equipment Check item Measures SYS board Check if the model of the equipment matches the color of the label on the SYS board Color of label 25 30 35ppm Yellow or pink 45 50ppm Blue or brown Fig 8 1 Setting 1 Install the system firmware 2 If the error cannot be solved after installing the system firmware reinstall the system software and application program P 11 21 11 3 2 Update ...

Page 795: ...arameter When a template is used form the template again If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then back ON and perform the job again 1C15 Exceeding file capacity Reset and extend the Maximum send to E mail iFAX size or reduce the number of pages and perform the job again 1C30 Directory creation failure 1C31 File creation failure 1C33 File access failure Check if the access privilege to...

Page 796: ...racter and reset the appropriate Terminal mail address then perform the job again 1C6C Destination mail address error Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address then perform the job again 1C6D System error Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again If the error still ...

Page 797: ...ination mail address error RFC 503 2504 HOST NAME error RFC 504 2551 Destination mail address error RFC 551 Check if the mail server is operating properly Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs replace the SYS board 2550 Destination mail address error RFC 550 Check the state of the mail box in the mail server 2552 Terminal Destination mail addr...

Page 798: ...still occurs replace the main memory Delete the job in progress or being set or in the HOLD PRIVATE PROOF INVALID and retry the job in error 2B51 List library error Check if the Function list can be printed If it can be printed retry the job in error If it cannot replace the main memory If it still cannot be printed initialize the HDD 5 C POWER ON 3 1 2BA0 Invalid Box password Check if the passwor...

Page 799: ...ON then retry the job in error 2A51 Power failure Check if the power cable is properly connected Check if the power supply voltage is inconstant 2A60 WS Scan user authentication failure When 1 TTEC s WIA driver is set for 08 9749 and also Windows Fax Scan is used Check if the user name that you used to log in Windows is a name registered as a user When MFP panel or EWB Scan is used Check if the lo...

Page 800: ...ormality Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting 5 C POWER ON 3 1 If the recovery is still not completed replace the SYS board 2C30 Directory creation failure 2C31 File creation failure 2C33 File access failure Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable Check if the server or ...

Page 801: ...E error No RFC error Check if there is an illegal character in the device name Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name 2C6B Terminal mail address error Check the SMTP Authentication method Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address Set the correct SMTP Authentication method or delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Terminal mail a...

Page 802: ...or file sharing Divide the file in error into several files and retry Or retry the job in a single page format 2D30 Directory creation failure 2D31 File creation failure 2D33 File access failure Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity 2D40 Image conversion abnormality Turn the power OFF and then ba...

Page 803: ...POWER ON 3 1 2E11 Insufficient memory capacity for USB storage If there is a job in progress perform the job in error again after the job in progress is finished If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then back ON and then perform the job in error again 2E12 Message reception error in USB storage 2E13 Message transmission error in USB storage Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform t...

Page 804: ...ge Reset the encryption and perform the job in error again To create an image file not encrypted consult your administrator 2E45 Meta data creation error in USB storage Scan to File Check the template settings Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then back ON and then perform the job in error again 2E65 File creation error due to insufficient USB folder c...

Page 805: ...case supply the printing paper 3A70 Warning of partial mail interruption This error occurs when the partial mail reception setting becomes OFF during the partial mail reception Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail 3A80 Partial mail reception setting OFF Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit th...

Page 806: ... DNS is correct Correct if any of the setting is incorrect When the content of the setting is correct confirm the sender if the destination is correct 3D20 Offramp destination limitation error Inform the sender that the transfer of the FAX data over 40 is not supported 3D30 FAX board error This error occurs when the FAX board is not installed or the FAX board has an abnormality Check if the FAX bo...

Page 807: ...a over error The number of the assigned pages set by user management has reached 0 The number of the assigned pages set by the user management has reached 0 Assign the number of the pages again or perform initialization 4113 Quota over error The number of the assigned pages set by department management has reached 0 The number of the assigned pages set by the department management has reached 0 As...

Page 808: ...he file is displayed on your PC monitor or check if the file format is supported by this equipment 4412 Double sign encoding error Printing using this function cannot be performed due to a decoding process error which occurs because the PDF file is encrypted incorrectly or encrypted in a language not supported 4611 Font download failure reached the registration limit 4612 Font download failure HDD...

Page 809: ...l registration is begun do not press any button on the control panel or start any print or fax job Classification Error item Communication error with external application A temporary password downloaded from e Bridge and entered in this equipment is not valid or the permanent password set in the e Bridge is not valid Check item Measures Setting Confirm the user name and tentative password Classifi...

Page 810: ...or with external application SSL certificate is expired Check item Measures Setting Set the correct time Classification Error item Communication error with external application SSL certificate is invalid Check item Measures Setting Install the correct SSL certificate Classification Error item Communication error with external application DNS address is invalid Check item Measures Setting Set the c...

Page 811: ...ministrators Classification Error item Communication error with external application Initial URL is invalid Check item Measures Setting Set the correct initial URL Classification Error item Communication error with external application An error in the HTTP communication Check item Measures Setting Check the URL for communication Check that the valid IP address is assigned to connect to the server ...

Page 812: ...dle electrode cleaner detection sensor Classification Error item TopAccess related error Check item Measures Setting Check if the power cable is connected properly and is inserted securely Check if the power voltage is unstable Reattempt the restoration of the database Address Book templates F code Mailbox or user information Classification Error item TopAccess related error Check item Measures Se...

Page 813: ...cation Error item MFP access error User authentication cannot be done because connection to an external RBAC server has failed Check item Measures Setting Check if the operating status of the server and connection from the MFP have been confirmed Classification Error item MFP access error Failed to connect to the authentication server Check item Measures Setting Check that the server setting is pr...

Page 814: ... TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 258 Classification Error item MFP access error The card cannot be used because the data required for the use of the card are not correctly set Check item Measures Setting Use a valid card ...

Page 815: ...is equipment correctly Check item Measures Setting Set the correct self diagnostic code Classification Error item MFP access error User authentication for print job cannot be done because connection to an external RBAC server has failed Check item Measures Setting Check if the operating status of the server and connection from the MFP have been confirmed Classification Error item MFP access error ...

Page 816: ...allation failed 7103 Scanner firmware installation failed 7105 Patch installation failed 7111 Plug in installation failed 7113 HDD data installation failed 7115 RADF firmware installation failed 7117 PFC firmware installation failed 7119 Check item Measures Setting Software package file may have a problem or may be corrupted Check the software package file and then reattempt the installation Repla...

Page 817: ...e fails to be returned to USB device Check item Measures Setting Return the license to the USB device used for installing the license Check that the USB device is correctly installed Notes The GP 1080 IPSec Enabler cannot return to the USB device due to license problem The GP 1070 Overwrite Enabler cannot return to the USB device in the high security 08 8911 3 Classification Error item Maintenance...

Page 818: ...ication Error item Maintenance error Timeout error occurred during certificate acquisition from SCEP server Check item Measures Setting Check SCEP server and the SCEP setting automatic on the TopAccess screen in the following procedure TopAccess Administration Security Certificate Management Classification Error item Maintenance error File save error occurred during certificate acquisition from SC...

Page 819: ...em Maintenance error Finisher firmware installation failure Check item Measures Setting Finisher firmware installation failed Reinstall the firmware Classification Error item Maintenance error Saddle firmware installation failure Check item Measures Setting Saddle firmware installation failed Reinstall the firmware Classification Error item Maintenance error Punch firmware installation failure Che...

Page 820: ...Network error Linklocal Address Conflict Check item Measures Setting Check if the same IP address is not used by other machine Classification Error item Network error Manual IPv6 Address Conflict Check item Measures Setting Check if the same IP address is not used by other machine Classification Error item Network error Stateless Address Conflict Check item Measures Setting Check if the same IP ad...

Page 821: ...Check if a valid certificate is installed Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error for ikev1 certification failed Check item Measures Setting Check 1 CA and user certificate in both MFP and remote peer certificate timestamp and IPsec Certificate template should be valid 2 CRL DP server name is mapped in MFP s host table or DNS entry 3 Certificate against CRL Classification Error item Ne...

Page 822: ...Measures Setting Check the User certificate type Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error if invalid certificate authentication Check item Measures Setting Check the CA certificate in MFP and Peer machine Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error if certificate are not avialable Check item Measures Setting Certificate has been deleted from Certificate store Re upload the corre...

Page 823: ...IKEv2 IPsec proposal parameters encryption authentication algorithms DH group authentication methods in MFP and peer machine Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error for ikev2 certification failed Check item Measures Setting Check 1 CA and user certificate in both MFP and remote peer certificate timestamp and IPsec Certificate template should be valid 2 CRL DP server name is mapped in M...

Page 824: ...r Ipsec error for ikev2 if crypto operation failed Check item Measures Setting If Certificates are being used re upload the corresponding certificates using Security Services Restart IPsec Service on MFP Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error for ikev2 if key info is invalid Check item Measures Setting Check IKE settings in MFP and peer Classification Error item Network error Ipsec er...

Page 825: ...lation is not matching Check item Measures Setting Check the IPsec mode Transport Tunnel in MFP and peer Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error for peer ip mismatch Check item Measures Setting Remote Traffic selector mismatch Check the destination address port in IPsec filter Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error for local ip mismatch Check item Measures Setting Local tr...

Page 826: ...dress port in IPsec filter Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error for ike timeout Check item Measures Setting Check the network connectivity between MFP and peer machine Select the Flush Connections Option and retry Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error id manual key is not valid Check item Measures Setting Check the Inbound and Outbound ESP Encryption Authentication and...

Page 827: ...twork error Wireless association with Access point failure Check item Measures Setting Verify the credentials used for association with Access point Classification Error item Network error MFP not able to contact the Access point with the specified SSID Check item Measures Setting Verify the access point name setting and mechanism used for association same as Access Point setting Classification Er...

Page 828: ... The server cannot be detected at domain authentication Check item Measures Setting Check if the server fails Check the network settings of the equipment If name resolution is used check the settings of the DNS and DDNS Classification Error item Network error The user account is invalid at domain authentication and it cannot be used to log on Check item Measures Setting Check if the setting of the...

Page 829: ... authentication of the Active Directory and the user cannot log on Check item Measures Setting Match the time of the equipment and domain controller or if an SNTP server is in the network recommend the use of SNTP Classification Error item Network error A Kerberos ticket has expired at the domain authentication of the Active Directory and the user cannot log on Check item Measures Setting Check if...

Page 830: ... to TopAccess as an administrator select Authentication on the User Management tab and then check User Management Setting Confirm the settings of 08 3805 in the setting mode Department Setting is disabled Log in to TopAccess as an administrator select Authentication on the User Management tab and then check User Management Setting 8 4 4 Paper folded on the leading edge If the leading edge of B4 B5...

Page 831: ...re is any abnormality on the inlet 1 and the harness for the inlet 2 Check if there is any abnormality on the main power switch 4 and the harness for the main power switch 5 Check if the fuses F1 and F2 on the input side have not melted Check if the following voltage is output normally 5VS Pins CN511 5 and 6 12VA Pins CN511 9 10 and 11 LGC board Reconnect the connectors Replace the harnesses Repla...

Page 832: ...5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 276 Harness for the main power switch Main power switch Switching power supply LVPS LGC board SYS board IH board Parts to be replaced Remark ...

Page 833: ...ustment 05 4719 Has it ended normally When CA00 occurs Proceed to CA00 troubleshooting 2 Test printing A3 LD Output the built in grid pattern For the following checks Drum rotation abnormality 3 Check the drum motor operation in the test mode 03 to see if there is any rotation abnormality of the drum Replace the drum TBU motor 4 Check the drum TBU motor operation in the test mode 03 to see if ther...

Page 834: ...he drive roller 10 Does the rib of the transfer belt overlap the collar on both edge of the drive roller Adjust the position of the transfer belt 11 Is the belt edge damaged or stained Clean or replace the transfer belt 12 Peeling of the cleaning blade Large driving load Replace the cleaning blade 13 Is the transfer belt unit installed normally Is the unit properly grounded Check and correct the i...

Page 835: ...he test mode 03 to see if there is any rotation abnormality of the drum Reconnect the connectors Replace the harnesses Replace the LGC board Replace the drum TBU motor Developer sleeve 6 Are there uneven pitches of approx 28 mm Replace the developer sleeve Inadequate drum TBU motor rotation speed 7 Check the value set for drum TBU motor rotation speed Is the value significantly different from the ...

Page 836: ...dent damage or deformation on the drive gears of the pressure roller Replace the drive gear of the pressure roller EPU drive 18 Are there uneven pitches of approx 0 78 mm Replace the developer drive unit developer sleeve and drive gears of the mixer 19 Is there any dent damage or deformation on the developer drive unit developer sleeve and drive gears of the mixer 2nd transfer roller 20 Are there ...

Page 837: ...rform the enforced performing of image quality closed loop control 05 2742 and then automatic gamma adjustment Printer density 2 Check the density of printer output image Output the test patterns and check them Using 04 36 for each color See step 5 if defect occurs Scanner 3 Check if the original glass mirrors or lens is dirty Clean it Parameter adjustment value 4 Check the image processing parame...

Page 838: ... measure Printer output image abnormal 5 Is there any faded image low density Perform the troubleshooting procedures against the faded image Is there any fog in the background Perform the troubleshooting procedures against the background fogging Is there any blotch image Perform the troubleshooting procedures against the blotch image Is there any poor transfer Perform the troubleshooting procedure...

Page 839: ...6 for each color See step 6 if defects occur Scanner 3 Check if the original glass mirrors or lens is dirty Clean it Parameter adjustment value 4 Check the image processing parameters Check the value of offsetting adjustment for background adjustment 5 Adjust the image processing parameters While checking the above encircled image adjust the reproduction level by the offsetting adjustment for back...

Page 840: ...aterial Toner Drum 12 Using the specified developer material toner and drum Use the specified developer material toner and drum 13 Have the developer material and drum reached their PM life Replace the developer material and drum 14 Is the storage environment of the toner cartridge 35oC or less without dew Use the toner cartridge stored in the environment within specification Drum cleaning blade 1...

Page 841: ... fogging Fig 8 9 Cause Section Step Check item Measures Remark s Connectors which connect the LGC board and SYS board 1 Check if there is foreign matter or dust on the terminals of connectors CN128 and CN350 Remove the foreign matter or clean the connectors if there is dust 2 Check if the connectors CN128 and CN350 are inserted at an angle Insert the connectors properly LGC board and SYS board 3 C...

Page 842: ...ment value 2 Check the image processing parameters Check the sharpness adjustment value 3 Adjust the image processing parameters While checking the above encircled images A and B decrease moire by sharpness adjustment Printer section 4 Check the printer output image Output the test patterns and check them Using 04 36 for each color When defects occur perform the corresponding troubleshooting proce...

Page 843: ...tment are performed make sure to perform Enforced performing of image quality closed loop control and then Automatic gamma adjustment after taking a measure Parameter adjustment value 2 Check the image processing parameters Check the sharpness adjustment value 3 Adjust the image processing parameters While checking the above encircled image A increase sharpness by sharpness adjustment Cause Sectio...

Page 844: ...or pressure roller reached its PM life Replace the fuser belt or the pressure roller 4 Is the fuser belt temperature proper Check and correct the control circuit 5 Is there any deformation to the thermistors Are the thermistors contacted with the fuser belt Take out the thermistors from the fuser belt and then check that there is recoil by spring force Replace the thermistor Paper 6 Is the paper t...

Page 845: ...ol related codes Density 11 Is the density too high Perform the forced performing of image quality closed loop control 05 2742 and then automatic gamma adjustment Printer density 12 Check the density of printer output image Output the test patterns and check them using 04 36 for each color When defects occur perform the correspondi ng troubleshoot ing procedures Cause Section Step Check item Measu...

Page 846: ... alcohol or other organic solvents because they have bad effect on the drum Ozone exhaust 3 Is the ozone exhaust fan operating properly Check the connection of the connector 4 Is the ozone filter stained or damaged Replace it LED head 5 Is there foreign matter or dust on the LED head Clean the LED head Main charger 6 Is the charger grid dirty or deformed Clean or replace the charger grid Main char...

Page 847: ...ace the LGC board 5 Is the harness connected with the LGC board short circuited or open circuited Replace the harness 6 Is there any deformation to the thermistors Are the thermistors contacted with the fuser belt Take out the thermistors from the fuser belt and then check that there is recoil by spring force Replace the thermistor Pressure between fuser belt and pressure roller improper 7 Is the ...

Page 848: ...and toner 9 Using the specified developer material and toner Use the specified developer material and toner Paper 10 Is the paper damp Change the paper 11 Is the paper type corresponding to its mode Use the proper type of paper or select the proper mode 12 Using the recommended paper Use the recommended paper Cause Section Step Check item Measures ...

Page 849: ...eloper unit installed securely Check correct the developer sleeve coupling engaging 4 Do the developer sleeve and mixer rotate Check correct the developer drive system 5 Is the developer unit filled up with the developer material Check that the charger grid is not dirty The developer material may be reduced due to the carrier offset 6 Is the developer material properly transported Remove foreign m...

Page 850: ... releasing lever is at releasing position Check the installation of the transfer belt 12 Is the transport of the transfer belt normal Check the installation of the transfer belt or transport mechanism Harnesses for CCD SYS and LGC boards 13 Are the connectors securely connected Is any harness between the boards open circuited Reconnect the connectors securely Replace the harness Cause Section Step...

Page 851: ...ecurely Replace the harness Scanner 3 Is there foreign matter in the optical path Remove it Bedewing of scanner 4 Is the scanner bedewed Clean the mirrors and lens Keep the power cord plugged so that the damp heater can work Cause Section Step Check item Measures Main charger 1 Is the main charger securely installed Reinstall it securely 2 Does the needle electrode not come off Reinstall it secure...

Page 852: ...12 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 296 Bedewing of drum 5 Is the drum bedewed Clean the drum Keep the power cord plugged so that the damp heater can work Cause Section Step Check item Measures ...

Page 853: ...nit and contact with the drum Remove the paper fibers or dirt Drum 6 Is there scratch or foreign matter on the drum surface Replace the drum Transfer unit 7 Is there scratch or foreign matter on the transfer belt surface Replace the transfer belt 8 Are the harness or foreign matters in contact with the transfer belt surface Correct or remove them 9 Is there any scratch or hole on the 1st 2nd trans...

Page 854: ...55C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 298 Scanner 13 Is there foreign matter or dust in the optical path Clean the lens and mirrors Cause Section Step Check item Measures ...

Page 855: ... sleeve rotating correctly Is there any abnormalities on the sleeve surface Check the developer drive system or clean the sleeve surface 6 Is the connection of developer bias supply terminal normal Correct it Drive systems 7 Is the drum scanner or transfer belt jittery Check each drive system High voltage transformer main charger needle electrode grid 1st 2nd transfer roller and developer bias 8 I...

Page 856: ... the side guides Paper feed roller 5 Is the surface of paper feed roller dirty Clean the roller surface with alcohol or replace the roller Rollers 6 Is each roller improperly fixed to the shaft Check E rings pins and clips 2nd transfer roller 7 Install the roller by reversing its back and front sides Output and check the printed image Aligning amount 8 Is the aligning amount proper Increase or dec...

Page 857: ...TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 301 Transfer unit 13 Is the transfer belt unit installed properly Correct it Cause Section Step Check item Measures ...

Page 858: ...e foreign matter on the charger grid Remove foreign matter 4 Is the charger grid dirty or deformed Clean or replace the charger grid 5 Is there foreign matter on the main charger Remove foreign matter 6 Is the needle electrode dirty or deformed Clean or replace the needle electrode 7 Is there foreign matter inside the charger case Remove foreign matter 8 Is the inner surface of charger case dirty ...

Page 859: ...ansfer belt cleaning blade in proper contact with the transfer belt Take off the transfer belt and check if the transfer belt cleaning blade pressure spring and the pressure hook are installed properly Fuser unit 14 a Is there dirt or scratches on the fuser belt and pressure roller surface b Is the gap between the separation guide and fuser belt proper a Clean or replace them b Correct the gap Dru...

Page 860: ... of high voltage output loosened Check if any electric leakage is causing noise Reconnect each joint Drum 5 Is there deep scratch on the drum surface Replace the drum especially if the scratch has reached the aluminum base 6 Are there fine scratches on the drum surface drum pitting Check and correct the contact of cleaning blade and recovery blade 7 Is the drum grounded Check the contact of the gr...

Page 861: ...ave the developer material and drum reached their PM life Replace the developer material and drum 5 Is the storage environment of the toner cartridge 35oC or less without dew Use the toner cartridge stored in the environment within specification 6 Is there any dent on the surface of the drum Replace the drum 7 Is there any film forming on the drum Clean or replace the drum 8 Is the drum bedewed Wi...

Page 862: ...G 8 306 High voltage transformer main charger needle electrode grid developer 1st 2nd transfer roller bias 13 Is the high voltage transformer output defective Adjust the output Paper 14 Is the paper type corresponding to its mode Use the proper type of paper or select the proper mode Cause Section Step Check item Measures ...

Page 863: ...Replace the belt 5 Is the 2nd transfer facing roller dirty Clean the roller and replace the cleaning pad Paper 6 Is the high voltage fed to the 2nd transfer roller correctly If any contact failure occurs in the feeding area e g the conductive bushing and spring come off correct it 7 Is paper in the drawer or LCF curled Reinsert paper with reverse side up or change paper 8 Is paper in the drawer or...

Page 864: ... TROUBLESHOOTING 8 308 High voltage transformer 1st 2nd transfer roller bias 11 Is the high voltage transformer output defective Check the circuit and adjust the transformer output 12 Are the high voltage harness and terminals in proper contact Correct them if loosened Cause Section Step Check item Measures ...

Page 865: ...ed Open and close the jam access cover Check if there is any abnormality in the movement of the 2nd transfer roller pressure mechanism 5 Is there any abnormalities or deformation on the transfer belt Replace the transfer belt LED head 6 Is there foreign matter or dust on the LED head Clean the LED head Discharge LED 7 Is the discharge LED dirty Clean it 8 Has any LED of discharge LED gone out Repl...

Page 866: ...ROUBLESHOOTING 8 310 Scanner section 13 a Is the platen cover or RADF open b Is the original glass mirrors or lens dirty a Close the platen cover or RADF b Clean them Dram cleaner unit 14 Is there any abnormalities or deformation on the gap spacer Replace the gap spacer Cause Section Step Check item Measures ...

Page 867: ...55C 3555C 4555C 5055C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 311 8 5 20 Uneven image density 1 at right angles to feeding direction Fig 8 24 Cause Section Step Check item Measures Developer unit 1 Is the magnetic brush in proper contact with the drum Adjust the doctor sleeve gap ...

Page 868: ...DIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 312 8 5 21 Uneven image density 2 Fig 8 25 Fig 8 26 Feeding direction Feeding direction ...

Page 869: ...per material on the developer sleeve where the density is uneven thin or lacking Remove the foreign matter in the developer unit See 2 Removal of foreign matter in the developer unit in P 7 23 7 6 8 Developer unit K Y M and C Clean the developer unit See 1 Cleaning in P 7 23 7 6 8 Developer unit K Y M and C 2 Does uneven image density occur again See work flow diagram in P 7 12 7 5 Work flow of pa...

Page 870: ... its PM life Replace developer material Developer unit 7 Is the magnetic brush in proper contact with the drum Check the developer unit installation Check the doctor sleeve gap and pole position Main charger 8 Is the main charger dirty Clean it or replace the needle electrode Drum 9 Is there film forming on the drum surface Clean or replace the drum 10 Has the drum reached its PM life Replace the ...

Page 871: ... the gears etc if they are not engaged properly 4 Is the registration motor operating normally Is the timing of operation delaying Replace the registration motor Paper feed clutch 5 Is the paper feed clutch malfunctioning Check the circuit or the clutch and replace them if necessary Aligning amount 6 Is the aligning amount proper Increase or decrease the aligning amount Paper pushing amount 7 Is t...

Page 872: ...fer roller if necessary Fuser unit 4 Are the fuser belt and pressure roller rotation proper Is the fuser belt transportation proper Check the drive system Replace the fuser belt and pressure roller if necessary Drum 5 Is there large scratch on the drum Replace the drum Scanner 6 Is the slide sheet defective Replace it 7 Are there any abnormalities on the carriage feet Replace the feet 8 Is the ten...

Page 873: ...ng blade edge Clean or replace it 3 Is the drum cleaning blade peeled Replace the blade Transfer belt cleaner 4 Is there paper dust on the edge of transfer belt cleaning blade Clean or replace it 5 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade peeled Replace the blade 6 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in proper contact with the transfer belt Take off the transfer belt and check if the transfer belt clea...

Page 874: ...fuser belt Check and modify the IH drive circuit 9 Have the fuser belt and pressure roller reached their PM life Replace them 10 Is the pressure between the fuser belt and pressure roller proper Check and adjust the pressure mechanism 11 Is the temperature of fuser belt proper Check correct the setting value of fuser belt temperature Clean or replace the thermistors Check and correct the circuit C...

Page 875: ...inal glass 1 Is the original glass dirty Clean the glass Main charger 2 Are the needle electrode grid and case dirty Clean or replace them Discharge LED 3 Is the discharge LED dirty Clean it Scanner exposure lamp 4 Are the reflector exposure lamp mirrors lens etc dirty Clean them 5 Is the exposure lamp tilted Adjust the installed position of the lamp 6 Is the lamp discolored or degraded Replace it...

Page 876: ...the transfer belt unit several times with the TBU release lever Check that the 1st transfer roller is rotated smoothly upward and downward 4 Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper contact with the transfer belt Open and close the jam access cover Check if there is any abnormality in the movement of the 2nd transfer roller pressure mechanism 5 Are there any abnormalities on the transfer belt Clean or...

Page 877: ...ghts reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 321 8 5 28 Stain on the paper back side Fig 8 33 The edge of image cut off Feeding direction Feeding direction Printing side of 1st page Back side of 2nd page ...

Page 878: ...es of the bypass tray correct too wide Correct the width 10 Is the paper aligning amount sufficient Adjust the aligning amount 11 Are the feed roller and transport roller dirty or worn out Clean or replace the rollers 12 Does the paper mode correspond to the paper type Use the appropriate paper type or paper mode 13 Using the recommended paper Use the recommended paper Transfer unit 14 Is there an...

Page 879: ...8 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 323 8 5 29 White void in the halftone Fig 8 34 Feeding direction ...

Page 880: ...sitions of the screws before removing the inlet guide Check if the inlet guide is attached horizontally by checking the scales for the inlet guide 1 Take off the fuser unit 2 Remove the 2 screws of the paper entrance guide 1 and then secure them to the holes next to the original ones 3 Vertically move the paper entrance guide to the upper direction of the figure so that it is separated by approx 0...

Page 882: ...aper mode Select RECYCLED PAPER in MEDIA TYPE If the paper wrinkle still appears proceed to NO NO 1 Increase or decrease the adjustment value for the paper alignment P 6 8 6 1 6 Paper alignment at the registration roller 2 Increase the transport motor speed Adjust it at the code 05 4532 Is the paper properly set NO Set the paper properly YES Has the paper absorbed moisture YES Use paper that has n...

Page 884: ... out staining may be seen as streaks as shown below Fig 8 38 Fig 8 39 Notes Clean them with a soft pad cloth or electric vacuum cleaner Cause Section Step Check item Measures 2nd transfer unit 1 Is there any toner adhering to the ribs of the transfer guide Clean the ribs of the transfer guide Image quality control unit 2 Is there any toner adhering to the ribs of the transfer guide Clean the ribs ...

Page 885: ...ller is rotated smoothly upward and downward Process unit EPU 3 Is the contact between the drum and developer material proper Check the doctor to sleeve gap and pole position LED head 4 Is there foreign matter or dust on the LED head Clean the LED head 5 Is the problem resolved if you replace the LED head Replace the LED head Transfer unit TRU 6 Is 2nd transfer roller in proper contact with the tr...

Page 886: ...en copy the back side of the paper 2 Plain paper Is toner scattered on the image on the back side of the paper in duplex printing when it is fed from the bypass tray Perform automatic duplex copying with the Automatic Duplexing Unit ADU This problem may occur when the paper is dry under a low humidity environment If plain paper is used BACK and bypass feeding cannot be selected together In this ca...

Page 887: ...HOOTING 8 331 The larger the setting value is the higher the transfer voltage becomes and the less toner scattering occurs Paper type 05 code Sub code Recommen ded setting value Acceptable values Default Full color Front side Recycled paper 05 2934 7 6 8 0 10 5 Full color Front side Recycled paper 05 2934 7 6 8 0 10 5 ...

Page 888: ...ion adjustment plate Adjust the pole position adjustment plate Fig 8 43 1 Record or mark the scale position 2 indicated by the pole position adjustment plate 1 2 Remove 1 screw 3 and take off the pole position adjustment plate 1 3 Cut out the pin 4 fixing the pole position adjustment plate 4 Turn the pole position adjustment plate 1 counterclockwise in the direction of the black arrow by 3 scales ...

Page 889: ...8 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 333 Notes Check the image after the pole position is adjusted ...

Page 890: ...Step Check Item Measure Fuser unit 1 Fuser unit guide rail Adjust the fuser unit guide rail Fig 8 45 1 Take off the fuser unit 2 Loosen the 1 screw 1 of the front guide rail in the fuser unit 3 Remove 1 screw 2 and attach it to the screw hole for adjustment 3 4 Move the guide rail upward by 1 mm Moving it by 1 mm changes the screw in the trailing edge by 0 65 mm There is 0 5 mm scale 4 5 Tighten t...

Page 891: ...ts reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 335 Fig 8 45 B The front side in the secondary scanning direction is longer than the rear side Front Rear Fig 8 46 4 2 1 3 Feeding direction Front side Rear side B ...

Page 892: ... fuser unit 2 Loosen the 1 screw 1 of the front guide rail in the fuser unit 3 Remove 1 screw 2 and attach it to the screw hole for adjustment 3 4 Move the guide rail downward by 1 mm Moving it by 1 mm changes the screw in the trailing edge by 0 65 mm There is 0 5 mm scale 4 5 Tighten the 1 screw 1 of the front guide rail in the fuser unit 6 Install the fuser unit Check that the image on the paper...

Page 893: ... may appear on both sides of paper when printing the wide sized paper SRA3 320 x 450 mm 320 x 460 mm Fig 8 48 Cause Section Step Check item Measures Transfer belt unit 1 Are there any stains on both sides of the transfer belt Clean both sides of the transfer belt with alcohol Approx 10 mm from the edge 2 Replace the blade seals of the transfer belt cleaning unit Feeding direction ...

Page 894: ...ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 338 8 5 37 Roller trace Fig 8 49 Cause Section Step Check item Measures Lower paper exit roller upper lower roller 1 Is the surface of the lower paper exit roller stained Clean the upper lower roller surface with alcohol or replace the roller Feeding direction ...

Page 895: ...55C 3555C 4555C 5055C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 339 8 5 38 Staining at the leading edge Fig 8 50 Cause Section Step Check item Measures Exit sensor 1 Is the actuator of the exit sensor stained Clean the actuator with alcohol or replace the actuator Feeding direction ...

Page 897: ...e respective Notes and Cautions of Replacement of PC boards and HDD in P 9 13 9 2 Precautions Procedures and Settings for Replacing PC Boards and HDD 9 1 1 SYS Board cover 1 Remove the top rear cover P 4 5 4 1 14 Top rear cover 2 Take off the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 3 Take off the right rear cover P 4 4 4 1 10 Right rear cover 4 Remove 3 screws and loosen 3 screws Fig 9 1 5 Slide the SY...

Page 898: ...1 connected to the USB terminal Notes Do not disconnect 3 connectors 2 connected to the HDD and SYS board cooling fan Fig 9 3 3 Remove 4 screws Fig 9 4 4 Slide the SYS board case 1 toward the left side to remove it Notes When removing the SYS board case hold it as shown in the right figure Do not apply pressure to the heat sink memory or SRAM board by holding them too firmly Also exercise care to ...

Page 899: ... 9 1 2 SYS board case 2 Remove the 2 HDD connectors 1 3 Remove the SYS board cooling fan P 4 115 4 6 34 SYS cooling fan F1 4 Take off the SRAM board SRAM board P 9 10 9 1 9 SRAM board for SYS board 5 Remove 9 screws and take off the shield 2 SYS board 3 Fig 9 7 Notes When removing the SYS board hold the LAN connector and the connector on the lower right of the board Do not apply pressure to the he...

Page 900: ...NT OF PC BOARDS HDD 9 4 9 1 4 Hard disk HDD 1 Take off the SYS board cover P 9 1 9 1 1 SYS Board cover 2 Remove 4 screws Fig 9 9 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and take off the HDD unit 2 Fig 9 10 4 Remove 4 screws and take off the hard disk 1 and ground wire 2 5 Disconnect the 1 connector 3 Fig 9 11 ...

Page 901: ...onnect the 3 connectors 1 4 Remove 1 screw for each and take off 2 IH feed terminals 2 Notes When connecting connectors be careful not to confuse the white connector location with the black connector location To connect 2 harnesses to the IH coil you do not need to make a distinction between the upper and lower sides When installing securely tighten the fixing screw of the IH feed terminal 2 so th...

Page 902: ... When assembling wire the IH harness pulled out from the rear frame by aligning it to the inside of the harness holder as shown in the figure so that there is no warp Fig 9 15 5 Remove 5 screws and take off the IH board 1 Fig 9 16 1 Disconnect 35 connectors connected to the LGC board Notes Disconnect 36 connectors for the 45 50ppm models Fig 9 17 ...

Page 903: ...and slide the LGC board 1 toward the right side to remove it Notes The LGC board to be installed differs depending on the models Due to this before replacing be sure to check the color of the identification label on the LGC board to install the corresponding one in the equipment 25ppm Brown 30ppm White 35ppm Yellow 45ppm Pink 50ppm Blue Fig 9 18 ...

Page 904: ... unplug the power cable before starting this work 1 Take off the left cover P 4 1 4 1 2 Left cover 2 Loosen 2 screws and remove the cover 1 by sliding it toward the rear side Fig 9 19 3 Remove 2 screws and slide the switching regulator slightly toward you Fig 9 20 4 Disconnect 10 connectors and slide the switching regulator to the front side and take it off Fig 9 21 ...

Page 905: ...onnect the 1 connector 1 and take off the switching regulator board 2 Fig 9 22 1 Remove the developer unit cooling fan unit P 4 122 4 6 40 Developer unit cooling fan F5 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 Fig 9 23 3 Remove 5 screws 1 4 Release 4 locking supports 2 and take off the high voltage transformer 3 Notes When installing match the frame with the concave portion of the high voltage transformer ...

Page 906: ...installing the high voltage transformer make sure the feed springs contact the plastic locator pins as shown in the figure Fig 9 25 1 Take off the SYS board cover P 9 1 9 1 1 SYS Board cover 2 Release 2 latches and take off the SRAM board for the SYS board 1 with the case Fig 9 26 3 Release 2 latches 1 and take off the SRAM board for SYS board 2 from the case Fig 9 27 ...

Page 907: ...rd 9 1 11 DRV board 1 Take off the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove the EEPROM 1 from the LGC board Notes Be careful not to damage the EEPROM when replacing the EEPROM Fig 9 28 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Disconnect 12 connectors connected to the DRV board Fig 9 29 3 Remove 4 screws and take off the DRV board 1 Fig 9 30 ...

Page 908: ...le before starting this work 9 1 13 CTIF board 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 3 Remove 3 screws and take off FIL board 2 Fig 9 31 1 Remove the toner motor assembly 1 P 4 110 4 6 30 Toner motor assembly 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 Fig 9 32 3 Disconnect the 4 connectors 1 release four latshes and take off the CTIF board 2 Fig 9 33 ...

Page 909: ...in the following procedure 1 First replace one of the board to be replaced 2 Turn the power ON and confirm that READY is displayed 3 Turn the power OFF 4 Replace another board that requires replacement When replacing the LGC board remove the EEPROM on the old board and then attach it to the new board When the HDD requires replacement see P 9 17 9 2 3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the H...

Page 910: ...n the VALUE NAV and Worst columns if items are not supported 2 Usage The combination of the values of ID 05 and c5 is used to diagnose whether or not the HDD has a physical failure when HDD failure is suspected service call F100 F109 or F120 or F124 occurred Result Description Diagnosis ID VALUE 05 0 Low possibility of physical failure HDD replacement is not required c5 0 05 From 1 to 999 Defectiv...

Page 911: ... reallocated sectors 07 Seek Error Rate This is a measure of the seek error rate 08 Seek Time Performance This attribute is a measure of a drive s seek performance during normal online operations 09 Power On Hours This attribute is a measure of the total time hours or minutes depending on disk manufacturer the drive has been on 0a Spin Retry Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of...

Page 912: ...r of digits acquired from the HDD exceeds the maximum digits which can be displayed on the control panel however this does not indicate an error c7 Ultra DMA CRC Error Count Rate This attribute is a measure of the total number of errors found in data transfer in the Ultra DMA mode c8 Write Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the write error rate ID Name Meaning ...

Page 913: ...sers data information in the HDD The service technician can perform them only when users permit it Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be kept only on the paper Do not replace the HDD and the SRAM board for the SYS board together A procedure for replacing the HDD is shown below Fig 9 35 Start A Back up data in HDD B Print out FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE C Print out FUNCTION list D E...

Page 914: ...rator menu of TopAccess Department management data Available Export them in Administrator menu of TopAccess Log data Print Scan FAX Transmission Reception Available Export them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess Import cannot be performed Data in the shared folder Scanned data Saved data of copy FAX transmission Available Copy them to the client computer via the network The data which have bee...

Page 915: ...Erase HDD Security and then press the START button 3 Select 1 LOW 2 MEDIUM 3 HIGH and 4 SIMPLE 4 Turn the power OFF E Replace Format HDD 1 Confirm that the power is turned OFF 2 Replace the HDD Refer to P 9 4 9 1 4 Hard disk HDD 3 Create the partitions on the HDD 1 Turn the power ON while pressing 3 and CLEAR button simultaneously 2 When Firmware Assist Mode appears on the LCD key in 3 to select 3...

Page 916: ...ms again with Self signed certificate of TopAccess Country Name State or Province Name Locality Name Organization Name Organizational Unit Name Common Name Email Address When wireless LAN is used perform the setting again on the LCD panel only when security with a certificate is used Also upload the following certificate file with Install Certificate for Wireless LAN of TopAccess CA certificate Us...

Page 917: ...inistrator about the next operation and ask him her to enter his her password 3 Press the FAX button and then the TERMINAL ID button to set each item 4 Press the INITIAL SETUP button to set each item I Adjust image quality 1 Start up with the Adjustment mode 05 2 Enter the password and then press the OK button If the password is not set for Service press the ENTER button without entering anything ...

Page 918: ...y mode is setting High Security set the security mode levlel to 1 Low level Then restart the equipment 1 Start up with the Setting Mode 08 2 Enter the password and then press the OK button If the password is not set for Service press the ENTER button without entering anything 3 Key in 3840 and then press the ENTER button 4 Select the license to be returned and then press the REMOVE button 5 Instal...

Page 919: ... the following procedure P 9 13 9 2 1 Precautions when replacing PC boards 1 Confirm that the power is turned OFF 2 Replace the SYS board 3 Install DIMM to the new SYS board from the old SYS board 4 Install SRAM board to the new SYS board from the old SYS board 5 Install HDD to the new SYS board from the old SYS board C Restore ADI key If the ADI HDD is installed follow the steps below To confirm ...

Page 920: ...ng the key is not possible update the system firmware using the download jig and then perform this procedure again P 11 27 11 4 Firmware Updating with PWA DWNLD JIG2F 1 Turn the power ON while pressing 3 and the CLEAR button simultaneously 2 Enter the password and then press the OK button If the password is not set for Service press the OK button without entering anything 3 Key in 5 to select 5 Ke...

Page 921: ... the license to be installed and then press the INSTALL button 7 The screen for notifying that the installation will be started is displayed Then press the YES button 8 After 10 to 40 seconds have passed the screen for notifying the success of the performance is displayed Then press the OK button If the screen for notifying a failure of the performance is displayed quit this operation by pressing ...

Page 922: ...for SYS board Fig 9 37 Backup SRAM possible C Replace SRAM board No Yes B Return License C Replace SRAM board Start A Backup SRAM With backup data SRAM The license can be returned D Clear SRAM system strage area C Replace SRAM board E Restore SRAM D Clear SRAM system strage area F Clear SRAM update Error flags G Backup ADI key H Backup encryption key I Backup license J Initialize SRAM board K Rein...

Page 923: ...up data 9 Restart the equipment after the backup is completed 10 Turn the power OFF B Return License Notes When installing the Data Overwrite Enabler GP 1070 and security mode is setting High Security set the security mode levlel to 1 Low level Then restart the equipment 1 Start up with the Setting Mode 08 2 Enter the password and then press the OK button If the password is not set for Service pre...

Page 924: ...urn the power OFF E Restore SRAM If there is SRAM backup data perform the following steps 1 Turn the power ON while pressing 6 and the CLEAR button simultaneously 2 When SRAM Clear Mode appears on the LCD key in 0 to select 0 Set Serial Number and then press the START button 3 Key in the serial number on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment and then press the OK button 4 Serial Nu...

Page 925: ...hen press the START button 4 Key in 6 to select 6 ADIKey FROM to SRAM and then press the START button 5 Wait until the backup of the ADI key is completed Operation Complete is displayed 6 Restart the equipment after the backup is completed If you want to perform the backup of the license do not restart the equipment but perform from 4 in H Backup encryption key H Backup encryption key 1 Turn the p...

Page 926: ... the upper left of the LCD 2 Touch the center of mark displayed on the upper right of the LCD 3 Touch the center of mark displayed on the lower left of the LCD 4 Touch the center of mark displayed on the lower right of the LCD 4 Perform the initialization at the software version upgrade 08 9030 5 Initialize the NIC information 08 9083 6 Enter the serial number 08 9601 Key in the serial number on t...

Page 927: ... set for Service press the ENTER button without entering anything 3 Enable the encryption function For high security mode Set the value of 08 8911 to 3 For enabling HDD encryption only Set the value of 08 8911 to 1 and then set the value of 08 9379 to 1 Security priority or 2 Performance priority 4 Turn the power OFF M Adjust image quality 1 Start up with the Adjustment mode 05 2 Enter the passwor...

Page 928: ... Turn the power OFF 6 Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode 1 7 Perform the FAX Set Up 1 100 8 Turn the power OFF and then back ON 9 Set the dial type according to these buttons USER FUNCTIONS ADMIN FAX INITIAL SETUP O Set date and time Set the date and time according to these buttons USER FUNCTIONS ADMIN GENERAL CLOCK DATE TIME ...

Page 929: ...C board Notes Be careful not to damage the EEPROM when replacing the EEPROM A procedure for replacing the SRAM board is shown below Fig 9 38 A Replace SRAM board 1 Confirm that the power is turned OFF 2 Replace the EEPROM for the LGC board P 9 11 9 1 10 EEPROM for LGC board Start A Replace EEPROM C Adjust image quality D Set line adjustment mode Setting completed B Initialize LGC board ...

Page 930: ...the password is not set for Service press the ENTER button without entering anything 4 Perform Destination display at SRAM initialization 08 9060 5 Check whether the displayed destination see the below figure of the SRAM board for the SYS board is the same as the one in step 1 Fig 9 39 Remarks If the destinations are different initialize the SRAM board for the SYS board with reference to the follo...

Page 931: ...EPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS HDD 9 35 7 Press the INITIALIZE button to perform the initialization of the SRAM board for the LGC board Fig 9 40 8 Perform Destination display at SRAM initialization 08 9060 and check whether the same destinations are displayed for the SYS board and the LGC board Fig 9 41 ...

Page 932: ...bleshooting methods are shown below Error message Troubleshooting UNDEFINED MODEL Since the LGC board probably has a problem replace it with a new one by following the procedure below P 9 6 9 1 6 LGC board UNDEFINED VERSION Recheck the destination of the SRAM board for the SYS board Since the SRAM board for the SYS board probably has a problem replace it with a new one by following the procedure b...

Page 933: ...n of equipment such as when it is setup when preventive maintenance PM is performed or when developer material is replaced etc If you perform automatic adjustment 05 2400 of the auto toner sensor without replacing the developer materials for four colors YMCK image quality is not guaranteed 6 Perform the Forced performing of image quality closed loop control 05 2742 7 Perform the enforced position ...

Page 934: ... set for Service press the ENTER button without entering anything 4 Set Line adjustment mode to 0 For factory shipment 08 9010 Notes Be sure to change the setting of Line adjustment mode 08 9010 to 0 For factory shipment Since 1 For line is set for Line adjustment mode in B Initialize LGC board in EEPROM for LGC board supplied as a service part number of prints is not counted unless it is changed ...

Page 935: ...09 6 Perform Shading correction plate Automatic dust detection adjustment 05 3218 7 Turn the power OFF 9 2 8 Firmware confirmation after the PC board HDD replacement After replacing the PC board HDD check the firmware version in the setting mode 08 and confirm if the firmware combination is correct Firmware Code Remarks System firmware OS data 08 9930 System firmware version Engine firmware 08 990...

Page 936: ...e one time dongle which you used for uploading the selected license is installed in the equipment 9 Check that the installed license is displayed on the license list Remarks If there are any other licenses to be returned repeat from step 4 If there are no other licenses to be returned press the CLOSE button and then turn the power OFF Notes This procedure is available only with the one time dongle...

Page 937: ...he power OFF 9 Replace the equipment 10 Turn the power ON while pressing 0 and 8 simultaneously 11 Enter the password and then press the OK button If the password is not set for Service press the ENTER button without entering anything 12 Key in 3840 and then press the START button 13 Press the INSTALL button 14 Install the one time dongle in the equipment the one which you used for returning the s...

Page 938: ... of ADI HDD perform the following setting 4C 1 Revert factory initial status HDD 2 When disposing of SATA HDD When disposing of SATA HDD perform the following setting 3C 6 Erase HDD Securely HDD securely erasing This setting is the overwriting method complying with DoD 5220 22 M 1 LOW This is the normal overwriting method This setting is used normally 2 MEDIUM This overwriting method is more secur...

Page 939: ...be set respectively for the toner and used waste toner box 3 If Order Failure Occurs If some problems occur and the order cannot be placed after registering an order as a job refer to the standard countermeasure for the FAX E mail transmission failure 10 1 2 Setting Item To enable Auto Supply Order the following settings are required Notes When selecting E mail to place an order it is required tha...

Page 940: ...mon information ADMIN E MAIL When sending an E mail validity of the address is checked If the address is invalid it is not sent AUTO SUPPLY ORDER Ordered by FAX MAIL HTTP 1 FAX NUMBER FAX number of supplier 2 E MAIL E mail address of supplier 3 CUSTOMER Customer information NAME TEL NUMBER E MAIL ADDRESS SUPPLIER Supplier information NAME ADDRESS SERVICE TECNICIAN Service technician information NU...

Page 941: ...ed e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C REMOTE SERVICE 10 3 3 Output of setting list of the Auto Supply Order 1 Enter the Service UI Mode P 5 5 5 2 Service UI 2 Select FAX LIST PRINT MODE and then press NEXT 3 Select SUPPLY ORDER LIST and then press PRINT ...

Page 942: ...ng value to 0 2 Turn the power OFF and then ON 3 Press the USER FUNCTIONS button to enter the user function screen 4 Press the ADMIN button When the Administrator Password has been set ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is displayed Fig 10 1 5 Press the PASSWORD button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard Then key in the Administrator Password and press the OK button Confirm the password to th...

Page 943: ...CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C REMOTE SERVICE 10 5 6 Press the SERVICE button in the ADMIN screen Fig 10 2 7 The SERVICE screen is displayed 8 Press the SUPPLY ORDER SETUP button Fig 10 3 ...

Page 944: ...DIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REMOTE SERVICE 10 6 9 Press the ORDER INFORMATION button Fig 10 4 10 The ORDER INFORMATION screen is displayed Fig 10 5 ...

Page 945: ...screen is displayed Fig 10 6 14 Press the buttons of the screen of SUPPLIER to set the required item 15 Press the OK button FAX MAIL OFF Select the FAX or the MAIL button for the transmitting way of order HTTP has not been supported yet OFF Turn off the AUTO SUPPLY ORDER function FAX NUMBER Input the FAX number of supplier To transmit by FAX the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not i...

Page 946: ...ayed Fig 10 7 17 Press the SERVICE INFORMATION button 18 The CUSTOMER SERVICE TECHNICIAN screen is displayed Fig 10 8 19 Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER SERVICE TECHNICIAN to set the required item CUSTOMER NAME Input the name of customer TEL NUMBER Input the telephone number of customer E MAIL Input the E mail address of customer ...

Page 947: ...er and complete the order information setting 21 The SERVICE screen is returned Fig 10 9 22 Press the SUPPLY ORDER SETUP button ADDRESS Input the address of customer NUMBER Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN E MAIL Input the E mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN ...

Page 948: ...055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REMOTE SERVICE 10 10 Fig 10 10 23 Press the TONER ORDERING button 24 The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed Fig 10 11 25 Select the part to be ordered Press the YELLOW Y button ...

Page 949: ...UTO ORDER 27 Press the OK button to register the setting of toner order 28 The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed PART NUMBER Toner number CONDITION The order is placed when the number of toner empty reaches the number specified for the CONDITION QUANTITY Quantity to be ordered ON OFF Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automatically or not ...

Page 950: ...TE SERVICE 10 12 Fig 10 13 29 Press the MAGENTA M CYAN C BLACK K USED TONER CONTAINER button and then input the order information in the same way Fig 10 14 30 Press the OK button to register the order information Notes Auto Supply Order setting is also available from the following setting mode 08 ...

Page 951: ...um 50 letters SUPPLIER ADDRESS 9765 Maximum 100 letters SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER 9760 Maximum 5 digits SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME 9761 Maximum 50 letters SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER 9762 Maximum 32 digits SERVICE TECHNICIAN E MAIL 9763 Maximum 192 letters Remarks DESCRIPTION 9766 Maximum 128 letters RESULT PRINTING OFF ALWAYS ON ERROR 9782 0 OFF 1 Always 2 ON Error YELLOW Y TONER PART NUMBER 9773 ...

Page 952: ...on Device Info become ineffective Fig 10 15 33 When Service Notification Device Info is set to ON the screen to set the notification date is displayed Then set the notification date with the following procedure BLACK K TONER PART NUMBER 9776 Maximum 20 digits BLACK K TONER CONDITION 9778 1 99 BLACK K TONER QUANTITY 9777 1 99 USED TONER CONTAINER PART NUMBER 9779 Maximum 20 digits USED TONER CONTAI...

Page 953: ...y of the week More than one day can be selected Notify Date 1 Notify Date 2 Day of the week SUN to SAT buttons Pressing the buttons Sunday to Saturday of the desired day makes transmission on every specified day More than one day can be selected This does not affect the settings of Notify Date 1 and Notify Date 2 Notify Date 1 and Notify Date 2 DATE button Pressing the DATE button sets up to 2 dat...

Page 954: ...ICE 10 16 Fig 10 17 Key in the date acceptable values 0 31 in Notify Date 1 or Notify Date 2 and press the OK button Time setting CHANGE button Pressing the CHANGE button sets the time at which you wand to send data This is the time when data are sent with Day of the week Notify Date 1 and Notify Date 2 ...

Page 955: ...MOTE SERVICE 10 17 Fig 10 18 Key in the time acceptable values 00 00 23 59 in Time Key in the time in the hour column of Time press the scroll button key in the time in the minute column of Time After all the settings are completed press the OK button 34 Press the CLOSE button The setting completes ...

Page 956: ...XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN E MAIL XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SUPPLIER NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SUPPLIER ADDRESS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PART NUMBER QUANTITY TONER CARTRIDGE CYAN XXXXXXXXXXXX 99 MAGENTA XXXXXXXXXXXX 99 YELLOW XXXXXXXXXXXX 99 BLACK XXXXXXXXXXXX 99 USED TONER...

Page 957: ... toner cartridge part number Quantity Order quantity CounterInformation Counter information PrintCounter Small FullColor 0 TwinColor 0 Black Print count Small size for Full color Twin color and Black PrintCounter Large FullColor 0 TwinColor 0 Black Print count Large size for Full color Twin color and Black ScanCounter FullColor 0 TwinColor 0 Black Scan count Scan count for Full color Twin color an...

Page 958: ...ER ADDRESS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CUSTOMER E MAIL ADDRESS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN E MAIL XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SUPPLIER NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SUPPLIER ADDRESS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PART N...

Page 959: ...REA Remarks DEVICE DESCRIPTION Model name MFP model name SERIAL NUMBER Serial number DEVICE FAX NUMBER Fax number DEVICE E MAIL ADDRESS E mail address PRINT COUNTER Print count SCAN COUNTER Scan count TOTAL Total BLACK Black TWIN COLOR Twin color FULL COLOPY Full color YELLOW REMAINING QUANTITY Toner remaining quantity Yellow MAGENTA REMAINING QUANTITY Toner remaining quantity Magenta CYAN REMAINI...

Page 960: ...ch at a service call error PM counter notification When this function is effective it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count has reached to its setting value or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value Toner near empty notification When this function is effective it notifies each counter information and toner cartridge information if toner near empty oc...

Page 961: ...5C 5055C REMOTE SERVICE 10 23 2 Setting procedure 1 Press the USER FUNCTIONS button and select the ADMIN button Then enter the password and press the OK button Confirm the password to the administrator Fig 10 22 2 Press the SERVICE button Fig 10 23 3 Press the SERVICE NOTIFICATION button ...

Page 962: ...tton in SERVICE NOTIFICATION When the OFF button is pressed all functions related Service Notification become ineffective Fig 10 25 5 Enter the E mail address or FAX number of the destination When pressing the E MAIL button the screen is switched to a full keyboard Then enter the E mail addresses and press the OK button Maximum 3 addresses can be set ...

Page 963: ...2 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C REMOTE SERVICE 10 25 Fig 10 26 Press the FAX NUMBER button key in the FAX number and then press the OK button Fig 10 27 ...

Page 964: ...date setting and more than one day of the week also can be selected Day of the week More than one day can be selected Notify Date 1 Notify Date 2 You can send the Total Counter immediately without the above settings by pressing the SEND NOW button Day of the week SUN to SAT buttons Pressing the buttons Sunday to Saturday of the desired day makes transmission on every specified day More than one da...

Page 965: ...RVICE 10 27 Fig 10 29 Key in the date acceptable values 0 31 in Notify Date 1 or Notify Date 2 and press the OK button Time setting CHANGE button Pressing the CHANGE button sets the time at which you wand to send data This is the time when data are sent with Day of the week Notify Date 1 and Notify Date 2 ...

Page 966: ...s Service Notification setting 9793 0 OFF Invalid 1 E mail 2 FAX E mail address 1 9794 Maximum 192 letters E mail address 2 9607 Maximum 192 letters E mail address 3 9608 Maximum 192 letters FAX number 9784 Maximum 32 digits Total Counter Transmit setting 9795 0 OFF Invalid 1 ON Valid Total counter transmission date setting 9796 0 to 31 Total counter transmission date setting 2 9880 0 to 31 Day of...

Page 967: ...er Name CUSTOMER_NAME Tel Number 1234567890 E Mail customer_emailaddress dddd xxx Address CUSTOMER_ADDRESS Service Technician Number svc12 Name SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME Tel Number 0987654321 E Mail svc toshibatec co jp ChargeCounterFormat LargeSizeChargeCount 1 LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1 PMCounterFormat LargeSizePMCount 1 LargeSizePMPaperDefinition 0 Charge Counter Large Small Print Counter F...

Page 968: ...Pages Drive Counts K EPU Setting 00000000 00000000 Current 00000000 00000000 Y EPU Setting 00000000 00000000 Current 00000000 00000000 M EPU Setting 00000000 00000000 Current 00000000 00000000 C EPU Setting 00000000 00000000 Current 00000000 00000000 K EPU Setting 00000000 00000000 Current 00000000 00000000 Y EPU Setting 00000000 00000000 Current 00000000 00000000 M EPU Setting 00000000 00000000 C...

Page 969: ...t setting value EPU Y PM count present value PM driving count present value EPU Y PM count setting value PM driving count setting value EPU M PM count present value PM driving count present value EPU M PM count setting value PM driving count setting value EPU C PM count present value PM driving count present value EPU C PM count setting value PM driving count setting value Developer material K PM ...

Page 970: ...C 4555C 5055C 2012 2013 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REMOTE SERVICE 10 32 Toner remaining quantity Yellow Toner remaining quantity Magenta Toner remaining quantity Cyan Toner remaining quantity Black 46 47 48 49 ...

Page 971: ...7 MACHINE MODEL TOSHIBA e STUDIOxxxx SERIAL NUMBER 1234567890 TOTAL COUNTER 00004787 CUSTOMER NAME CUSTOMER_NAME CUSTOMER ADDRESS CUSTOMER_ADDRESS CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER 1234567890 CUSTOMER E MAIL ADDRESS customer_emailaddress dddd xxx SUPPLIER NAME SUPPLIER_NAME SUPPLIER ADDRESS SUPPLIER_ADDRESS SUPPLIER FAX NUMBER 5544332211 SUPPLIER E MAIL supplier_emailaddress ccccc xxx SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER ...

Page 972: ...00000 CURRENT VALUE K EPU PAGES 00000000 CURRENT VALUE K DEV DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 SETTING VALUE K EPU DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 SETTING VALUE Y DEV PAGES 00000000 CURRENT VALUE K EPU DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 CURRENT VALUE Y DEV PAGES 00000000 SETTING VALUE Y EPU PAGES 00000000 SETTING VALUE Y DEV DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 CURRENT VALUE Y EPU PAGES 00000000 CURRENT VALUE Y DEV DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 SETTING V...

Page 973: ...s in the Printer Function TWIN COLOR Number of output pages in the Copier Function BLACK Number of output pages in the Printer Function BLACK Number of output pages at the List Print Mode BLACK Number of output pages in the FAX Function BLACK 64 PRINTER ERROR HISTORY DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER 08 04 13 16 44 F110 00000000 08 04 13 16 44 F110 00000000 08 04 12 22 28 F...

Page 974: ...g value EPU Y PM count present value EPU Y PM driving count setting value EPU Y PM driving count present value EPU Y PM count setting value EPU M PM count present value EPU M PM driving count setting value EPU M PM driving count present value EPU M PM count setting value EPU C PM count present value EPU C PM driving count setting value EPU C PM driving count present value EPU C PM count setting va...

Page 975: ...t present value Developer material C PM driving count setting value Developer material C PM driving count present value Developer material C PM count setting value Other parts PM driving count present value Other parts PM driving count setting value Other parts PM driving count present value Other parts History of error 2 The latest 20 errors are displayed Toner remaining quantity Yellow Toner rem...

Page 976: ...iladdress dddd xxx Address CUSTOMER_ADDRESS Service Technician Number svc12 Name SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME Tel Number 0987654321 E Mail svc toshibatec co jp ChargeCounterFormat LargeSizeChargeCount 1 LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1 PMCounterFormat LargeSizePMCount 1 LargeSizePMPaperDefinition 0 Charge Counter Large Small Print Counter Black Copy 00000000 00000000 Print 00000000 00000000 List 000000...

Page 977: ...s in the FAX Function BLACK 16 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function Full color 17 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function BLACK 18 Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function BLACK 19 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function BLACK 20 Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function BLACK 29 30 31 32 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 Periodical Maintenance Counter P...

Page 978: ...nt present value EPU K 24 PM count setting value PM driving count setting value Developer material K 25 PM count present value PM driving count present value Developer material K 26 PM count setting value PM driving count setting value Other parts 27 PM count present value PM driving count present value Other parts 28 History error 29 Toner remaining quantity Yellow 30 Toner remaining quantity Mag...

Page 979: ...1234567890 TOTAL COUNTER 00004787 CUSTOMER NAME CUSTOMER_NAME CUSTOMER ADDRESS CUSTOMER_ADDRESS CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER 1234567890 CUSTOMER E MAIL ADDRESS customer_emailaddress dddd xxx SUPPLIER NAME SUPPLIER_NAME SUPPLIER ADDRESS SUPPLIER_ADDRESS SUPPLIER FAX NUMBER 5544332211 SUPPLIER E MAIL supplier_emailaddress ccccc xxx SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER svc12 SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NA...

Page 980: ...00 RECEIVE 00000000 00000000 PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER SETTING VALUE K EPU PAGES 00000000 CURRENT VALUE K EPU PAGES 00000000 SETTING VALUE K EPU DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 CURRENT VALUE K EPU DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 SETTING VALUE K DEV PAGES 00000000 CURRENT VALUE K DEV PAGES 00000000 COUNTER NOTIFICATION 1 SETTING VALUE K DEV DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 CURRENT VALUE K DEV DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 SETTING V...

Page 981: ...the Network Scanning Function Full color 17 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function BLACK 18 Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function BLACK 19 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function BLACK 20 Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function BLACK 21 Number of received pages in the FAX Function BLACK 22 PM count setting value EPU K 23 PM count present value EPU K 24 PM ...

Page 982: ...2 PM driving count setting value Other parts 33 PM driving count present value Other parts 34 History of error 35 Toner cartridge information 36 Toner near empty counter 37 Setting value of toner cartridge rotation time counter 38 Current value of toner cartridge rotation time counter 39 Color of toner cartridge 1 Black 2 Yellow 3 Magenta 4 Cyan 40 Destination setting of toner cartridge 2 The late...

Page 983: ...upplier Name SUPPLIER_NAME Tel Number 1122334455 E Mail supplier_emailaddress cccc xxx Address SUPPLIER_ADDRESS Customer Name CUSTOMER_NAME Tel Number 1234567890 E Mail customer_emailaddress dddd xxx Address CUSTOMER_ADDRESS Service Technician Number svc12 Name SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME Tel Number 0987654321 E Mail svc toshibatec co jp Printer Error History Date Time ErrorCode Counter 04 13 2012 16 ...

Page 984: ...d at Printer Severity Fixed at Error Error code Error message The content of error is displayed Supplier information Customer information Service technician information History of error 1 The latest 20 errors are displayed Toner remaining quantity Yellow Toner remaining quantity Magenta Toner remaining quantity Cyan Toner remaining quantity Black 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 46 12 13 14 15 ...

Page 985: ...ware Updating method System firmware USB device Download jig PWA DWNLD JIG2F Engine firmware USB device Scanner firmware System software PFC firmware Model name Firmware Updating method Reversing Automatic Document Feeder RADF MR 3025 RADF firmware USB device Finisher MJ 1036 Finisher firmware USB device Finisher MJ 1107 Finisher firmware USB device Finisher MJ 1108 Finisher firmware USB device Sa...

Page 986: ...ghts reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 11 2 Fig 11 1 Fig 11 2 A System firmware Engine firmware Scanner firmware System software PFC firmware RADF firmware Finisher firmware Saddle stitcher firmware Hole punch unit firmware P 11 8 B System firmware P 11 30 USB device A B PWA DWNLD JIG2F ...

Page 988: ... of delivery is written on the RADF control PC board and finisher control PC board When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field check the other firmware version used and then update with a corresponding suitable version Can t fetch Ver is displayed in the Installed Version field when the version of the installed firmware cannot be acquired properly If a normal power on is not p...

Page 989: ... firmware Logic PC board LGC board T210MWW xxx xxx is version ENGINE FIRMWARE Scanner firmware System control PC board SYS board T212SLGWW xxx xxx is version SCANNER FIRMWARE System software HDD T212HD0Wxxxx tar xxxx is version SYSTEM SOFTWARE HD Data PFC firmware Logic PC board LGC board T210MWW xxx xxxx is version PFC FIRMWARE Firmware Stored Data file name Display RADF firmware DLG board MR 302...

Page 990: ...e model specific folder This configuration is an example The number of files differs depending on the installed option Fig 11 4 Model specific folder name 2050C_5050C USB device 2050C_5050C T212HD0Wxxxx tar T212SF0Wxxxx tar T212MWW xxx T212SLGWW xxx H576DFWW 0xxx FIN1036 xxx FIN1107T xxx FIN1108T xxx SDL1108T xxx PUN6104T xxx signature H sig T210FWW xxx ...

Page 991: ...s Forum Class number 8 08h Mass storage class Sub class number 6 06h SCSI transfer command set Protocol number 80 50h Bulk Only Most common USB devices comply with the specification above and can be used for updating However the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Color Systems and Multi Functional Digital Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the most of these devices are develope...

Page 992: ...r shut down the equipment during the update Firmware data and the following option data if installed could be damaged and may not be able to be operated properly Data Overwrite Enabler GP 1070 Meta Scan Enabler GS 1010 External Interface Enabler GS 1020 IPSec Enabler GP 1080 Hardcopy Security kit GP 1190A A Updating firmware 1 Connect the USB device to the PC and write the model specific folder in...

Page 993: ...creen 5 Enter the password and then press the OK button If the password is not set for Service press the OK button without entering anything Fig 11 6 The screen for selecting items to be updated is displayed after approx 3 minutes On this screen the current firmware version of this equipment and the firmware version of data to be updated are displayed Fig 11 7 Enter Password _ 1 Q W E R T Y U I O ...

Page 994: ... is version 3 SCANNER FIRMWARE T212SLGWW xxx is written xxx is version 4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE HD Data T212HD0Wxxxx tar is written xxxx is version 5 RADF FIRMWARE H576DFWW 0xxx is written When MR 3025 is connected xxx is version 6 PFC FIRMWARE T210FWW xxx is written When GH 1080 is connected xxx is version 7 FINISHER FIRMWARE FIN1036T xxx is written When MJ 1036 is connected FIN1107T xxx is written When...

Page 995: ...C FIRMWARE Updating PFC firmware 7 FINISHER FIRMWARE Updating Finisher firmware 8 SADDLE FIRMWARE Updating Saddle firmware 9 PUNCH FIRMWARE Updating Punch firmware Status display during update Status display when update is completed SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS Data update in progress SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS Data Completed ENGINE FIRMWARE update in progress ENGINE FIRMWARE Completed SCANNER FIRMWARE update in pr...

Page 996: ...ress are displayed on the control panel When the check is completed properly no message for notifying the success will appear and the firmware updating will start If it fails Invalid Signature and Copy Data with valid signature in USB will be shown In that case firmware updating cannot be performed so turn the power OFF and disconnect the USB device Check that there is no abnormality in the firmwa...

Page 997: ...ror When the download is finished M08 Reception status code abnormality When the download is requested Reception status code abnormality When the download is requested M09 Reception status code abnormality When the download is written Reception status code abnormality When the download is written M10 Reception status code abnormality When the download is finished Reception status code abnormality ...

Page 998: ...cted R00 Other error Other error PFC firmware update Error Error number Error message Error content F01 Time out When the download is requested Communication timeout When the download is requested F02 Time out When the download is written Communication timeout When the download is written F03 Time out When the download is finished Communication timeout When the download is finished F04 Reception f...

Page 999: ...t When the download is requested F02 Time out When the download is written Communication timeout When the download is written F03 Time out When the download is finished Communication timeout When the download is finished F04 Reception failed When the download is requested Downloading request was denied When the download is requested F05 Deletion error When the download is written Deletion error Wh...

Page 1000: ... 2 1 Automatic gamma adjustment Automatic gamma adjustment PRT 05 8008 using 70 FAX test pattern P 6 51 6 3 1 Automatic gamma adjustment Automatic gamma adjustment PRT 05 8009 using 230 FAX test pattern P 6 51 6 3 1 Automatic gamma adjustment A04 Reception failed When the download is requested Downloading request was denied When the download is requested A05 Deletion error When the download is wri...

Page 1001: ...ition diagram below Update Completed 1 SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS Data 7 PUNCH FIRMWARE 2 ENGINE FIRMWARE 3 SCANNER FIRMWARE 4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE HD Data 5 RADF FIRMWARE 8 SADDLE FIRMWARE 9 FINISHER FIRMWARE 6 PFC FIRMWARE Item Selection Screen for Update System firmware Engine firmware Engine firmware Scanner firmware System software RADF firmware Punch firmware Saddle firmware Finisher firmware PFC firmwar...

Page 1002: ...rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 11 18 During the update Update in progress is displayed on the right of each item After it is completed Completed is displayed there Example screens of the system firmware update are as follows and these are the same for other firmware Fig 11 9 ...

Page 1003: ...B device Important Only the USB devices which meet the following conditions should be used for updating Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed A combination USB device with a flash memory to be connected directly to the USB port and its capacity is 1GB or more Operation of the USB device used for updating has been confirmed at the input check of this equ...

Page 1004: ...ice is operational in the equipment for which the updating will be performed when purchasing it The USB devices complying with USB2 0 can be used for updating Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory such as a USB connection type memory card reader CD DVD drive or hard disk since it is never guaranteed It is possible to store the model specific update program and ...

Page 1005: ...ly Data Overwrite Enabler GP 1070 Meta Scan Enabler GS 1010 External Interface Enabler GS 1020 IPSec Enabler GP 1080 Hardcopy Security kit GP 1190A A Updating firmware 1 Connect the USB device to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data file is stored Store the data file for updating in the model specific folder 2 Press the ON OFF button on the control panel to shut down the eq...

Page 1006: ...he screen for selecting items to be updated is displayed after approx 3 minutes On this screen the current firmware version of this equipment and the firmware version of data to be updated are displayed Fig 11 13 Enter Password _ 1 Q W E R T Y U I O P 2 3 A S D F G H J K L 4 5 6 Z X C V B N M 7 8 9 Caps Space Backspace Ok Reset ...

Page 1007: ...ts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen The follow screen shows the display when selecting 1 SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS Data in the update selection menu Update in progress is displayed on the right side of the selected item and then Verifying Signature appears Item Condition 1 SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS Data T212SFPWxxxx tar is written xxxx is version 2 SYSTEM SOFTWARE HD Data T212HDPWxxxx ta...

Page 1009: ...RPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2555C 3055C 3555C 4555C 5055C FIRMWARE UPDATING 11 25 8 Patch Update Successful Restart the MFP is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly Fig 11 15 ...

Page 1010: ...pment operate properly When an System firmware OS Data update error or System software HD Data update error occurs Update Failed or Failed appears on the screen and the error number appears next to the message For details of each error refer to the following tables 9 Press the ON OFF button to shut down the equipment and then remove the USB device B Confirmation of the updated data After the updat...

Page 1011: ...A DWNLD JIG2F is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the board directly Therefore ROM writer adapter PWA DL ADP 350 is required to write the data to these Flash ROMs Refer to the following to write the data Remarks Useable jigs Download jigs for this equipment are as follows Jigs No 3 and 4 above can be used if a relay board is installed together even though the shape of their connectors ...

Page 1012: ...50 4 ROM writer Notes There are two types of the ROM writer adapter Use the proper one according to the ROM writer to be used Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model name indicated on the board Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used before connecting them If an unapplied adapter is connected the application of the ROM writer judg...

Page 1013: ...The data may not be written correctly if it is not set Load the data file into the buffer by means of the following settings A 1 System firmware Notes Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM version is different Auto Format Detected Binary From File Normal To Buffer Normal From File Address 0 To Buffer Address 0 Buffer Size 800100 Clear Buffe...

Page 1014: ...r delete the by pressing the number of the item 9 Press the START button Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen 10 Update successfully completed is displayed on the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly Turn the power OFF by pressing the ON OFF button Notes Update Failed is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed ...

Page 1015: ...y to select 5 ADIKey SRAM to FROM then press the START button 15 Press the ON OFF button to shut down the equipment 16 Initialize the updated data by following the steps below Turn the power ON by pressing the ON OFF button while holding down the 0 and 8 keys simultaneously Key in 9030 and then press the START button Press the INITIALIZE button B Confirmation of the updated data After the updating...

Page 1016: ...eplacing the board Options K PWA DLM 320F Fig 11 20 1 Connector 2 Mark for ROM installation direction 3 LED 4 ROM Important Pay attention to the direction of the ROM Remarks Useable jigs Download jigs for this equipment are as follows Jig No 2 above can be used if a relay board is installed together even though the shape of its connector differs Relay board PWA DWNLD RELAY 34F Model name Firmware ...

Page 1017: ...d recover it Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment Turning OFF the power may clear the data below Confirm that the MEMORY RX LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data Press the JOB STATUS button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no memory transmission data Print the Mailbox Relay box report and then confirm that there are no F code da...

Page 1018: ...witch on the right hand surface of the equipment remove the download jig and then install the cover plate 8 In the FAX Clearing Mode perform the FAX Set Up Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode 08 08 9000 Destination setting of the equipment 08 9001 Destination setting of the FAX machine Turn ON the power while 1 button and button are pressed simultaneously Key in 100 Pres...

Page 1019: ...m firmware 08 9930 System firmware version Updating Engine firmware 08 9901 Engine firmware version Updating Scanner firmware 08 9902 Scanner firmware version Updating System software 08 8952 HD data external version 08 9900 System software version Updating PFC firmware 08 9940 PFC firmware version Updating RADF firmware 08 9903 RADF firmware version Updating Finisher firmware 08 9904 Finisher fir...

Page 1020: ...ith the USB device becomes possible only after the System firmware has been updated See the updating procedure below for details P 11 27 11 4 Firmware Updating with PWA DWNLD JIG2F 2 Update the following firmware using the USB device System firmware Engine firmware Scanner firmware System software PFC firmware RADF firmware Finisher firmware Saddle stitcher firmware Hole punch unit firmware See th...

Page 1021: ...rmware failed USB update failed Update completed Update download jig Check system firmware version 08 9930 Update succeeded Replace SYS board Is system firmware version correct 11 4 2 System firmware 11 6 Confirmation of the updated data YES YES YES NO NO NO Failed twice or more YES NO Failed twice or more Update USB 11 2 Firmware Updating with USB device Update USB 11 2 Firmware Updating with USB...

Page 1022: ...tion Replace HDD YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO USB update failed Failed twice or more Update USB Update succeeded Check system software version 08 9900 11 6 Confirmation of the updated data Is system software version correct Update completed Update USB Update succeeded Replace SYS board Update USB 11 2 Firmware Updating with USB device Update USB 11 2 Firmware Updating with USB device ...

Page 1023: ...M RADF ROM failed YES YES YES NO NO NO USB update failed Failed twice or more USB update Update succeeded Check ROM version 11 6 Confirmation of the updated data Is ROM version correct Update completed Replace target board USB update 11 2 Firmware Updating with USB device USB update 11 2 Firmware Updating with USB device Check harness connection SYS board Target board ...

Page 1025: ...ers Forum Class number 8 08h Mass storage class Sub Class number 6 06h SCSI transfer command set Protocol number 80 50h Bulk only The USB device should be formatted in the FAT or FAT32 Correct operation cannot be guaranteed if it is formatted in NTFS exFAT Most of the common USB device are compliant with the above specifications and are therefore applicable to this data cloning However most of the...

Page 1026: ...al Number and then press the START button 5 Key in the serial number on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment and then press the OK button 6 Serial Number Setting completed is displayed 7 Turn the power OFF 8 Turn the power ON while pressing the 5 and 9 buttons simultaneously 9 Enter the password and then press the OK button If the password is not set for Service press the ENTER bu...

Page 1027: ...kup procedure 7 Enter the serial number for the backup file 8 Restore successfully done Restart the MFP is displayed on the LCD screen when the restoring has been properly completed 9 Press the ON OFF button to shut down the equipment Notes To perform cloning with the SRAM data backed up before the ADI HDD is initialized or replaced follow the procedure below after the restoration is finished 1 Tu...

Page 1028: ... detected The USB device has not been installed SRAM Device Not Connected The SRAM board for the SYS board has not been installed Backup not created Creation of the Backup file of data of the SRAM board for the SYS board has been failed Encryption Failed An encryption of the backup file has been failed password Not Appended to Backup Addition of the encryption password has been failed MFP Serial N...

Page 1029: ...5C 4555C 5055C BACKUP FUNCTION 12 5 Invalid MFP Serial Number xxxxxxxxx An incorrect MFP Serial No has been entered MFP Serial Number Not Set Acquisition of the MFP Serial No has been failed Backup File Corrupted A backup file has been damaged Restore Display content Error content ...

Page 1030: ...setting To ensure security ask the user machine administrator to back up or restore the user s data and information in the HDD A service technician can back up or restore them only when the user machine administrator permits it Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be left only on printouts When the data encryption function is enabled the following items are restricted 08 9112 Auto Shut...

Page 1031: ...or setting the data encryption function is shown below Fig 12 4 Start A Back up data in HDD C Print out FUNCTION list D Erase HDD E Reset user s setting item and restore data information F Reset FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE G Reset FUNCTION list H Check actuation of data encryption function setting Setting completed B Print out FUNCTION FOR MAINTENANCE ...

Page 1032: ...lable Export them in Administrator menu of TopAccess Log data Print Scan FAX Transmission Reception Message Log Available Export them in the Log menu of TopAccess Import cannot be performed Data in the shared folder Scanned data Saved data of copy FAX transmission Available Copy them to the client computer via the network The data which have been copied to the client computer cannot be copied to t...

Page 1033: ...ing items and restore data information Ask the user machine administrator to reset the user s setting items and to restore data or information Refer to the following for the reset and restore Notes When the SSL is enabled perform the setting of the following items again with Create self certificate of TopAccess Country Name State or Province Name Locality Name Organization Name Organizational Unit...

Page 1034: ...list Reset the fax function by referring to the function list that was printed out in P 12 9 C Print out FUNCTION list 1 Press the USER FUNCTIONS button 2 Press the ADMIN button enter the password and then press the ENTER button 3 Press the FAX button and then the TERMINAL ID button to set each item 4 Press the INITIAL SETUP button to set each item Notes Explain to the user machine administrator a...

Page 1035: ...his function To disable it set 0 Invalid in the code 08 9379 at step P 12 9 D Enable data encryption function 12 2 5 Procedure for discarding HDD when data encryption function is enabled Set the data encryption function disabled following the procedure shown in P 12 11 12 2 4 Procedure for disabling data encryption function Then perform the code 3C 6 Erase HDD Securely HDD securely erasing to comp...

Page 1036: ...o back up user data such as documents Address Book templates or fax settings using the export function or the backup restore utility of the TopAccess Refer to items noted in P 12 6 12 2 AES Data Encryption Function Setting Make a note of the settings on the Administration tab page of the TopAccess in advance Compatibility of cloning data is lost between the High Security Mode and the normal mode t...

Page 1037: ...words must not be the same In the High Security Mode restrictions are set to the following self diagnostic codes In the above case the password is not reset The password setting can be changed with the code 08 8919 The HDD is initialized and the saved user data are deleted when the equipment returns to the normal mode from the High Security Mode Be sure to back up user data before having it do so ...

Page 1039: ...C24V 10 5 4 Out KCTRON Mechanical Counter On Signal Open Collector L ON 5 Power 24V 24V line DC24V 10 5 6 Out CTRON Total Counter On Signal Open Collector L ON In use 7 In CTRCNT Copy permission Signal 1 L 0V H DC3 3V L Allowed In use 8 Out MCRUN Ready to Copy Signal Open Collector L Operating In use 9 Out EXTCTR Exit Sensor On Signal Open Collector L Operating In use 10 GND PG Power ground 0V In ...

Page 1040: ... 1260 1 Out LARGE SMALL Paper size Signal Open Collector L Large size In use 2 Out FULL COLOR Full color mode Signal Open Collector L Full color In use 3 Out TWN MON COLOR Twin color Mono color Mode Signal Open Collector L Twin colors In use 4 Out B W Black mode Signal Open Collector L Black In use 5 Power N C 5VA 5V line DC5 0V At the sleep mode ON 6 GND GND Signal Ground In use 7 N C Pin No I O ...

Page 1041: ...output signal The MCRUN signal is changed to Low during copying It becomes Low at 30 ms or more before the CTRON signal is turned ON and High at 50 ms or more after the EXTCTR signal goes OFF However if copying is interrupted due to forced toner supply or similar this signal is High until copying is made possible again This is the signal for the coin controller Fig 13 2 4 EXTCTR signal output sign...

Page 1042: ...he coin controller 8 FULL COLOR signal output signal If the full color mode is selected it outputs Low in real time In other cases it outputs High By default it outputs Low since it is set as full color mode This is the signal only for the coin controller 9 TWN MON COLOR signal output signal If the twin color or mono color mode is selected it outputs Low in real time In other cases it outputs High...

Page 1043: ...d by setting to 5 Coin controller supporting ACS mixed size However operation is not guaranteed unless the specification for the ACS timing is met 08 9017 Setting for counter installed externally It should be charged precisely according to the usage Example To charge only when copies are made set to 1 08 6011 Definition setting of large sized paper Set to 0 if only A3 and LD are regarded as large ...

Page 1045: ...ite Black White Black AC N DRM R AC L DRM R 1 2 J009 1 2 White Black AC N SCN AC L SCN White Black White Black 1 2 12 11 1 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 J906 2 1 2 1 J904 2 1 2 1 J905 3 2 3 1 1 2 J1101 CN563 CN562 CN503 CN502 CN501 CN507 CN506 PS ACC Black White AC L 7 9 5 8 6 10 3 4 I H PWA FIL CN552 CN551 CN553 CN554 2 1 2 1 J901 White Black White Black Optional for NAD MJD model standard fo...

Page 1046: ...PORATION All rights reserved WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION 14 2 1 Inlet AC IN 7 Thermostat Right 2 Main power switch 8 Drum damp heater Right 3 Thermostat 9 Thermostat Left 4 IH COIL 10 Drum damp heater Left 5 Scanner damp heater 11 Relay 1 6 Drum damp heater 12 Relay 2 ...

Page 1047: ...7 M CN452 J1002 HRNS DRV RGSTMOT 212 RGST MOT M14 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 M M TRAY U MOT M15 M 1 J1089 MDHCLT 24V TR H CLT CLT5 3 2 1 J1084 FDCLT2 24V CST2 FEED CLT CLT4 3 2 1 PWA H LGC LGC PWA H LGC LGC PWA DISP DSP DFAK 24V SFBCLT NC 24V 3 4 5 6 7 SG SFBSIZE0 SFBSIZE1 SFBSIZE2 SFBSIZE3 3 2 1 SFB FEED CLT CLT3 J1073 SG CST2SW 3 3VL SG TBMJAM 5V 5 4 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 SG SFBSIZE0 SFBSIZE1 SFBSI...

Page 1048: ...new detection switch C 8 B SW12 K drum old new detection switch C 8 B SW13 Y developer unit old new detection switch C 8 B SW14 M developer unit old new detection switch C 8 B SW15 C developer unit old new detection switch C 8 B SW16 K developer unit old new detection switch C 8 B SW17 CST2 WDT SW 2nd drawer paper width detection switch G 4 C SW18 CST2 LGT SW 2nd drawer paper length detection swit...

Page 1049: ...e detection sensor 0 OFF ON E Bypass feed paper existence sensor No paper Paper present F G H A Option connection detection signal B Refer to table2 H L B Option connection detection signal A Refer to table2 H L C D Finisher connection detection Not connected Connected E Fuser unit connection detection Connected Not connected F G H A New Old drum detection K Old New B New Old drum detection C Old ...

Page 1050: ...tact non contact sensor Color drive Black drive G BK C drive connection position sensor Black drive Color drive H A Registration sensor No paper Paper present B Feed sensor1 Paper present No paper C Exit sensor No paper Paper present D Switchback sensor No paper Paper present E Paper clinging detection sensor No paper Paper present F Registration transit sensor Paper present No paper G ADU entranc...

Page 1051: ...tection 2 Refer to table 6 H L A B C LCF connection detection Not connected Connected D PFP connection detection Not connected Connected E F G Cover open detection PFC side Open Blowout of 24V fuse Closed H A Paper feeding jam releasing cover opening closing switch Open Closed B 3 3VLSW monitor Normal Abnormal C 5VF monitor Abnormal Normal D Feed sensor2 No paper Paper present E Drawer 2 tray up s...

Page 1052: ...idth sensor TWID2S Refer to table3 OFF H ON L D E RADF original length sensor Original present No original F RADF original width sensor 1 Original present No original G RADF original width sensor 2 Original present No original H A Drawer 2 paper width detection sensor 3 OFF ON B Drawer 2 paper width detection sensor 2 OFF ON C Drawer 2 paper width detection sensor 1 OFF ON D Drawer 2 paper width d...

Page 1053: ...mpty sensor Shielded Transmissive E PFP lower drawer tray up sensor Tray at upper limit position Other than upper limit position F PFP lower drawer detection sensor Open Closed G PFP lower drawer paper empty sensor No paper Paper present H PFP lower drawer paper nearly empty sensor Shielded Transmissive A PFP upper drawer paper width detection sensor 3 OFF ON B PFP upper drawer paper width detecti...

Page 1054: ...ay transport Other than position after tray transport H LCF end fence home position sensor Home position Other than home position A LCF jam releasing cover opening closing detection Closed Open B LCF tray detection standby side Open Closed C Empty sensor at LCF standby side No paper Paper present D E LCF standby side paper misload Properly loaded Paper misload F LCF transport sensor No paper Paper...

Page 1055: ...or input 0 L L L L L H H L H H L L H H Table 5 IH power voltage destination 0 JPD 100V H NAD 115V H MJD 230V L Table 6 Fuser unit contact release position 1 Released H Envelope L Contacting H Paper width size Original tray width sensor 1 1 1 Bypass paper width sensor 0 No option is connected 0 SIO read in NG 1 L TWID0S L H 1 Bridge unit is connected L JSP is connected L IH error input 2 Contents P...

Page 1056: ...162 Code No 112 function OFF 1 163 Code No 113 function OFF 1 164 Code No 114 function OFF 1 165 Code No 115 function OFF 1 166 Code No 116 function OFF 1 168 Code No 118 function OFF 1 170 Code No 120 function OFF 1 171 Code No 121 function OFF 1 172 Code No 122 function OFF 1 175 Code No 125 function OFF 1 176 Code No 126 function OFF 1 201 1st drawer feed clutch ON OFF 3 202 2nd drawer feed clu...

Page 1057: ...FP lower drawer tray up motor ON tray up 2 281 RADF feed motor ON OFF normal rotation 3 282 RADF feed motor ON OFF reverse rotation 3 283 RADF read motor ON OFF 3 284 RADF exit reverse motor ON OFF normal rotation 3 285 RADF exit reverse motor ON OFF reverse rotation 3 294 Reverse exit solenoid ON OFF 3 295 Power OFF mode 4 297 RADF fan motor ON OFF 3 301 Modem test 2100Hz 2 302 Modem test 14 4KBP...

Page 1058: ...Ozone exhaust fan high speed ON OFF 3 445 Fuser section cooling fan 2 ON OFF 45 50ppm only 3 446 Exit section cooling fan high speed ON OFF 3 447 Power supply unit cooling fan low speed drive ON OFF 3 448 Power supply unit cooling fan high speed drive ON OFF 3 450 Fuser section cooling fan 1 ON OFF 3 451 Developer cooling exhaust fan ON OFF 3 461 Finisher packing position shift Available when MJ 1...

Page 1059: ...pattern Pattern width 1 dot Pitch 10 mm 2 LGC 205 Grid pattern Pattern width 2 dot Pitch 10 mm 2 LGC 245 Halftone 3 pixels 2 LGC 259 Grid pattern Low temperature Pattern width 2 dot Pitch 10 mm 2 LGC 270 Image quality control test pattern For checking the image quality control 2 LGC 286 LED dot missing check pattern 1 LGC Use this code to perform test print at the print speed for low temperature e...

Page 1060: ...ly set during this adjustment approx 2 minutes As the value increases the sensor output increases correspondingly 5 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Developm ent Auto adj for dev material supply and ATS 2403 Adjustment for C 0 255 M The value starts changing approx 3 minutes after this adjustment is started The value is automatically set during this adjustment approx 2 minutes As the value increase...

Page 1061: ... bias DC calibration voltage Y 2627 0 Lower limit 200 0 1000 M Unit V 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Developm ent Developer bias DC calibration voltage Y 2627 1 Upper limit 900 0 1000 M Unit V 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Developm ent Developer bias DC calibration voltage M 2628 0 Lower limit 200 0 1000 M Unit V 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Developm ent Developer bias DC calibration v...

Page 1062: ...l Image quality closed loop control contrast voltage correction Full mode maximum number of time corrected 2670 1 M 5 0 16 M Sets the maximum correction number of time of the contrast voltage in the closed loop control full mode 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Image control Image quality closed loop control contrast voltage correction Full mode maximum number of time corrected 2670 2 C 5 0 16 M Sets...

Page 1063: ...the toner amount adhered becomes 10 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Image control Output value display of image quality sensor 2732 1 2nd pattern M 0 0 1023 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor when the 2nd pattern low density test pattern is output The larger the value the smaller the toner amount adhered becomes 10 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Image control Output value display...

Page 1064: ...0 2758 1 Light intensity adjustment bit value 0 0 999 M Only 0 can be entered Unit bit 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Image control Image quality sensor detection value At the occurrence of CE40 2758 2 First pattern Y detection value 0 0 999 M Only 0 can be entered Unit bit 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Image control Image quality sensor detection value At the occurrence of CE40 2758 3 First patter...

Page 1065: ...ess Transfer 1st transfer output offset 2905 1 M normal speed 5 0 10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output Offsetting level 0 0 75 1 0 80 2 0 85 3 0 90 4 0 95 5 1 00 6 1 05 7 1 10 8 1 15 9 1 20 10 1 25 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 1st transfer output offset 2905 2 C normal speed 5 0 10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output Offsetting level 0 0 75 1 0 80 2 0 85...

Page 1066: ... Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 1st transfer output offset 2905 11 BK decelerating 5 0 10 M Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer output Offsetting level 0 0 75 1 0 80 2 0 85 3 0 90 4 0 95 5 1 00 6 1 05 7 1 10 8 1 15 9 1 20 10 1 25 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer Bias offset in the color mode Front side 2934 0 Plain paper 5 0 10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias...

Page 1067: ...10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the color mode Front side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4 0 8 5 1 0 6 1 2 7 1 4 8 1 6 9 1 8 10 2 0 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer Bias offset in the color mode Front side 2934 6 Special paper 2 5 0 10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the color mode Front side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 ...

Page 1068: ... M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the color mode Front side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4 0 8 5 1 0 6 1 2 7 1 4 8 1 6 9 1 8 10 2 0 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer Bias offset in the color mode Back side 2935 0 Plain paper 5 0 10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the color mode Back side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4 0 8 ...

Page 1069: ...0 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the color mode Back side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4 0 8 5 1 0 6 1 2 7 1 4 8 1 6 9 1 8 10 2 0 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer Bias offset in the color mode Back side 2935 7 Recycled paper 5 0 10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the color mode Back side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4 0...

Page 1070: ...s the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the black mode Front side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4 0 8 5 1 0 6 1 2 7 1 4 8 1 6 9 1 8 10 2 0 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer Bias offset in the black mode Front side 2936 1 Thick paper 1 5 0 10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the black mode Front side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4 0 8 5 ...

Page 1071: ... 0 10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the black mode Front side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4 0 8 5 1 0 6 1 2 7 1 4 8 1 6 9 1 8 10 2 0 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer Bias offset in the black mode Front side 2936 7 Recycled paper 5 0 10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the black mode Front side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 ...

Page 1072: ...M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the black mode Back side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4 0 8 5 1 0 6 1 2 7 1 4 8 1 6 9 1 8 10 2 0 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer Bias offset in the black mode Back side 2937 1 Thick paper 1 5 0 10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the black mode Back side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4 0 8 ...

Page 1073: ...0 10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the black mode Back side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4 0 8 5 1 0 6 1 2 7 1 4 8 1 6 9 1 8 10 2 0 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer Bias offset in the black mode Back side 2937 8 Thick paper 4 5 0 10 M Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the black mode Back side Offsetting level 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 4 3 0 6 4...

Page 1074: ...ge bias correction factor Front side in the color mode 2938 1 Thick paper 1 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias Front side in the color mode Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer leading edge bias correction factor Front side ...

Page 1075: ...n t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer leading edge bias correction factor Front side in the color mode 2938 6 Special paper 2 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias Front side in the color mode Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd trans...

Page 1076: ...de Process Transfer 2nd transfer leading edge bias correction factor Front side in the color mode 2938 11 Special paper 3 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias Front side in the color mode Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer l...

Page 1077: ...de Process Transfer 2nd transfer leading edge bias correction factor Back side in the color mode 2939 5 Special paper 1 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias Back side in the color mode Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer lead...

Page 1078: ...mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer leading edge bias correction factor Back side in the color mode 2939 10 Envelope 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias Back side in the color mode Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer leading ...

Page 1079: ...rocess Transfer 2nd transfer leading edge bias correction factor Front side in the black mode 2940 3 Thick paper 3 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias Front side in the black mode Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer leading ...

Page 1080: ...en t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer leading edge bias correction factor Front side in the black mode 2940 8 Thick paper 4 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias Front side in the black mode Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transf...

Page 1081: ...t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer leading edge bias correction factor Back side in the black mode 2941 1 Thick paper 1 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias Back side in the black mode Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer le...

Page 1082: ...n t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer leading edge bias correction factor Back side in the black mode 2941 7 Recycled paper 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer leading edge bias Back side in the black mode Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer...

Page 1083: ...ing end 2961 0 Normal speed High speed 0 0 7 M 0 Once 1 Twice 2 3 times 3 5 times 4 7 times 5 10 times 6 12 times 7 15 times 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer Number of time of cleaning at printing end 2961 1 Decelerating 0 0 7 M 0 Once 1 Twice 2 3 times 3 5 times 4 7 times 5 10 times 6 12 times 7 15 times 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer Number of time of cleaning at jam recovery bypas...

Page 1084: ... the value increases by 1 the image shifts by approx 0 08192 mm toward the trailing edge of the paper If the value of 05 3031 is changed the values of 05 3046 and 05 3047 are also changed However the value of 05 3031 is not changed even if the values of 05 3046 and 05 3047 are changed When the value of 05 3031 is changed confirm the values of 05 3046 and 05 3047 When adjusting 05 3031 05 3046 and ...

Page 1085: ...ng from RADF 3046 Carriage position adjustment during scanning from RADF black 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases by 1 the carriage position shifts by approx 0 1 mm toward the exit side when using the RADF When adjusting 05 3031 05 3046 and 05 3047 adjust 05 3031 first then adjust 05 3046 and 05 3047 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Scanner Scanner Carriage position adjustment during scanning from RADF 3...

Page 1086: ...um time 2040ms Minimum value 0 Minimum time 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Scanner Scanner Size detection of original 3237 Starting time adjustment of lamp lighting 64 0 255 SYS Adjusts the starting time of lamp lighting when the detection accuracy of dark originals is poor Maximum value 255 Minimum time 2040 ms Minimum value 0 Minimum time 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Image Adj of primary scan writing st...

Page 1087: ... M When the value increases by 1 the image shifts toward the front side by 0 0423 mm 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Image Adjustment of drawer sideways deviation 4018 5 Bypass feeding 128 0 255 M When the value increases by 1 the image shifts toward the front side by 0 0423 mm 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Image Adj of primary scan writing start Duplex feeding 4019 0 Long size 128 0 255 M When the ...

Page 1088: ...ing edge of the paper by approx 0 1 mm 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Image Leading edge position adjustment Normal speed 4061 Bypass feeding 50 0 100 M When the value increases by 1 the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx 0 1 mm 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Image Leading edge position adjustment Normal speed 4062 Duplex feeding 50 0 100 M When the value increases ...

Page 1089: ...lue 4067 0 1st drawer 50 0 100 M When the value increases by 1 the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx 0 1 mm 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Image Leading edge position adjustment Speed at low temperature Subsidiary adjustment value 4067 1 2nd drawer 50 0 100 M When the value increases by 1 the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx 0 1 mm 4 05 Adjustm...

Page 1090: ... 1 the aligning amount increases as follows 25 30 35ppm 0 54 mm 45 50ppm 0 81 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 27 45 50ppm 15 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment 1st drawer 4100 1 P...

Page 1091: ...iddle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 28 45 50ppm 15 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment 1st drawer 4100 3 Plain paper Short size2 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follows 25 3...

Page 1092: ...Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 28 45 50ppm 15 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment 2nd drawer 4101 0 Plain paper Long size Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follows 25 30...

Page 1093: ...Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 27 45 50ppm 14 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment 2nd drawer 4101 2 Plain paper Short size1 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follows 25 ...

Page 1094: ...Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 22 45 50ppm 8 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment 2nd drawer 4101 4 Plain paper Short size3 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follows 25 3...

Page 1095: ...ddle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 28 45 50ppm 16 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4103 1 Plain paper Middle size Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follows 2...

Page 1096: ...iddle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 28 45 50ppm 16 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4103 3 Plain paper Short size2 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follows ...

Page 1097: ...ystem Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4104 0 Thick paper1 Long size Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 27 4 ...

Page 1098: ...port Paper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4104 3 Thick paper1 Short size2 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 27 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen...

Page 1099: ...aper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4105 1 Thick paper2 Envelope Middle size Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 27 4 Yes 05 Adjust...

Page 1100: ...port Paper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4105 4 Thick paper2 Envelope Short size3 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 27 4 Yes 05 ...

Page 1101: ...ort Paper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4106 2 Thick paper3 4 Short size1 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 27 4 Yes 05 Adjustme...

Page 1102: ... transport Paper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4107 0 OHP film Long size Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 30 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen...

Page 1103: ...nsport Paper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4107 3 OHP film Short size2 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 30 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t...

Page 1104: ...ddle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 23 45 50ppm 12 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment PFP upper drawer 4108 1 Plain paper Middle size Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follows...

Page 1105: ...iddle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 22 45 50ppm 10 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment PFP upper drawer 4108 3 Plain paper Short size2 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follow...

Page 1106: ...Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 22 45 50ppm 10 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment PFP lower drawer 4109 0 Plain paper Long size Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follows...

Page 1107: ...iddle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 22 45 50ppm 10 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment PFP lower drawer 4109 2 Plain paper Short size1 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follow...

Page 1108: ...iddle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 22 45 50ppm 10 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment PFP lower drawer 4109 4 Plain paper Short size3 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follow...

Page 1109: ...ddle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 21 45 50ppm 11 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment ADU 4110 1 Plain paper Middle size Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follows 25 30 35 45 ...

Page 1110: ...Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35ppm 21 45 50ppm 5 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment ADU 4110 3 Plain paper Short size2 Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follows 25 30 35 45...

Page 1111: ...justmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment LCF 4111 Plain paper Refer to content 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases as follows 25 30 35ppm 0 54 mm 45 50ppm 0 81 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter...

Page 1112: ...1st drawer 4113 1 Thick paper Special paper 22 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the paper pushing amount at feeding from 1st drawer increases by approx 0 54 mm 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment 1st drawer 4115 0 Thick paper1 Long size Refer to content s 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54...

Page 1113: ...sport Paper aligning amount adjustment 1st drawer 4115 3 Thick paper1 Short size2 Refer to content s 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 27 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen ...

Page 1114: ...port Paper aligning amount adjustment 2nd drawer 4116 1 Thick paper1 Middle size Refer to content s 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 21 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t...

Page 1115: ...ort Paper aligning amount adjustment 2nd drawer 4116 4 Thick paper1 Short size3 Refer to content s 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 16 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t ...

Page 1116: ...rt Paper aligning amount adjustment PFP upper drawer 4117 2 Thick paper1 Short size1 Refer to content s 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 16 4 Yes 05 Adjustm...

Page 1117: ...ort Paper aligning amount adjustment PFP lower drawer 4118 0 Thick paper1 Long size Refer to content s 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 19 4 Yes 05 Adjustme...

Page 1118: ...rt Paper aligning amount adjustment PFP lower drawer 4118 3 Thick paper1 Short size2 Refer to content s 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 16 4 Yes 05 Adjustm...

Page 1119: ...t Paper aligning amount adjustment ADU 4120 1 Thick paper Special paper Middle size Refer to content s 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 6 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 13 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen...

Page 1120: ...ort Paper aligning amount adjustment ADU 4120 4 Thick paper Special paper Short size3 Refer to content s 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 6 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 13 4 Yes 05 Adjustm...

Page 1121: ...rt Paper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4128 2 Special paper1 Short size1 Refer to content s 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 27 4 Yes 05 Adjustm...

Page 1122: ...ort Paper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4129 0 Special paper2 Long size Refer to content s 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 27 4 Yes 05 Adjustme...

Page 1123: ...M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter Default value 25 30 35 45 50ppm 27 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount adjustment Bypass feeding 4129 4 Spec...

Page 1124: ...f registration motor rotational speed 4523 9 Transport speed2 128 0 255 M When the value increases the motor speed becomes faster 0 1 step 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Drive Fine adjustment of registration motor rotational speed 4523 10 Speed at low temperature 128 0 255 M When the value increases the motor speed becomes faster 0 1 step This code is valid for 45 50ppm only 4 05 Adjustmen t mode P...

Page 1125: ...55 M 0 1 step This code is valid for 45 50ppm only 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Drive Fine adjustment of exit motor rotational speed 4535 0 Transport speed Normal speed 128 0 255 M When the value increases the motor speed becomes faster 0 1 step 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Drive Fine adjustment of exit motor rotational speed PRT Long size 4535 3 Transport speed Normal speed 128 0 255 M When the...

Page 1126: ... 255 M When the value increases the motor speed becomes faster 0 1 step This code is valid for 45 50ppm only 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Drive Fine adjustment of exit motor rotational speed 4535 21 Speed at low temperature Transport in ADU 128 0 255 M When the value increases the motor speed becomes faster 0 1 step This code is valid for 45 50ppm only 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Image Leading ...

Page 1127: ...d the trailing edge of the paper by approx 0 1 mm 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Image Auxiliary adjustment value of leading edge position adjustment PFP upper drawer 4564 2 Thick paper 3 50 0 100 M When the value increases by 1 the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx 0 1 mm 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Image Auxiliary adjustment value of leading edge position adjustment P...

Page 1128: ...ses by 1 the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx 0 1 mm 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Image Auxiliary adjustment value of leading edge position adjustment ADU 4568 1 Thick paper 2 50 0 100 M When the value increases by 1 the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx 0 1 mm 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Image Auxiliary adjustment value of leading edge pos...

Page 1129: ... 0 0 2 SYS 0 Manual 1 Automatic mm 2 Automatic inch 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Setting method of drawer size 4800 2 3rd drawer 0 0 2 SYS 0 Manual 1 Automatic mm 2 Automatic inch 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Feeding system Pa per transport Setting method of drawer size 4800 3 4th drawer 0 0 2 SYS 0 Manual 1 Automatic mm 2 Automatic inch 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Prin...

Page 1130: ...stment 4823 0 Rear One place 0 25 25 M 0 2mm step This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Finisher Stapling position adjustment 4823 1 Rear One place R series size 0 17 25 M 0 2mm step This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Printer Finisher Stapling position adjustment 4823 2 Front One place 0 25 25 M 0 2mm step This code i...

Page 1131: ...ding system Pa per transport Paper aligning amount correction value speed at low temperature 1st drawer 4835 0 Long size 5 30 30 M Sets the correction value for speed at low temperature which is applied to the current adjustment value When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm This code is valid for 45 50ppm only Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle siz...

Page 1132: ... low temperature 1st drawer 4835 3 Short size 2 6 30 30 M Sets the correction value for speed at low temperature which is applied to the current adjustment value When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm This code is valid for 45 50ppm only Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 2...

Page 1133: ...low temperature 2nd drawer 4835 6 Middle size 6 30 30 M Sets the correction value for speed at low temperature which is applied to the current adjustment value When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm This code is valid for 45 50ppm only Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204...

Page 1134: ...ow temperature 2nd drawer 4835 9 Short size 3 10 30 30 M Sets the correction value for speed at low temperature which is applied to the current adjustment value When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm This code is valid for 45 50ppm only Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 20...

Page 1135: ... temperature PFP upper drawer 4835 12 Short size 1 7 30 30 M Sets the correction value for speed at low temperature which is applied to the current adjustment value When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm This code is valid for 45 50ppm only Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm t...

Page 1136: ...low temperature PFP lower drawer 4835 15 Long size 7 30 30 M Sets the correction value for speed at low temperature which is applied to the current adjustment value When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm This code is valid for 45 50ppm only Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm t...

Page 1137: ...w temperature PFP lower drawer 4835 18 Short size 2 7 30 30 M Sets the correction value for speed at low temperature which is applied to the current adjustment value When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm This code is valid for 45 50ppm only Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm ...

Page 1138: ...w temperature Bypass feeding 4835 21 Middle size 4 30 30 M Sets the correction value for speed at low temperature which is applied to the current adjustment value When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm This code is valid for 45 50ppm only Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to ...

Page 1139: ...ed at low temperature Bypass feeding 4835 24 Short size 3 4 30 30 M Sets the correction value for speed at low temperature which is applied to the current adjustment value When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm This code is valid for 45 50ppm only Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 1...

Page 1140: ...at low temperature ADU 4835 27 Short size 1 14 30 30 M Sets the correction value for speed at low temperature which is applied to the current adjustment value When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 8 mm This code is valid for 45 50ppm only Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 m...

Page 1141: ...ion value for speed at low temperature which is applied to the current adjustment value When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 54 mm This code is valid for 45 50ppm only Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3 159 mm or shorter 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfe...

Page 1142: ...sfer trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer trailing edge bias correction factor Front side in the color mode 5400 5 Special paper 1 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 ...

Page 1143: ...railing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer trailing edge bias correction factor Front side in the color mode 5400 11 Special paper 3 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 8...

Page 1144: ...r trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer trailing edge bias correction factor Back side in the color mode 5401 6 Special paper 2 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 ...

Page 1145: ...trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer trailing edge bias correction factor Front side in the black mode 5402 0 Plain paper 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 ...

Page 1146: ...ansfer trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer trailing edge bias correction factor Front side in the black mode 5402 6 Special paper 2 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 9...

Page 1147: ...er trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer trailing edge bias correction factor Back side in the black mode 5403 0 Plain paper 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 ...

Page 1148: ...sfer trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 0 85 4 0 80 5 0 75 6 0 70 7 0 65 8 0 60 9 0 55 10 0 50 11 0 45 12 0 40 13 0 35 14 0 30 15 0 25 16 0 20 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Process Transfer 2nd transfer trailing edge bias correction factor Back side in the black mode 5403 7 Recycled paper 0 0 16 M Corrects the 2nd transfer trailing edge bias Offsetting level 0 1 00 1 0 95 2 0 90 3 ...

Page 1149: ...ion increases by approx 0 1 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Backgroun d offset adjustment PPC SCN black 7025 ADF 128 0 255 SYS The larger the adjustment value the darker the background becomes The smaller the adjustment value the lighter the background becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Backgroun d offset adjustment PPC SCN color 7026 ADF 128 0 255 SYS The larger the adjustm...

Page 1150: ...round becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Density adjustment PPC black Manual adjustment Center value 7114 Text Photo 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image at the center value becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Density adjustment PPC black Manual adjustment Center value 7115 Text 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image at the center ...

Page 1151: ...e area surrounding the target area becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment PPC black Text 7191 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image of the area surrounding the target area becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment PPC black Text 7191 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker...

Page 1152: ...05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Range correction adjustment PPC black Black Manual density adjustment 7237 User custom 1 0 1 SYS 0 Background peak Fixed 1 Background peak Varied 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Sharpness adjustment PPC black 7249 User custom 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the sharper the image becomes The smaller the value the softer the image becomes and the less m...

Page 1153: ...er the value the lighter the printed image becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Upper limit value in toner saving mode PRT black 600dpi 7307 2 XPS 176 0 255 SYS The smaller the value the lighter the printed image becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment PRT black PS Smooth 1200dpi 7309 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the density...

Page 1154: ...lue increases the density in the target area becomes higher This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment PRT black PS Detail 600dpi 7316 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the density in the target area becomes higher This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamm...

Page 1155: ...128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the density in the target area becomes higher This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment PRT black XPS Smooth 600dpi 7319 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the density in the target area becomes higher This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t...

Page 1156: ...LED emission level adjustment PRT black 7330 2 Emission level 2 4 127 0 255 SYS The smaller the value the lower the emission level becomes and the smaller the dots are reproduced 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing LED emission level adjustment PRT black 7330 3 Emission level 3 4 191 0 255 SYS The smaller the value the lower the emission level becomes and the smaller the dots are reproduced...

Page 1157: ...s higher This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment Monochrome 600dpi Auto PS Graphics 7361 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the density in the target area becomes higher This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment Monochrome 600dpi A...

Page 1158: ... Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment Monochrome 600dpi Auto PCL Image 7365 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the density in the target area becomes higher 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment Monochrome 600dpi Auto PCL Image 7365 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the density in the target area becomes hi...

Page 1159: ...her This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment Monochrome 600dpi Auto XPS Image 7368 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the density in the target area becomes higher This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Sharpness adjustment SCN black 7430 Text Photo 128 0 ...

Page 1160: ...ustmen t mode Image Processing Density adjustment SCN black Automatic density adjustment 7456 Text Photo 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image at the center value becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Density adjustment SCN black Automatic density adjustment 7457 Text 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image at the center value becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustm...

Page 1161: ... the darker the image of the area surrounding the target area becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment SCN black Photo 7487 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image of the area surrounding the target area becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment SCN black Photo 7487 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The lar...

Page 1162: ... larger the value the darker the image becomes 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Density adjustment FAX black Automatic density adjustment 7543 Photo 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image becomes 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing LED emission level adjustment FAX black 7594 0 Emission level 0 4 0 0 255 SYS The smaller the value the lower the emission level becomes and t...

Page 1163: ...e value the larger the area recognized as colors other than black becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Black area adj in twin color copy mode PPC color Selected 2colors 7641 2 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the larger the area recognized as black in the original becomes The smaller the value the larger the area recognized as colors other than black becomes 4 Yes 05 Ad...

Page 1164: ...nt for the specified color during mono color copying twin color copying The larger the value the darker the density The smaller the value the lighter the density 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Copy color adjustment Mono color twin color Yellow 7645 0 Y 128 0 255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified color during mono color copying twin color copying The larger the value...

Page 1165: ...fied color during mono color copying twin color copying The larger the value the darker the density The smaller the value the lighter the density 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Copy color adjustment Mono color twin color Cyan 7647 1 M 128 0 255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified color during mono color copying twin color copying The larger the value the darker the de...

Page 1166: ...ms the density adjustment for the specified color during mono color copying twin color copying The larger the value the darker the density The smaller the value the lighter the density 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Copy color adjustment Mono color twin color Red 7649 3 K 128 0 255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified color during mono color copying twin color copying ...

Page 1167: ...nt for the specified color during mono color copying twin color copying The larger the value the darker the density The smaller the value the lighter the density 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Copy color adjustment Mono color twin color Blue 7652 0 Y 128 0 255 SYS Performs the density adjustment for the specified color during mono color copying twin color copying The larger the value t...

Page 1168: ...d becomes The smaller the value the lighter the background becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Backgroun d adjustment PPC color 7657 Text 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the background becomes The smaller the value the lighter the background becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Backgroun d adjustment PPC color 7658 Photo 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value...

Page 1169: ...he darker the red becomes The smaller the value the darker the blue becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of hue PPC color Text 7666 0 Red 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the yellow becomes The smaller the value the darker the magenta becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of hue PPC color Text 7666 1 Yellow 128 0 255 SYS The larger th...

Page 1170: ...r the cyan becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of hue PPC color Photo 7667 5 Magenta 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the red becomes The smaller the value the darker the blue becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of hue PPC color Photo developing paper 7668 0 Red 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the yellow becomes The s...

Page 1171: ...mes The smaller the value the darker the green becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of hue PPC color Map 7669 4 Blue 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the magenta becomes The smaller the value the darker the cyan becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of hue PPC color Map 7669 5 Magenta 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the ...

Page 1172: ...ler the value the darker the yellow becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of hue PPC color Red seal color 7671 3 Cyan 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the blue becomes The smaller the value the darker the green becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of hue PPC color Red seal color 7671 4 Blue 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darke...

Page 1173: ...turation and input the smaller value to decrease the saturation 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of saturation PPC color Text 7676 2 Green 128 0 255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation and input the smaller value to decrease the saturation 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of saturation PPC color Text 7676 3 Cyan 128 0 255 SYS Input the ...

Page 1174: ...crease the saturation 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of saturation PPC color Photo developing paper 7678 1 Yellow 128 0 255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation and input the smaller value to decrease the saturation 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of saturation PPC color Photo developing paper 7678 2 Green 128 0 255 SYS Input the larg...

Page 1175: ...value to decrease the saturation 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of saturation PPC color User custom 7680 0 Red 128 0 255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation and input the smaller value to decrease the saturation 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of saturation PPC color User custom 7680 1 Yellow 128 0 255 SYS Input the larger value to i...

Page 1176: ...rease the saturation 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of saturation PPC color Red seal color 7681 5 Magenta 128 0 255 SYS Input the larger value to increase the saturation and input the smaller value to decrease the saturation 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color reproducti on selection PPC color 7690 User custom 0 0 4 SYS 0 Text Photo printed photo text map 1 Photo d...

Page 1177: ...5 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Density adjustment PPC color Manual adjustment Center value 7719 Red seal color 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image becomes 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Density adjustment PPC color Automatic density adjustment 7720 Text Photo 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image at the center value becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mo...

Page 1178: ...tment Twin color Manual adjustment Center value 7735 Printed image 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Density adjustment Twin color Automatic density adjustment 7736 Text Photo 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image at the center value becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Density adjustment Twin ...

Page 1179: ...C color Mono color 7802 Text 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the sharper the image becomes The smaller the value the softer the image becomes and the less moire appears 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Sharpness adjustment PPC color Mono color 7803 Printed image 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the sharper the image becomes The smaller the value the softer the image becomes and the ...

Page 1180: ... Text oriented Text is blurred if the value is to small Noise increases in the photo area if the value is to large 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Text Photo reproducti on level adjustment PPC color 7841 User custom 0 0 9 SYS 1 to 4 Photo oriented 0 5 Default 6 to 9 Text oriented Text is blurred if the value is to small Noise increases in the photo area if the value is to large 1 Yes 05...

Page 1181: ...er SYS When color deviation is found in gradation reproduction the gradation reproduction of 4 colors can be corrected with the automatic gamma adjustment The result of the correction above will be applied for each media type 7 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Automatic gamma adjustment PPC color Color Black 7871 2 Recycled paper SYS When color deviation is found in gradation reproduction ...

Page 1182: ...mma adjustment The result of the correction above will be applied to all media types 7 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Automatic gamma adjustment PPC color Color Black 7871 8 Special paper2 SYS When color deviation is found in gradation reproduction the gradation reproduction of 4 colors can be corrected with the automatic gamma adjustment The result of the correction above will be applie...

Page 1183: ... mode Image Processing Maximum toner density adjustment PPC color 7900 Thin paper 255 0 255 SYS The smaller the value the less toner is adhered to the high density section of the image 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density adjustment PPC color 7901 Envelope 255 0 255 SYS The smaller the value the less toner is adhered to the high density section of the image 1 05 Adjustmen t...

Page 1184: ...r the value the less toner is adhered to the high density section of the image 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density adjustment PPC color 7910 Special paper2 255 0 255 SYS The smaller the value the less toner is adhered to the high density section of the image 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density adjustment PPC color 7911 OHP film 240 0 255 SYS The sm...

Page 1185: ...larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density threshold setting PPC color 7913 6 Thick paper 4 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smalle...

Page 1186: ...t of toner to be adhered becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density threshold setting PPC color 7913 12 OHP film 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Gamma balance adjustment PPC black Gray sc...

Page 1187: ...rker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color Y Printed image 7962 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mode and density area become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color Y Printed image 7962 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mode and density area ...

Page 1188: ... and density area become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color M Text Photo 7965 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mode and density area become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color M Text 7966 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mode and ...

Page 1189: ...255 SYS The target color mode and density area become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color M Map 7969 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mode and density area become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color M Map 7969 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS Th...

Page 1190: ... density area become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color C Photo developing paper 7973 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mode and density area become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color C Photo developing paper 7973 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SY...

Page 1191: ...ea become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color K Text 7976 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mode and density area become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color K Printed image 7977 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mode and density area...

Page 1192: ... density area become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color Y User custom 7980 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mode and density area become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color Y User custom 7980 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mo...

Page 1193: ...or mode and density area become darker as the value increases 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color Y Red seal color 7984 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mode and density area become darker as the value increases 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color Y Red seal color 7984 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The tar...

Page 1194: ...arget color mode and density area become darker as the value increases 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PPC color K Red seal color 7987 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS The target color mode and density area become darker as the value increases 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Automatic gamma adjustment PRT color 600dpi 8004 0 Plain paper SYS When color deviation i...

Page 1195: ...adation reproduction of 4 colors can be corrected with the automatic gamma adjustment The result of the correction above will be applied for each media type 7 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Automatic gamma adjustment PRT color 600dpi 8004 7 Special paper1 SYS When color deviation is found in gradation reproduction the gradation reproduction of 4 colors can be corrected with the automatic...

Page 1196: ...cted with the automatic gamma adjustment The result of the correction above will be applied for each media type This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 7 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Automatic gamma adjustment PRT color 1200dpi 8005 3 Thick paper1 SYS When color deviation is found in gradation reproduction the gradation reproduction of 4 colors can be corrected with the automati...

Page 1197: ...he gradation reproduction of 4 colors can be corrected with the automatic gamma adjustment The result of the correction above will be applied for each media type This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 7 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Automatic gamma adjustment PRT color 1200dpi 8005 9 Special paper3 SYS When color deviation is found in gradation reproduction the gradation reprodu...

Page 1198: ...mes The smaller the value the lighter the background becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Backgroun d adjustment PRT color Smooth Color 600dpi 8010 2 XPS 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the background becomes The smaller the value the lighter the background becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Backgroun d adju...

Page 1199: ...i 8013 0 PS 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the background becomes The smaller the value the lighter the background becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Backgroun d adjustment PRT color Detail Color 600dpi 8013 1 PCL 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the background becomes The smaller the value the lighter the b...

Page 1200: ...arger the value the darker the background becomes The smaller the value the lighter the background becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Backgroun d adjustment PRT color 8016 Smooth Color 1200 dpi 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the background becomes The smaller the value the lighter the background becomes This code is not ...

Page 1201: ... larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment 2 color printing PRT color C Y 8024 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment 2 color printing PRT color C M 8025 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the...

Page 1202: ...he larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment 2 color printing PRT color M M 8028 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment 2 color printing PRT color M M 8028 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS The large...

Page 1203: ...e larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment 2 color printing PRT color Y C 8032 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment 2 color printing PRT color Y C 8032 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The larger ...

Page 1204: ...rger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment 2 color printing PRT color Red C 8035 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment 2 color printing PRT color Green Y 8036 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The larger ...

Page 1205: ...The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment 2 color printing PRT color Blue Y 8039 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment 2 color printing PRT color Blue Y 8039 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS Th...

Page 1206: ...es 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color M XPS Smooth 600dpi 8043 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color M XPS Smooth 600dpi 8043 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the dark...

Page 1207: ...e is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color Y XPS Detail 600dpi 8046 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color M XPS Detail 600dpi 8047 0 Low density 128...

Page 1208: ...ode is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color Y PS Smooth 600dpi 8050 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color Y PS Smooth 600dpi 8050 2 High density ...

Page 1209: ...de is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color Y PS Detail 600dpi 8054 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color Y PS Detail 600dpi 8054 1 Medium density 12...

Page 1210: ...il 600dpi 8057 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color K PS Detail 600dpi 8057 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes...

Page 1211: ...The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color K PCL Smooth 600dpi 8061 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color K PCL Smooth 600dpi 8061 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS The larger...

Page 1212: ...the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color K PCL Detail 600dpi 8065 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target color becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color K PCL Detail 600dpi 8065 1 Medium density 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker only the target ...

Page 1213: ...rger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density threshold adj PRT color 600 dpi Detail 8070 5 Thick paper3 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the valu...

Page 1214: ...e larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density threshold adj PRT color 600 dpi Detail 8070 11 Envelope 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the val...

Page 1215: ...rger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density threshold adj PRT color 600 dpi Smooth 8071 5 Thick paper3 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the valu...

Page 1216: ... larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density threshold adj PRT color 600 dpi Smooth 8071 11 Envelope 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the max...

Page 1217: ...e larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density threshold adj PRT color 1200 dpi Detail 8089 5 Thick paper3 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the larger the maximum amount of ...

Page 1218: ...f toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density threshold adj PRT color 1200 dpi Detail 8089 11 Envelope 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the maximum amount of toner to be adhe...

Page 1219: ...e larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density threshold adj PRT color 1200 dpi Smooth 8090 5 Thick paper3 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the larger the maximum amount of ...

Page 1220: ...the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Maximum toner density threshold adj PRT color 1200 dpi Smooth 8090 11 Envelope 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the larger the maximum amount of toner to be adhered becomes The smaller the value the smaller the max...

Page 1221: ...r the image becomes 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Sharpness adjustment PRT color e BRIDGE PS General 8110 0 Text 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the sharper the image becomes The smaller the value the softer the image becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Sharpness adjustment PRT color e BRIDGE PS General 8110 1 Graphics 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the sharper the i...

Page 1222: ...e value of 05 7322 is 0 the adjustment is applied to text and if the value is 1 the adjustment is applied to text and others 0 No adjustment 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Sharpness adjustment PRT black e BRIDGE PS 8118 1 Graphics 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the sharper the image becomes The smaller the value the softer the image becomes If the value of 05 7322 is 0 the adjustme...

Page 1223: ...mode Image Processing Upper limit value in toner saving mode PRT color Two color 600 dpi 8160 1 PCL 176 0 255 SYS The smaller the value the lighter the printed image becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Upper limit value in toner saving mode PRT color Two color 600 dpi 8160 2 XPS 176 0 255 SYS The smaller the value the lighter the printed image becomes This code is not supported by L...

Page 1224: ... 1 Photo 1 1 255 SYS The larger the value the wider the range of colors to be replaced with black becomes The smaller the value the narrower the range becomes 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Pure Black Gray threshold adjustment PRT color PCL Graphic 8211 2 Presentation 1 1 255 SYS The larger the value the wider the range of colors to be replaced with black becomes The smaller the value ...

Page 1225: ...int General 8213 Text 8 1 255 SYS The larger the value the wider the range of colors to be replaced with black becomes The smaller the value the narrower the range becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Pure Black Gray threshold adjustment PRT color Twin color print General 8214 Graphics 1 1 255 SYS The larger the value the wider the range of colors to be replaced with black becomes Th...

Page 1226: ...icker by 1 dot when they are printed 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Forcibly disabled Ignores command in printing data 3 Forcibly enabled Ignores command in printing data 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Stroke adjustment PS PDF automatic stroke adjustment 600dpi 8239 1 Minimum stroke width when disabled 1 1 2 SYS This code is used to change the width of fine lines in PS and PDF printing Automatic s...

Page 1227: ...age Processing Stroke adjustment PS PDF automatic stroke adjustment 1200dpi 8239 3 Minimum stroke width when disabled 1 1 2 SYS This code is used to change the width of fine lines in PS and PDF printing Automatic stroke adjustment is the function that prevents the width from changing according to the position This code sets the minimum width of fine lines when the automatic stroke adjustment is di...

Page 1228: ...r CMYK lower limit value 1 0 255 SYS Specifies the effective density range of 05 8242 from 0 to 255 This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Line density adjustment PRT color 1200dpi 8243 3 Color CMYK upper limit value 255 0 255 SYS Specifies the effective density range of 05 8242 from 0 to 255 This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 05 Adjustm...

Page 1229: ...the range of colors to be replaced with black becomes The smaller the value the narrower the range becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Pure Black Gray threshold adjustment PRT color XPS Graphic 8250 0 General 1 1 255 SYS The larger the value the wider the range of colors to be replaced with black becomes The smaller the value the narrow...

Page 1230: ... the wider the range of colors to be replaced with black becomes The smaller the value the narrower the range becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Pure Black Gray threshold adjustment PRT color XPS Image 8251 3 Line art 8 1 255 SYS The larger the value the wider the range of colors to be replaced with black becomes The smaller the value ...

Page 1231: ...r the range of colors to be replaced with black becomes The smaller the value the narrower the range becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Pure Black Gray threshold adjustment PRT color PS Graphic 8253 1 Photo 1 1 255 SYS The larger the value the wider the range of colors to be replaced with black becomes The smaller the value the narrowe...

Page 1232: ...replaced with black becomes The smaller the value the narrower the range becomes This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Pure Black Gray threshold adjustment PRT color PS Image 8254 4 Advanced 1 1 255 SYS The larger the value the wider the range of colors to be replaced with black becomes The smaller the value the narrower the range becomes This co...

Page 1233: ... not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color PS Smooth 1200dpi K 8271 0 Low density 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the density in the target area becomes higher This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color PS Smooth 1200dpi K 8271 1 Medium dens...

Page 1234: ...ases the density in the target area becomes higher This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color balance adjustment PRT color PS Detail 1200dpi C 8274 2 High density 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the density in the target area becomes higher This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Color bal...

Page 1235: ...men t mode Image Processing Backgroun d adjustment SCN color 8310 Text 128 0 255 SYS The smaller the value the lighter the background becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Backgroun d adjustment SCN color 8311 Photo 128 0 255 SYS The smaller the value the lighter the background becomes 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Fine adjustment of black density SCN color 8314 Text Phot...

Page 1236: ... adjustment SCN color Full color 8335 Text 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the sharper the image becomes The smaller the value the softer the image becomes and the less moire appears 1 Yes 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Sharpness adjustment SCN color Full color 8336 Photo 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the sharper the image becomes The smaller the value the softer the image becomes an...

Page 1237: ...becomes and the less moire appears 1 05 Adjustmen t mode Image Processing Density adjustment SCN color Manual adjustment Center value 8380 User custom 128 0 255 SYS The larger the value the darker the image becomes 1 05 Adjustmen t mode System Maintenan ce 9043 Equipment number serial number display SYS If this code is performed 08 9601 is performed 7 digits out of 9 digits can be entered except f...

Page 1238: ...ain paper 2010 0 At normal temperatures black 12 0 22 M 0 90 ºC 1 95 ºC 2 100 ºC 3 105 ºC 4 110 ºC 5 115 ºC 6 120 ºC 7 125 ºC 8 130 ºC 9 135 ºC 10 140 ºC 11 145 ºC 12 150 ºC 13 155 ºC 14 160 ºC 15 165 ºC 16 170 ºC 17 175 18 180 19 185 20 190 21 195 22 200 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Fusing temperature during printing Center Plain paper 2010 1 At normal temperatures color 12 0 22 M 0 90 ºC 1 95...

Page 1239: ... Fusing temperature during printing Center Plain paper 2010 5 Low temperature decelerat ing color 11 0 22 M 0 90 ºC 1 95 ºC 2 100 ºC 3 105 ºC 4 110 ºC 5 115 ºC 6 120 ºC 7 125 ºC 8 130 ºC 9 135 ºC 10 140 ºC 11 145 ºC 12 150 ºC 13 155 ºC 14 160 ºC 15 165 ºC 16 170 ºC 17 175 18 180 19 185 20 190 21 195 22 200 This code is valid for 45 50ppm only 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Fusing temperature Cent...

Page 1240: ...ult value 25 30 35ppm 11 45 50ppm 10 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Pre running time for first printing Special paper 2020 0 Special paper 1 Normal 0 0 16 M 0 Invalid 1 0 sec 2 2 sec 3 3 sec 4 4 sec 5 5 sec 6 6 sec 7 7 sec 8 8 sec 9 10 sec 10 12 sec 11 14 sec 12 16 sec 13 18 sec 14 20 sec 15 25 sec 16 30 sec 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Pre running time for first printing Special paper 2020 1 ...

Page 1241: ...er 2021 2 At low temperature black 0 0 10 M 0 Disabled 1 1 sec 2 2 sec 3 3 sec 4 4 sec 5 5 sec 6 6 sec 7 7 sec 8 8 sec 9 9 sec 10 10 sec 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Pre running time for first printing Thin paper 2021 3 At low temperature color 0 0 10 M 0 Disabled 1 1 sec 2 2 sec 3 3 sec 4 4 sec 5 5 sec 6 6 sec 7 7 sec 8 8 sec 9 9 sec 10 10 sec 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Fusing temperature...

Page 1242: ...nter Thin paper 2048 2 Low temperature black Refer to contents 0 16 M 0 90 ºC 1 95 ºC 2 100 ºC 3 105 ºC 4 110 ºC 5 115 ºC 6 120 ºC 7 125 ºC 8 130 ºC 9 135 ºC 10 140 ºC 11 145 ºC 12 150 ºC 13 155 ºC 14 160 ºC 15 165 ºC 16 170 ºC Default value 25 30 35ppm 10 45 50ppm 11 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Fusing temperature during printing Center Thin paper 2048 3 Low temperature color Refer to contents...

Page 1243: ...050 0 Normal length paper 12 0 16 M 0 90 ºC 1 95 ºC 2 100 ºC 3 105 ºC 4 110 ºC 5 115 ºC 6 120 ºC 7 125 ºC 8 130 ºC 9 135 ºC 10 140 ºC 11 145 ºC 12 150 ºC 13 155 ºC 14 160 ºC 15 165 ºC 16 170 ºC 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Fusing temperature during printing Center Thick paper 2 2050 1 Extra long size paper Refer to contents 0 16 M 0 90 ºC 1 95 ºC 2 100 ºC 3 105 ºC 4 110 ºC 5 115 ºC 6 120 ºC 7 1...

Page 1244: ...8 8 sec 9 10 sec 10 12 sec 11 14 sec 12 16 sec 13 18 sec 14 20 sec 15 25 sec 16 30 sec 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Pre running time for first printing Thick paper 1 2054 1 Extra long size paper 0 0 16 M 0 Invalid 1 0 sec 2 2 sec 3 3 sec 4 4 sec 5 5 sec 6 6 sec 7 7 sec 8 8 sec 9 10 sec 10 12 sec 11 14 sec 12 16 sec 13 18 sec 14 20 sec 15 25 sec 16 30 sec 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Pre runn...

Page 1245: ... 1 45 50ppm 0 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Temperature setting to start process for abnormality Thick paper 1 Center side thermistors 2079 0 Black Refer to contents 0 12 M 0 120ºC 1 125ºC 2 130ºC 3 135ºC 4 140ºC 5 145ºC 6 150ºC 7 155ºC 8 160ºC 9 165ºC 10 170º C 11 175ºC 12 Disable Default value 25 30 35ppm 3 45 50ppm 2 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Temperature setting to start process for abn...

Page 1246: ...isable 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Applicable period of pre running time for first printing At low temperatures 2085 0 Plain paper black Refer to contents 0 11 M 0 Invalid always ON 1 0 min 2 0 5 min 3 1 min 4 2 min 5 3 min 6 5 min 7 7 min 8 10 min 9 15 min 10 30 min 11 60 min Default value 25 30 35ppm 8 45 50ppm 0 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Applicable period of pre running time for first...

Page 1247: ... 8 10 min 9 15 min 10 30 min 11 60 min 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Applicable period of pre running time for first printing At low temperatures 2085 11 Thick paper 4 8 0 11 M 0 Invalid always ON 1 0 min 2 0 5 min 3 1 min 4 2 min 5 3 min 6 5 min 7 7 min 8 10 min 9 15 min 10 30 min 11 60 min 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Applicable period of pre running time for first printing At low temperatu...

Page 1248: ...er to contents 0 12 M 0 120ºC 1 125ºC 2 130ºC 3 135ºC 4 140ºC 5 145ºC 6 150ºC 7 155ºC 8 160ºC 9 165ºC 10 170º C 11 175ºC 12 Disable Default value 25 30 35ppm 3 45 50ppm 4 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Temperature setting to start process for abnormality 2088 OHP film 3 0 12 M 0 120ºC 1 125ºC 2 130ºC 3 135ºC 4 140ºC 5 145ºC 6 150ºC 7 155ºC 8 160ºC 9 165ºC 10 170º C 11 175ºC 12 Disable 1 08 Settin...

Page 1249: ...40 sec 5 50 sec 6 60 sec 7 90 sec 8 120 sec 9 150 sec 10 180 sec 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Fusing temperature for envelop 2194 Center Refer to contents 0 16 M 0 90 1 95 2 100 3 105 4 110 5 115 6 120 7 125 8 130 9 135 10 140 11 145 12 150 13 155 14 160 15 165 16 170 Default value 25 30 35ppm 14 45 50ppm 12 1 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Lower limit value of control temperature Plain paper No...

Page 1250: ... 150 15 155 16 160 17 165 18 170 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Lower limit value of control temperature Thick paper 3 2210 14 0 18 M 0 80 1 85 2 90 3 95 4 100 5 105 6 110 7 115 8 120 9 125 10 130 11 135 12 140 13 145 14 150 15 155 16 160 17 165 18 170 1 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Temperature setting for starting abnormality handling 2233 Envelope Center side thermistor 6 0 12 M 0 120 1 125 2 ...

Page 1251: ...5 10 170 11 175 12 Disabled 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Temperature setting for starting abnormality handling Thin paper Center side thermistor 2247 2 Low temperature Black Refer to contents 0 12 M 0 120 1 125 2 130 3 135 4 140 5 145 6 150 7 155 8 160 9 165 10 170 11 175 12 Disabled Default value 25 30 35ppm 2 45 50ppm 3 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Temperature setting for starting abnormal...

Page 1252: ... white banding at right angles to feeding direction or color banding at right angles to feeding direction occurs 0 No control 1 10 sec 2 20 sec 3 30 sec 4 40 sec 5 50 sec 6 1 min 7 2 min 8 3 min 9 7 min 10 15 min 1 Yes 08 Setting mode Process General 2373 Enable Disable setting of new or old detection of developer and cleaner 1 0 1 M 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting mode Process Cleaner Control o...

Page 1253: ...the display timing of the cleaning of the main charger and LED head If the synchronization setting is enabled the main charger and LED head may become dirty because of the insufficient cleaning 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting Mode Process Image control Image quality Image quality closed loop control 2486 Contrast voltage 1 0 1 M Sets whether or not correcting the contrast voltage in image qualit...

Page 1254: ...om the previous control 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting mode Process Image control Image quality Image quality closed loop control automatic start up 2500 When recovered from Toner empty 1 0 1 M Sets whether or not performing closed loop control automatically when recovered from Toner empty 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting Mode Process Image control Image quality Auto start 2505 Relative humidi...

Page 1255: ...t V 4 08 Setting mode Process Image control Contrast voltage offset correction setting Normal speed 2513 3 K 5 0 10 M 0 100 1 80 2 60 3 40 4 20 5 0 6 20 7 40 8 60 9 80 10 100 Unit V 4 08 Setting mode Process Image control Contrast voltage offset correction setting Decelerating 2514 0 Y 5 0 10 M 0 100 1 80 2 60 3 40 4 20 5 0 6 20 7 40 8 60 9 80 10 100 Unit V 4 08 Setting mode Process Image control ...

Page 1256: ...nd Correctio n setting Normal speed 2548 2 C 6 0 12 M 0 30 1 25 2 20 3 15 4 10 5 5 6 0 7 5 8 10 9 15 10 20 11 25 12 30 4 08 Setting mode Process Image control Potential on white background Correctio n setting Normal speed 2548 3 K 6 0 12 M 0 30 1 25 2 20 3 15 4 10 5 5 6 0 7 5 8 10 9 15 10 20 11 25 12 30 4 08 Setting mode Process Image control Potential on white background Correctio n setting Reduc...

Page 1257: ...lity of the isolated points and thickness of fine lines in the image The larger the value the sharper the isolated points become and the sharper and thicker the fine lines become Be sure to perform image quality control after changing the value 4 08 Setting Mode Process LED Factor setting for LED sub line emission time Multiple values 2620 3 Normal speed K 15 8 36 M Use this code to change the rep...

Page 1258: ... larger the value the sharper the isolated points become and the sharper and thicker the fine lines become Be sure to perform image quality control after changing the value 4 08 Setting Mode Process LED Factor setting for LED sub line emission time Binary 2621 1 Normal speed M 15 8 36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the isolated points and thickness of fine lines in the image The ...

Page 1259: ...e value the sharper the isolated points become and the sharper and thicker the fine lines become Be sure to perform image quality control after changing the value 4 08 Setting Mode Process LED Factor setting for LED sub line emission time Binary 2621 7 Decelerating K 15 8 36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the isolated points and thickness of fine lines in the image The larger the...

Page 1260: ...he value the sharper the isolated points become and the sharper and thicker the fine lines become Be sure to perform image quality control after changing the value 4 08 Setting Mode Process LED Factor setting for LED sub line emission time 1200dpi 2622 5 Decelerating M 15 8 36 M Use this code to change the reproducibility of the isolated points and thickness of fine lines in the image The larger t...

Page 1261: ...ber of times 4 08 Setting Mode Process Image control Refreshing behavior after being left unattended 2679 0 Display of number of times of repeated execution Level 1 1 1 20 M Unit number of times 4 08 Setting Mode Process Image control Refreshing behavior after being left unattended 2679 1 Display of number of times of repeated execution Level 2 2 1 20 M Unit number of times 4 08 Setting Mode Proce...

Page 1262: ...ng 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode Scanner RADF 3021 Set for switchback mixed size copy 0 0 1 SYS This setting is whether the original length is detected or not by transporting without scanning in reverse when A4 R FOLIO paper or LT R LG paper is detected in a mixed size copying 0 Disabled AMS A series Judges as A4 R without transporting in reverse with no scanning LT series Judges whether it is LT R or LG ...

Page 1263: ...ZZZ AB Special setting A Debugging NIC 0 Not used 1 Used B Interface 0 USB connection 1 Serial connection KP 2003 only YY Authentication 00 No authentication using card 03 Mifare KP 2005 only 04 HID KP 2004 only 09 Magnetic card I F ZZZZ Sub code Specifies the usage type of card ID 0000 No authentication using card 0001 IDm Felica NFC Felica and or UID Mifare NFC Mifare 0002 Data Felica NFC Felica...

Page 1264: ...ed should be set 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System General Available profile display 3600 0 WH_IS34_00 icc SYS Displays PG Device Pure Gray TRC attribute for the current RGB Ink Sim profile and the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Available profile display 3600 1 WH_IS34_01 icc SYS Displays PG Device Pure Gray TRC attribute for the current RGB Ink Sim profile and the same sub code 14 08 ...

Page 1265: ...attribute for the current RGB Ink Sim profile and the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Available profile display 3600 15 WH_IS34_15 icc SYS Displays PG Device Pure Gray TRC attribute for the current RGB Ink Sim profile and the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Available profile display 3600 16 WH_IS34_16 icc SYS Displays PG Device Pure Gray TRC attribute for the curren...

Page 1266: ... attribute for the current RGB Ink Sim profile and the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Available profile display 3600 32 WH_IS34_32 icc SYS Displays PG Device Pure Gray TRC attribute for the current RGB Ink Sim profile and the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Available profile display 3600 33 WH_IS34_33 icc SYS Displays PG Device Pure Gray TRC attribute for the curre...

Page 1267: ...de System General Available profile display 3600 48 WH_IS34_48 icc SYS Displays PG Device Pure Gray TRC attribute for the current RGB Ink Sim profile and the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Available profile display 3600 49 WH_IS34_49 icc SYS Displays PG Device Pure Gray TRC attribute for the current RGB Ink Sim profile and the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Availa...

Page 1268: ...ays the default RGB Ink Sim profile and PG Device PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3604 4 WH_IS34_04 000 SYS Displays the default RGB Ink Sim profile and PG Device PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3...

Page 1269: ... PG Device PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3604 15 WH_IS34_15 000 SYS Displays the default RGB Ink Sim profile and PG Device PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3604 16 WH_IS34_16 000 SYS Displays the...

Page 1270: ... PG Device PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3604 26 WH_IS34_26 000 SYS Displays the default RGB Ink Sim profile and PG Device PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3604 27 WH_IS34_27 000 SYS Displays the...

Page 1271: ... PG Device PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3604 37 WH_IS34_37 000 SYS Displays the default RGB Ink Sim profile and PG Device PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3604 38 WH_IS34_38 000 SYS Displays the...

Page 1272: ... PG Device PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3604 48 WH_IS34_48 000 SYS Displays the default RGB Ink Sim profile and PG Device PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3604 49 WH_IS34_49 000 SYS Displays the...

Page 1273: ... mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3608 0 WH_IS34_00 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3608 1 WH_IS34_01 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in t...

Page 1274: ...E Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3608 11 WH_IS34_11 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3608 12 WH_IS34_12 001 SYS Displays the a...

Page 1275: ...CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3608 22 WH_IS34_22 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3608 23 WH_IS34_23 001 SYS Displays the...

Page 1276: ...CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3608 33 WH_IS34_33 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3608 34 WH_IS34_34 001 SYS Displays the...

Page 1277: ...CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3608 44 WH_IS34_44 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 3608 45 WH_IS34_45 001 SYS Displays the...

Page 1278: ... 48 Day 0 is for Sunday Proceeds Monday through Saturday from 1 to 6 11 Yes 08 Setting mode System General List print USB storage setting 3615 List print USB storage setting 0 0 1 SYS 0 Enable USB storage available 1 Disable USB storage not available 1 08 Setting mode System General Clearing of service history list file 3619 Clearing of service history list file SYS Initializes the service history...

Page 1279: ...etting mode System Network 3703 Logon User Name Password of Windows Domain Authentication NIC Maximum 128 letters 12 08 Setting mode System Network 3704 PDC2 of user authentication UTY Maximum 128 letters 12 08 Setting mode System Network 3705 BDC2 of user authentication UTY Maximum 128 letters 12 08 Setting mode System Network 3706 PDC3 of user authentication UTY Maximum 128 letters 12 08 Setting...

Page 1280: ...Windows Domain User Authentication 1 1 4 NIC Sets the Windows domain authentication method for device authentication Scan to SMB and user authentication When the setting of the domain authentication method is unknown it s strongly recommended to set the value of this code to 1 Auto 1 Auto 2 Kerberos 3 NTLMv2 4 NTLMv1 Note that the internal processing is different between user authentication and Wi...

Page 1281: ...S 3754 Switching printer setting 1 1 2 NIC DPWS printer function is switched 1 Enabled 2 Disabled 12 08 Setting mode System Network DPWS 3755 Switching scanner setting 1 1 2 NIC DPWS scanner function is switched 1 Enabled 2 Disabled 12 08 Setting mode System Network DPWS 3757 Discovery Port Number 3702 1 65535 NIC Port number used for DPWS Discovery 12 08 Setting mode System Network DPWS 3758 Meta...

Page 1282: ...3774 DHCPv6 Option setting 2 1 2 NIC DHCPv6 Option is switched when the Manual is set 1 Enabled 2 Disabled 12 08 Setting mode System Network 3777 Stateless Address setting 2 1 2 NIC IP Address is acquired by both Stateless and State full Address 1 Enabled2 Disabled 12 08 Setting mode System Network 3778 Acquiring DHCPv6 Option 2 1 2 NIC When Stateless Address is selected an option is acquired from...

Page 1283: ...aper size NAD 2 Others 6 0 13 SYS 0 ledger 1 legal 2 letter 3 computer 4 statement 5 A3 6 A4 7 A5 9 B4 10 B5 11 Folio 12 Legal13 13 LetterSquare 1 08 Setting mode System General USB media direct printing 3803 Enable disable setting 1 0 1 SYS Sets the USB media direct printing function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 1 08 Setting mode System Scanner 3805 Departme...

Page 1284: ...Network Internet Fax 3812 Dummy full mode at transmission 0 0 1 SYS When an Internet Fax is sent the resolution ratio and the paper size of an attached image are set to the full mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If 1 Enabled is set in 08 3810 set 1 Enabled in 08 3812 as well 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System Scanner XPS file 3815 Thumbnail addition 1 0 1 SYS Thumbnail is added to the XPS file produced by the S...

Page 1285: ...mis transmission prevention 0 0 1 SYS FAX mis transmission prevention function is switched 0 OFF Disabled 1 ON Enabled 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Option FAX 3848 Restriction on Address Book destination 0 0 1 SYS Sets whether the address in the address book is selectable or not for the FAX mis transmission prevention function 0 OFF Disabled 1 ON Enabled 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Option FAX 384...

Page 1286: ... 08 Setting mode System General Summer time Start 3856 Day of the week 0 0 6 SYS 0 Sun 1 Mon 2 Tue 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat 1 08 Setting mode System General Summer time Start 3857 Hours Refer to contents 0 23 SYS 0 to 23 Default value MJD NAD 2 Others 0 1 08 Setting mode System General Summer time Start 3858 Minutes 0 0 59 SYS 0 to 59 1 08 Setting mode System General Summer time End 3859 Month Refe...

Page 1287: ...08 Setting mode System Network 3865 Availability of telnet server 2 1 2 NIC 1 Enable2 Disable 12 08 Setting mode Printer Paper feeding Default setting of paper source PPC 4010 Default setting of paper source 0 0 5 SYS 0 A4 LT 1 LCF 2 1st drawer 3 2nd drawer 4 PFP upper drawer 5 PFP lower drawer 1 08 Setting Mode Printer Paper feeding Automatic change of paper source Auto 4011 PPC 1 1 2 SYS Sets wh...

Page 1288: ...he paper in the specified drawer runs out when coping 0 Does not change the paper source automatically 1 Changes the paper source automatically 4 Yes 08 Setting Mode Printer Paper feeding Automatic change of paper source When a drawer is specified 4016 1 Printing BOX printing 0 0 1 SYS Sets whether the automatic change of paper source is performed or not if the drawer is specified as the paper sou...

Page 1289: ...occurs from the PFP lower drawer 4 Yes 08 Setting Mode Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry number setting Bypass feed 4024 0 Plain paper recycled paper Thin paper 5 0 5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from the bypass tray 4 Yes 08 Setting Mode Printer Paper feeding Feeding retry number setting Bypass feed 4024 1 Other paper 5 0 5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from...

Page 1290: ...to select the size This code is reset every time a paper size is detected automatically 4 A4 52 B4 82 LG Default value NAD 82 JPD 52 Others 4 9 08 Setting mode Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4104 LCF Refer to contents 0 255 M Press the button on the LCD to select the size This code is reset every time a paper size is detected automatically 4 A4 64 LT Default value NAD 64 Others 4 9 08 Se...

Page 1291: ...etting 4114 ST R 216 140 182 432 140 297 M Value of feeding widthwise direction 10 08 Setting mode Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4115 COMPUTER R 356 257 182 432 140 297 M Value of feeding widthwise direction 10 08 Setting mode Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4116 FOLIO R 330 210 182 432 140 297 M Value of feeding widthwise direction 10 08 Setting mode Printer Paper feeding Pape...

Page 1292: ...35 R 235 105 148 432 105 297 M Value of feeding widthwise direction 10 08 Setting mode Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4205 LD wide 457 305 148 457 105 305 M Value of feeding widthwise direction 10 08 Setting mode Printer Paper feeding Paper size setting 4206 Post card 148 100 148 432 100 297 M Value of feeding widthwise direction Post card is supported only for JPN model 10 08 Setting mo...

Page 1293: ... 4 Performs the adjustment automatically at warming up 1 Yes 08 Setting mode Printer Finisher 4547 Manual stapling time out period 15 0 30 M 3 30sec In increments of 1sec 1 08 Setting mode Printer Finisher 4548 Finisher model switching setting value 1 0 1 M 0 1 MJ 1036 1107 1108 1 08 Setting Mode Printer Paper transport Color registration control Start up time set for color registration 4550 0 1st...

Page 1294: ...ec 5 Agitated for 18 sec 6 Agitated for 30 sec 4 08 Setting mode Printer Paper feeding Pausing of pushing paper 4553 1 2nd drawer 1 0 7 M 0 Disabled 1 Enabled recycled paper only 2 Enabled plain paper only 3 Enabled plain paper and recycled paper 4 Enabled thin paper only 5 Enabled recycled paper and thin paper 6 Enabled plain paper and thin paper 7 Enabled plain paper recycled paper and thin pape...

Page 1295: ... sec 3 Agitated for 8 sec 4 Agitated for 10 sec 5 Agitated for 20 sec 4 08 Setting mode Printer Developm ent Waste toner mixing paddles setting During warming up 4554 1 During warming up after used toner full status detection 2 0 5 M 0 Agitated for 3 sec 1 Agitated for 5 sec 2 Agitated for 8 sec 3 Agitated for 10 sec 4 Agitated for 15 sec 5 Agitated for 20 sec 4 08 Setting mode Printer Paper trans...

Page 1296: ...digits M Counts the number of color registration control for each starting mode Color registration operations other than those performed at the specified timing are counted as 2 1 Yes 08 Setting mode Printer General Destination 4608 Destination categorized code Refer to contents 0 9 M For EEPROM on LGC board 0 NAD 1 MJD 2 JPD 3 ASD 5 TWD 6 CND 8 AUD 9 ARD Default value MJD 1 NAD 0 JPD 2 ASD 3 AUD ...

Page 1297: ...r for job number of sheets 0 8 digits M Up to 100 times 4 08 Setting Mode Printer Counter 4615 8 Counter for job number of sheets 0 8 digits M Up to 250 times 4 08 Setting Mode Printer Counter 4615 9 Counter for job number of sheets 0 8 digits M Up to 500 times 4 08 Setting Mode Printer Counter 4615 10 Counter for job number of sheets 0 8 digits M Up to 1000 times 4 08 Setting Mode Printer Counter...

Page 1298: ...465 error 6 C446 C466 error 7 C447 error 8 C468 error 9 C449 error 10 to 17 Not used 18 C468 error 19 C449 error 20 C468 error 21 C449 error 22 C449 error 23 C449 error 24 C447 error 25 C449 error 26 C468 error 27 C449 error 28 C468 error 29 C449 error 30 Not used 31 C4D0 error 32 C448 error 33 C467 error 34 C467 error 35 to 37 Not used 38 C450 error 39 C450 error 40 Not used 41 C451 error 42 C451...

Page 1299: ...5 C465 error 6 C446 C466 error 7 C447 error 8 C468 error 9 C449 error 10 to 17 Not used 18 C468 error 19 C449 error 20 C468 error 21 C449 error 22 C449 error 23 C449 error 24 C447 error 25 C449 error 26 C468 error 27 C449 error 28 C468 error 29 C449 error 30 Not used 31 C4D0 error 32 C448 error 33 C467 error 34 C467 error 35 to 37 Not used 38 C450 error 39 C450 error 40 Not used 41 C451 error 42 C...

Page 1300: ...5 C465 error 6 C446 C466 error 7 C447 error 8 C468 error 9 C449 error 10 to 17 Not used 18 C468 error 19 C449 error 20 C468 error 21 C449 error 22 C449 error 23 C449 error 24 C447 error 25 C449 error 26 C468 error 27 C449 error 28 C468 error 29 C449 error 30 Not used 31 C4D0 error 32 C448 error 33 C467 error 34 C467 error 35 to 37 Not used 38 C450 error 39 C450 error 40 Not used 41 C451 error 42 C...

Page 1301: ...45 C465 error 6 C446 C466 error 7 C447 error 8 C468 error 9 C449 error 10 to 17 Not used 18 C468 error 19 C449 error 20 C468 error 21 C449 error 22 C449 error 23 C449 error 24 C447 error 25 C449 error 26 C468 error 27 C449 error 28 C468 error 29 C449 error 30 Not used 31 C4D0 error 32 C448 error 33 C467 error 34 C467 error 35 to 37 Not used 38 C450 error 39 C450 error 40 Not used 41 C451 error 42 ...

Page 1302: ...45 C465 error 6 C446 C466 error 7 C447 error 8 C468 error 9 C449 error 10 to 17 Not used 18 C468 error 19 C449 error 20 C468 error 21 C449 error 22 C449 error 23 C449 error 24 C447 error 25 C449 error 26 C468 error 27 C449 error 28 C468 error 29 C449 error 30 Not used 31 C4D0 error 32 C448 error 33 C467 error 34 C467 error 35 to 37 Not used 38 C450 error 39 C450 error 40 Not used 41 C451 error 42 ...

Page 1303: ...42 C451 error 43 to 47 Not used 48 C450 error 49 C450 error 50 C452 error 51 C452 error 52 to 255 Not used 14 08 Setting mode Printer Paper feeding 4621 Bypass paper size detection setting 0 0 1 M Detects whether the size of paper fed by bypass feeding is the same as the paper size set on the control panel If the sizes are not the same the warning message is displayed Paper jam does not occur When...

Page 1304: ... 10 2 08 Setting Mode Printer Maintenan ce 4661 Serial number display for engine M 1st digit Country of production fixed 2nd digit Model fixed 3rd digit Dominical year changes 4th digit Month changes 5th to 9th digit Serial number changes 11th to 13th digit 14th to 17th digit Model information changes UNDEFINED is displayed before input 1 08 Setting Mode Printer Paper feeding 4675 Paper ejection s...

Page 1305: ...ge 4689 1 M 0 0 255 M 0 Normal 1 Access abnormality 1 2 Access abnormality 2 3 Access abnormality 3 4 Access abnormality 4 5 Occurrence of C911 4 08 Setting Mode Printer IC chip Board information of toner cartridge 4689 2 C 0 0 255 M 0 Normal 1 Access abnormality 1 2 Access abnormality 2 3 Access abnormality 3 4 Access abnormality 4 5 Occurrence of C911 4 08 Setting Mode Printer IC chip Board info...

Page 1306: ...oner box 4700 Detection setting of nearly full status 3 0 6 M Sets the value for judging nearly full state after the waste toner amount detection sensor detects waste toner Select the appropriate value if the detection error occurs 0 0 Judged as nearly full state right after the detection of the sensor 1 23670 30ppm 22000 35ppm 17000 45ppm 14330 50ppm 25670 25ppm 2 29580 30ppm 27500 35ppm 21250 45...

Page 1307: ...r 4 08 Setting mode Printer General 4708 Switchover setting of transport control for custom size 297x431 8mm 0 0 1 M When feeding 305 x 457 mm sized paper by bypass feeding set the value of this code to 1 for JAM detection When the value is set to 1 the print speed decreases 0 Disabled Setting for 297 431 8 mm 1 Enabled Setting for 305 457 mm 1 08 Setting mode Printer Feeding system Paper transpor...

Page 1308: ...er LED 4719 Enable Disable setting of LED head distortion correction 1 0 2 M Set the value to 2 if the image of K color is uneven Set the value to 0 if the image of YMC is uneven 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Corrects YMCK respectively 2 Enabled Corrects YMC respectively 1 08 Setting mode Printer LED Serial number display of LED head Y 4720 0 Serial number 000000 999999 M Serial number 6 digits 14 08 Setti...

Page 1309: ...oner near empty status is displayed if the remaining amount of toner is equal to or less than the amount set in 08 5810 5811 percentage or number of sheets 1 Yes 08 Setting mode Process Developm ent Toner near empty Fine adjustment of threshold for displaying remaining toner and toner near empty 5156 0 Y 100 50 150 M Adjusts the threshold value for displaying remaining amount of toner and toner ne...

Page 1310: ...abled 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Pre running starting time at warm up 5204 3 Recovery from sleep mode low temperature 0 0 60 M Setting value x 1 sec 0 Disabled 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Pre running starting time at warm up 5204 4 Prewarming recovery normal temperature 0 0 60 M Setting value x 1 sec 0 Disabled 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Pre running starting time at warm up 5204 5 Pr...

Page 1311: ...2 0 26 M 0 70 1 75 2 80 3 85 4 90 5 95 6 100 7 105 8 110 9 115 10 120 11 125 12 130 13 135 14 140 15 145 16 150 17 155 18 160 19 165 20 170 21 175 22 180 23 185 24 190 25 195 26 200 4 08 Setting Mode Process Fuser Temperature to switch print speed Plain paper 5275 1 Color Heat roller 12 0 26 M 0 70 1 75 2 80 3 85 4 90 5 95 6 100 7 105 8 110 9 115 10 120 11 125 12 130 13 135 14 140 15 145 16 150 17...

Page 1312: ...ec 10 10 sec Default value 25 30 35ppm 3 45 50ppm 1 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Heater forcible ON time Thick paper 4 5279 1 Long sized paper 5 0 10 M Forcible ON time of upper limit electricity 0 Disabled 1 1 sec 2 2 sec 3 3 sec 4 4 sec 5 5 sec 6 6 sec 7 7 sec 8 8 sec 9 9 sec 10 10 sec Default value 25 30 35ppm 5 45 50ppm 3 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Pre running time for first printing T...

Page 1313: ...2 HR and PR of normal low temperature 7 Enabled Thick paper 2 HR and PR of normal temperature 8 Enabled Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 HR and PR of normal temperature 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Temperature drop control during printing 2 5284 1 Color 0 0 8 M 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 HR and PR of normal low temperature 2 Enabled Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 HR of normal low ...

Page 1314: ...13 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Fusing temperature during printing Recycled paper Center 5293 2 At low temperatures Black Refer to contents 0 22 M 0 90 1 95 2 100 3 105 4 110 5 115 6 120 7 125 8 130 9 135 10 140 11 145 12 150 13 155 14 160 15 165 16 170 17 175 18 180 19 185 20 190 21 195 22 200 Default value 25 30 35ppm 11 45 50ppm 15 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Fusing temperature during pr...

Page 1315: ...1 14 sec 12 16 sec 13 18 sec 14 20 sec 15 25 sec 16 30 sec 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Lower limit value of control temperature Recycled paper Normal temperature 5300 0 Black Heat roller Center 12 0 18 M 0 80 1 85 2 90 3 95 4 100 5 105 6 110 7 115 8 120 9 125 10 130 11 135 12 140 13 145 14 150 15 155 16 160 17 165 18 170 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Lower limit value of control temperature ...

Page 1316: ...0ppm 12 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Lower limit value of control temperature Recycled paper Low temperature 5301 4 Thin paper Black Heat roller Center Refer to contents 0 18 M 0 80 1 85 2 90 3 95 4 100 5 105 6 110 7 115 8 120 9 125 10 130 11 135 12 140 13 145 14 150 15 155 16 160 17 165 18 170 Default value 25 30 35ppm 11 45 50ppm 12 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Lower limit value of control...

Page 1317: ...c 10 12 sec 11 14 sec 12 16 sec 13 18 sec 14 20 sec 15 25 sec 16 30 sec 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Pre running time for first printing Recycled paper At normal temperatures 5309 1 Color 0 0 16 M 0 Invalid 1 0 sec 2 2 sec 3 3 sec 4 4 sec 5 5 sec 6 6 sec 7 7 sec 8 8 sec 9 10 sec 10 12 sec 11 14 sec 12 16 sec 13 18 sec 14 20 sec 15 25 sec 16 30 sec 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Applicable peri...

Page 1318: ...n 2 0 5 min 3 1 min 4 2 min 5 3 min 6 5 min 7 7 min 8 10 min 9 15 min 10 30 min 11 60 min 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser 5315 Enable disable setting of elevation correction for wide paper 0 0 1 M 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting mode Process Fuser 5316 Decreasing cpm for small size paper 0 0 1 M 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Temperature setting for starting abnormality han...

Page 1319: ...0 120 11 125 12 130 13 135 14 140 15 145 16 150 17 155 18 160 19 165 20 170 21 175 22 180 23 185 24 190 25 195 26 200 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Temperature to switch print speed Thick paper 5413 1 Heat roller Thick paper 4 15 0 26 M 0 70 1 75 2 80 3 85 4 90 5 95 6 100 7 105 8 110 9 115 10 120 11 125 12 130 13 135 14 140 15 145 16 150 17 155 18 160 19 165 20 170 21 175 22 180 23 185 24 190 25...

Page 1320: ...ter start up 2 Enabled 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Effective time of contacting rotation 5446 0 Normal temperature Refer to contents 0 19 M Effective time of contacting rotation in ready 0 0 sec 1 3sec 2 5sec 3 10sec 4 15sec 5 30sec 6 45sec 7 60sec 8 90sec 9 120sec 10 3min 11 5min 12 10min 13 15min 14 30min 15 45min 16 60min 17 90min 18 120min 19 Continuance Default value 25 30 35ppm 2 45 50pp...

Page 1321: ... sec 4 25 sec 5 30 sec 6 35 sec 7 40 sec 8 45 sec 9 50 sec 10 55 sec 11 60 sec 12 70 sec 13 80 sec 14 90 sec 15 100 sec Default value 25 30 35ppm 9 45 50ppm 5 1 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Control between paper at paper feeding Normal temperature 5457 0 Small sized paper Refer to contents 0 1 M 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default value 25 30 35ppm 0 45 50ppm 1 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Control be...

Page 1322: ...4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser Contacting setting of pressure roller at printing 5464 9 Thin paper 0 0 1 M 0 Contacting 1 Semi contacting 4 08 Setting mode Process Fuser 5469 Enable Disable setting of energy saving mode Refer to contents 0 1 M 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default value 25 30 35ppm 1 45 50ppm 0 1 08 Setting mode Process Fuser 5473 Detection time setting of environmental temperature 8 0 10...

Page 1323: ...his code to change the color print speed for A4 LT B5 size at low temperature or when defective fusing occurs When the value is set to 0 or 1 defective fusing may occur for thick paper 0 Disabled 1 Intermittent mode color 2 Intermittent speed change mode color 3 Speed change mode 1 color 4 Speed change mode 2 color 5 Speed change mode black color This code is valid for 45 50ppm only 4 08 Setting m...

Page 1324: ...tting Mode Counter Maintenan ce PM drive counter C 5553 Setting value 225000 8 digits M Sets the threshold for displaying a message for PM timing 0 Not displayed Unit count 1 08 Setting mode Counter Maintenan ce PM counter Developer material 5554 Setting value K Refer to contents 8 digits M Default 30ppm 60000 35ppm 70000 45ppm 75600 50ppm 84000 25ppm 50000 Unit page 1 08 Setting mode Counter Main...

Page 1325: ...nan ce PM drive counter Developer material 5559 Setting value M Refer to contents 8 digits M Time accumulating counter Default value 25 30 35ppm 160000 45 50ppm 180000 1 08 Setting mode Counter Maintenan ce PM counter Developer material 5560 Setting value C Refer to contents 8 digits M Default 30ppm 60000 35ppm 70000 45ppm 75600 50ppm 84000 25ppm 50000 Unit page 1 08 Setting mode Counter Maintenan...

Page 1326: ... 08 6254 3 Unit 25 30 35ppm 1 count 1 5 seconds Normal 1 count 3 seconds Decelerating mode 45 50ppm 1 count 1 second Normal 1 count 3 seconds Decelerating mode 1 08 Setting Mode Counter Maintenan ce PM counter C 5566 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON 0 clear Unit page same as 08 6256 0 1 08 Setting Mode Counter Maintenan ce PM drive counter C 5567 Current valu...

Page 1327: ... clear Unit page 1 08 Setting mode Counter Maintenan ce PM drive counter Developer material 5571 Current value Y 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time 0 clear Unit 25 30 35ppm 1 count 1 5 seconds Normal 1 count 3 seconds Decelerating mode 45 50ppm 1 count 1 second Normal 1 count 3 seconds Decelerating mode 1 08 Setting mode Counter Maintenan ce PM counter Developer material 5572 Current value ...

Page 1328: ...page 1 08 Setting mode Counter Maintenan ce PM drive counter Parts 5577 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time 0 clear Unit 25 30 35ppm 1 count 1 5 seconds Normal 1 count 3 seconds Decelerating mode 45 50ppm 1 count 1 second Normal 1 count 3 seconds Decelerating mode 1 08 Setting mode Counter Maintenan ce PM counter Switching of output pages driving counts 5578 Y 1 0 2 M Selects t...

Page 1329: ...er of output pages is set at 08 6190 1 PM time counter The timing is set at 08 6191 2 Whichever comes faster 1 08 Setting mode Counter Maintenan ce PM counter Switching of output pages driving counts 5583 Developer material M 1 0 2 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing The message is displayed on the LCD screen 0 PM counter The number of output pages is set at 08 6190 1 PM time counter T...

Page 1330: ...ement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum gap spacer K 5618 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum gap spacer K 5618 7 Present driving counts for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum gap spacer K 5618 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum gap spacer K 5619 Dat...

Page 1331: ...2 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum gap spacer M 5622 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement Refer to contents 8 digits M Default value 30ppm 240000 35ppm 280000 45ppm 302400 50ppm 336000 25ppm 200000 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum gap spacer M 5622 2 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Sett...

Page 1332: ...4 5 Driving counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum gap spacer C 5624 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum gap spacer C 5624 7 Present driving counts for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum gap spacer C 5624 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter ...

Page 1333: ...r of sheets for displaying the toner near empty status The accuracy of value is influenced by usage environment or originals 4 08 Setting mode Process Developm ent Toner near empty Toner near empty status threshold value setting number of sheets 5811 1 Y 1000 1 9999 M This code is used when the value of 08 5155 is set to 5 Use this code to specify the threshold value unit number of sheets for disp...

Page 1334: ... A3 LD 1 A3 LD B4 LG FOLIO COMP 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Double count For PM Paper type 6014 Thick paper 1 0 1 M 0 Counted as 1 1 Counted as 2 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Double count For PM Paper type 6015 OHP 1 0 1 M 0 Counted as 1 1 Counted as 2 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Double count For PM Paper type 6016 Envelope 1 0 1 M 0 Counted as 1 1 Counted as 2 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter D...

Page 1335: ...to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 6011 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper 14 08 Setting mode Counter Printer Full color 6061 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages at the Full Color Mode in the Printer Function according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper def...

Page 1336: ...ction according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 6011 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper 14 08 Setting mode Counter Copy Print Black 6063 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized p...

Page 1337: ...tion according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 6011 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper 14 08 Setting mode Counter List print Black 6065 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages at the List Print Mode Function according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defin...

Page 1338: ...rge small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 6011 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper 14 08 Setting mode Counter Copy Scanning Full color 6067 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of scanning pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at...

Page 1339: ...according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 6011 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper 14 08 Setting mode Counter Copy Scanning Twin Color Monocolor 6069 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of scanning pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size large small Large Number of output pag...

Page 1340: ...ion according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 6011 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper 14 08 Setting mode Counter FAX Scanning Black 6071 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of scanning pages in the FAX Function according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 ...

Page 1341: ...rding to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 6011 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper 14 08 Setting mode Counter FAX Transmission Black 6073 1 Small 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 6...

Page 1342: ...he existing Large Small counter the count before changing this setting is also included in the count 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Custom counter Jo b Quota For administrator Weighting Scanning 6081 0 Black 0 0 9999 SYS Weights subtraction of scanning from department user Job Quota and addition of Scan Counter to Custom Counter 0 weight 0 00 9999 weight 99 99 4 Yes 08 Setting ...

Page 1343: ...SYS Sets the weight of fee charging count for printing per page Scan counter and fax counter are not influenced 0 Single 1 Double Default value JPD CND 0 Others 1 4 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Double count For charging Paper type 6083 4 Envelope Back Refer to contents 0 1 SYS Sets the weight of fee charging count for printing per page Scan counter and fax counter are not influenced 0 Single 1 Doub...

Page 1344: ...rinting to Custom Counter 0 weight 0 00 9999 weight 99 99 4 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Custom counter Jo b Quota For administrator Weighting Print 6085 2 Full color Small 100 0 9999 SYS Weights subtraction of printing from department user Job Quota and addition of printing to Custom Counter 0 weight 0 00 9999 weight 99 99 4 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Custom counter Jo b Quota For administrator W...

Page 1345: ...8 9128 08 9892 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Custom counter For dealer Weighting Scanning 6088 0 Black 0 0 9999 SYS Weights addition of Scan Counter to Custom Counter Total Counter Since the count is calculated based on the existing Large Small counter the count before changing this setting is also included in the count 0 weight 0 00 9999 weight 99 99 4 08 Setting Mode Counter Custom counter For d...

Page 1346: ...s setting is also included in the count 0 weight 0 00 9999 weight 99 99 4 08 Setting Mode Counter Custom counter For dealer Weighting Print 6089 4 Twin Color Monocolor Smal l 100 0 9999 SYS Weights addition of print to Custom Counter Total Counter Since the count is calculated based on the existing Large Small counter the count before changing this setting is also included in the count 0 weight 0 ...

Page 1347: ...13 LCF 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from LCF 2 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Counter of Paper feed 6114 PFP upper drawer 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP upper drawer 2 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Counter of Paper feed 6115 PFP lower drawer 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP lower drawer 2 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Counter of Paper feed 6116 ...

Page 1348: ...ting Mode Counter Maintenan ce PM counter K 6194 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON 0 clear Unit page same as 08 6250 0 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode Counter Maintenan ce PM drive counter K 6195 Current value 0 8 digits M Counts the drum driving time 0 clear Unit 1 count 2 seconds Decelerating Accelerating mode 1 count 4 seconds Same as 08 6250 3 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode ...

Page 1349: ...Process Number of output pages 6227 Thick paper 3 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in the thick paper 3 mode 1 08 Setting mode Counter Process Number of output pages 6228 OHP film 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in the OHP film mode 1 08 Setting mode Counter Main charger 6229 Main charger needle electrode cleaning counter 0 8 digits M Does not cou...

Page 1350: ...aper feeding When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed the toner image on the transfer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannot be reached for the 2nd transfer process After that the toner image formation is retried while the paper is waited In this case the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on the transfe...

Page 1351: ...aper feeding When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed the toner image on the transfer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannot be reached for the 2nd transfer process After that the toner image formation is retried while the paper is waited In this case the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on the transfe...

Page 1352: ...a paper feeding When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed the toner image on the transfer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannot be reached for the 2nd transfer process After that the toner image formation is retried while the paper is waited In this case the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on the tran...

Page 1353: ...a paper feeding When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed the toner image on the transfer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannot be reached for the 2nd transfer process After that the toner image formation is retried while the paper is waited In this case the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on the tran...

Page 1354: ...paper feeding When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed the toner image on the transfer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannot be reached for the 2nd transfer process After that the toner image formation is retried while the paper is waited In this case the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on the transf...

Page 1355: ...refore note that the excessive toner will be consumed consequently when the upper limit value of feeding retry counter is set larger or set as 0 no limit The toner is also consumed wastefully when the paper misfeeding occurs Replace the roller at earlier timing if the paper misfeedings have occurred frequently 1 08 Setting mode Counter Paper feeding 6243 Special paper 0 8 digits M Counts up when t...

Page 1356: ...pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum K 6250 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum K 6250 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced 225000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum K 6250 5 Driving counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Set...

Page 1357: ...8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum Y 6252 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum Y 6252 7 Present driving counts for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum Y 6252 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Photoconductive dru...

Page 1358: ... 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum C 6256 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement Refer to contents 8 digits M Default value 30ppm 60000 35ppm 70000 45ppm 75600 50ppm 84000 25ppm 50000 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum C 6256 2 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 ...

Page 1359: ...ing mode Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade K 6258 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced 225000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade K 6258 5 Driving counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade K 6258 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum cleaning bl...

Page 1360: ...g blade Y 6260 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade Y 6261 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade M 6262 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade M 6262 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement Refer to con...

Page 1361: ...de Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade C 6264 2 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade C 6264 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade C 6264 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced 225000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade C 62...

Page 1362: ...placement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger grid K 6274 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger grid K 6274 7 Present driving counts for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger grid K 6274 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger grid K 6275 Date of pre...

Page 1363: ...6278 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger grid M 6278 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement Refer to contents 8 digits M Default value 30ppm 60000 35ppm 70000 45ppm 75600 50ppm 84000 25ppm 50000 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger grid M 6278 2 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode...

Page 1364: ...etting mode Counter PM counter Charger grid C 6280 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced 225000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger grid C 6280 5 Driving counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger grid C 6280 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger grid C 6280 7 Present rota...

Page 1365: ... needle K 6282 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger Wire needle K 6283 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger Wire needle Y 6284 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger Wire needle Y 6284 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement Refer to con...

Page 1366: ...Counter PM counter Charger Wire needle M 6286 2 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger Wire needle M 6286 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger Wire needle M 6286 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced 225000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger Wire needle M 6286 ...

Page 1367: ... digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger Wire needle C 6288 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger Wire needle C 6288 7 Present rotation counts for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger Wire needle C 6288 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger Wire needle C ...

Page 1368: ... 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger cleaning pad Y 6292 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement Refer to contents 8 digits M Default value 30ppm 60000 35ppm 70000 45ppm 75600 50ppm 84000 25ppm 50000 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger cleaning pad Y 6292 2 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 ...

Page 1369: ...g mode Counter PM counter Charger cleaning pad M 6294 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced 225000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger cleaning pad M 6294 5 Driving counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger cleaning pad M 6294 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger cleanin...

Page 1370: ...Counter PM counter Charger cleaning pad C 6296 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Charger cleaning pad C 6297 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 1 Recommended number of output pages for replaceme...

Page 1371: ...6300 2 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Developer material K 6300 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Developer material K 6300 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced Refer to contents 8 digits M Default value 25 30 35ppm 160000 45 50ppm 180000 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Developer ...

Page 1372: ...ter PM counter Developer material Y 6302 5 Driving counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Developer material Y 6302 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Developer material Y 6302 7 Present driving counts for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Developer material Y 6302 8 Number of times ...

Page 1373: ...tting mode Counter PM counter Developer material M 6305 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Developer material C 6306 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Developer material C 6306 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement Refer to contents 8 digits M Default value 30ppm 60000 35ppm 70000 45ppm 7560...

Page 1374: ... Counter PM counter 1st transfer K roller 6314 2 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter 1st transfer K roller 6314 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter 1st transfer K roller 6314 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced 2E 06 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter 1st transfer K roller 6314 ...

Page 1375: ... 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y roller 6316 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y roller 6316 7 Present driving counts for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y roller 6316 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter 1st transfer Y roller...

Page 1376: ... Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter 1st transfer C roller 6320 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement Refer to contents 8 digits M Default value 30ppm 540000 35ppm 630000 45ppm 680400 50ppm 756000 25ppm 450000 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter 1st transfer C roller 6320 2 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08...

Page 1377: ...ting mode Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced 2E 06 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 5 Driving counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Transfer belt 6328 7 Present driving cou...

Page 1378: ...unter Transfer belt cleaning blade 6332 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Transfer belt cleaning blade 6333 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6340 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter 2nd transfer roller 6340 1 Recommended number of output pages ...

Page 1379: ...m 200000 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 2 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced Refer to contents 8 digits M Default value 30ppm 770000 35ppm 900000 45pp...

Page 1380: ... 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pressure roller separation finger 6370 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced Refer to contents 8 digits M Default value 30ppm 770000 35ppm 900000 45ppm 650000 50ppm 720000 25ppm 640000 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pressure roller separation finger 6370 5 Driving counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pressu...

Page 1381: ...000 45ppm 650000 50ppm 720000 25ppm 640000 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Fuser belt 6372 5 Driving counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Fuser belt 6372 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Fuser belt 6372 7 Present driving counts for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Fuser bel...

Page 1382: ...d roller RADF 6385 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits SYS 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Separation roller RADF 6386 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits SYS 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Separation roller RADF 6386 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement 120000 8 digits SYS 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Separation roller RADF 6386 2 Number of output pa...

Page 1383: ...tting mode Counter PM counter Pickup roller 2nd drawer 6393 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pickup roller LCF 6394 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pickup roller LCF 6394 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement 160000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pickup roller LCF 6394 2...

Page 1384: ...g mode Counter PM counter Feed roller 2nd drawer 6401 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Feed roller LCF 6402 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Feed roller LCF 6402 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement 160000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Feed roller LCF 6402 2 Number of o...

Page 1385: ... counter Separation roller 2nd drawer 6409 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Separation roller LCF 6410 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Separation roller LCF 6410 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement 160000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Separation roller LCF 6410 2 Numb...

Page 1386: ...mode Counter PM counter Separation roller PFP lower drawer 6415 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Separation pad Bypass unit 6416 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Separation pad Bypass unit 6416 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement 160000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Se...

Page 1387: ...er PM counter Feed roller PFP lower drawer 6423 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Feed roller Bypass unit 6424 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Feed roller Bypass unit 6424 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement 80000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Feed roller Bypass unit 6...

Page 1388: ... Pickup roller PFP lower drawer 6430 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pickup roller PFP lower drawer 6431 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pickup roller Bypass unit 6432 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Pickup roller Bypass unit 6432 1 Recommended number of ou...

Page 1389: ...pages 1 Pixel counter 1 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Setting Threshold setting for toner empty determination 6507 Output pages 500 0 999 SYS Sets the number of output pages to determine toner empty This setting is valid when 0 is set at 08 6506 1 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Setting Threshold setting for toner empty determination 6508 Pixel counter 21500 0 60000 SYS Sets the number of output pag...

Page 1390: ...ference PPC 6558 Black 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function black mode and service technician reference Unit page 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Number of output pages Service technician reference PRT 6559 Full color 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function fu...

Page 1391: ...e number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function black mode and toner cartridge reference Unit page 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Number of output pages Toner cartridge reference PPC 6567 Full color Y 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function full color mode toner Y and toner cartridge reference Uni...

Page 1392: ...K replacement 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Average pixel count Service technician reference PPC 6587 Full color Y M C K 0 0 10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy function full color mode all toner and service technician reference Unit 0 01 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Average pixel count Service technician reference PPC 6588 Full color Y 0 0 10000 SYS Display...

Page 1393: ...l toner and service technician reference Unit 0 01 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Average pixel count Service technician reference PPC PRT 6598 Full color Y 0 0 10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy printer function full color mode toner Y and service technician reference Unit 0 01 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Average pixel count Service technician reference PP...

Page 1394: ...nician reference Unit 0 01 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel count Service technician reference PPC 6609 Full color C 0 0 10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function full color mode toner C and service technician reference Unit 0 01 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel count Service technician reference PPC 6610 Full color K 0 0 10000 SYS Displ...

Page 1395: ...tridge reference Unit 0 01 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Average pixel count Toner cartridge reference PPC 6620 Full color M 0 0 10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy function full color mode toner M and toner cartridge reference Unit 0 01 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Average pixel count Toner cartridge reference PPC 6621 Full color C 0 0 10000 SYS Displays th...

Page 1396: ...cartridge reference Unit 0 01 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Average pixel count Toner cartridge reference PPC PRT 6631 Full color Y 0 0 10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy printer function full color mode toner Y and toner cartridge reference Unit 0 01 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Average pixel count Toner cartridge reference PPC PRT 6632 Full color M 0 0 10...

Page 1397: ...t in the printer function full color mode toner M and toner cartridge reference Unit 0 01 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel count Toner cartridge reference PRT 6642 Full color C 0 0 10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the printer function full color mode toner C and toner cartridge reference Unit 0 01 2 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel count Toner cart...

Page 1398: ...ges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the copy function full color mode and toner Y are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution full color Y PPC color 6713 6 30 1 40 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the ...

Page 1399: ...s The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the copy function full color mode and toner M are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution full color M PPC color 6714 4 20 1 25 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the di...

Page 1400: ...es The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the copy function full color mode and toner C are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution full color C PPC color 6715 2 10 1 15 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the d...

Page 1401: ... ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the copy function full color mode and toner C are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution full color K PPC color 6716 0 0 5 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the ...

Page 1402: ...ges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the copy function full color mode and toner K are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution full color K PPC color 6716 8 60 1 80 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the ...

Page 1403: ... The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the printer function full color mode and toner Y are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution full color Y PRT color 6717 6 30 1 40 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the ...

Page 1404: ...he number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the printer function full color mode and toner M are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution full color M PRT color 6718 4 20 1 25 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the di...

Page 1405: ...The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the printer function full color mode and toner C are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution full color C PRT color 6719 2 10 1 15 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the d...

Page 1406: ...nges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the printer function full color mode and toner C are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution full color K PRT color 6720 0 0 5 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the ...

Page 1407: ...are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the printer function full color mode and toner K are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution full color K PRT color 6720 8 60 1 80 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is d...

Page 1408: ...ed into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the copy function and black mode are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution black PPC black 6721 5 25 1 30 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distri...

Page 1409: ... 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the printer function and black mode are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution black PRT black 6722 1 5 1 10 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributio...

Page 1410: ...nto 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the printer function and black mode are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution black PRT black 6722 7 40 1 60 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distrib...

Page 1411: ... into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the FAX function and black mode are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Pixel count distribution black FAX black 6723 3 15 1 20 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distribut...

Page 1412: ...t distribution black FAX black 6723 9 80 1 100 0 8 digits SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distributions in the FAX function and black mode are displayed Unit page 14 08 Setting mode Pixel counter Counter Latest pixel count Toner cartridge reference PPC 6724 Black 0 0 10000 SYS Displays the latest pixel count...

Page 1413: ...Counter Total counter Decelerating mode Photoconductive drum K 6905 3 Drive counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M Drive counts at the last replacement Displays the total driving time in the decelerating mode mode for thick paper special paper and etc at the last replacement 0 is displayed if no replacement was performed 1 count 3 seconds 4 08 Setting mode Counter Total counter Decelerating m...

Page 1414: ...Setting mode Counter Total counter Decelerating mode Photoconductive drum M 6907 2 Present drive counts 0 8 digits M Present drive counts Displays the accumulated driving time in the decelerating mode mode for thick paper special paper and etc at present Only 0 is acceptable When 0 is entered the counter is reset 1 count 3 seconds 4 08 Setting mode Counter Total counter Decelerating mode Photocond...

Page 1415: ...nter Total counter Decelerating mode Developer material K 6925 1 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M Number of output pages at the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the decelerating mode mode for thick paper special paper and etc at the last replacement 0 is displayed if no replacement was performed 4 08 Setting mode Counter Total counter Deceler...

Page 1416: ...ounter Total counter Decelerating mode Developer material M 6927 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M Present number of output pages Displays the accumulated number of sheets that have been printed in the decelerating mode mode for thick paper special paper and etc at present Only 0 is acceptable When 0 is entered the counter is reset 4 08 Setting mode Counter Total counter Decelerating m...

Page 1417: ...r Decelerating mode Developer material C 6928 3 Drive counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M Drive counts at the last replacement Displays the total driving time in the decelerating mode mode for thick paper special paper and etc at the last replacement 0 is displayed if no replacement was performed 1 count 3 seconds 4 08 Setting mode Counter Total counter Decelerating mode 1st transfer power...

Page 1418: ...g mode Counter Total counter Decelerating mode 1st transfer power supply roller Y 6930 2 Present drive counts 0 8 digits M Present drive counts Displays the accumulated driving time in the decelerating mode mode for thick paper special paper and etc at present Only 0 is acceptable When 0 is entered the counter is reset 1 count 3 seconds 4 08 Setting mode Counter Total counter Decelerating mode 1st...

Page 1419: ...unter Total counter Decelerating mode 1st transfer power supply roller C 6932 1 Number of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M Number of output pages at the last replacement Displays the total number of output pages in the decelerating mode mode for thick paper special paper and etc at the last replacement 0 is displayed if no replacement was performed 4 08 Setting mode Counter Total ...

Page 1420: ...r 6935 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M Present number of output pages Displays the accumulated number of sheets that have been printed in the decelerating mode mode for thick paper special paper and etc at present Only 0 is acceptable When 0 is entered the counter is reset 4 08 Setting mode Counter Total counter Decelerating mode 2nd transfer roller 6935 1 Number of output pages at t...

Page 1421: ...m 770000 35ppm 900000 45ppm 650000 50ppm 720000 25ppm 640000 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Fuser pad 6979 5 Driving counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Fuser pad 6979 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Fuser pad 6979 7 Present driving counts for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM co...

Page 1422: ... counter Fuser slipping sheet 6981 7 Present driving counts for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Fuser slipping sheet 6981 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter Fuser slipping sheet 6982 Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter Counter 6983 Thin paper counter number of sheets 0 8 digits M 1 08 Setting mode C...

Page 1423: ... Date of previous replacement 0 8 digits M 2 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter LED gap spacer Y 6987 0 Present number of output pages 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter LED gap spacer Y 6987 1 Recommended number of output pages for replacement Refer to contents 8 digits M Default value 30ppm 60000 35ppm 70000 45ppm 75600 50ppm 84000 25ppm 50000 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter ...

Page 1424: ...mber of output pages at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter LED gap spacer M 6989 3 Present driving counts 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter LED gap spacer M 6989 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced 225000 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter LED gap spacer M 6989 5 Driving counts at the last replacement 0 8 digits M 4 08 Settin...

Page 1425: ...ment 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter LED gap spacer C 6991 6 Present output pages for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter LED gap spacer C 6991 7 Present driving counts for control 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter LED gap spacer C 6991 8 Number of times replaced 0 8 digits M 4 08 Setting mode Counter PM counter LED gap spacer C 6992 Date of ...

Page 1426: ...time Color PPC 7052 3 Thick paper1 0 0 421231235 9 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone correction data YYMMDDHHMM YY year MM month DD day HH hour MM minute 14 Yes 08 Setting Mode Image Processing Automatic tone correction data Last updated date and time Color PPC 7052 4 Thick paper2 0 0 421231235 9 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone correction data YYMMDDHHMM YY year MM ...

Page 1427: ...s 7300 NW PRT related codes SYS Clears the values of the following codes 05 7302 to 7385 05 8001 to 8275 08 8005 08 8103 3 08 Setting mode Image Processing Image All clearing Gamma correction table 7301 NW PRT related codes SYS Clears print related area in HDD 3 08 Setting mode Image Processing Screen switchover Printer 7310 600x600 dpi Black 0 0 1 SYS 0 High screen ruling value 1 Low screen rulin...

Page 1428: ... 0 0 421231235 9 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone correction data YYMMDDHHMM YY year MM month DD day HH hour MM minute 14 Yes 08 Setting Mode Image Processing Automatic tone correction data Last updated date and time NW printer 600dpi 7352 8 Special paper2 0 0 421231235 9 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone correction data YYMMDDHHMM YY year MM month DD day HH hour MM ...

Page 1429: ...d time NW printer 1200dpi 7354 5 Thick paper3 0 0 421231235 9 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone correction data YYMMDDHHMM YY year MM month DD day HH hour MM minute 14 Yes 08 Setting Mode Image Processing Automatic tone correction data Last updated date and time NW printer 1200dpi 7354 6 Thick paper4 0 0 421231235 9 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone correction data YY...

Page 1430: ...HOTO base 1 Yes 08 Setting mode Image Processing Image All clearing Adjustment values of all 05 image process codes 7500 FAX related codes SYS Clears the adjustment values of the following codes 05 7500 to 7599 3 08 Setting mode Image Processing User interface PPC color 7610 Display setting of red seal color mode Refer to contents 0 1 SYS 0 Display setting OFF 1 Display setting ON Default value CN...

Page 1431: ...ting NW SCN 8303 Color 0 0 4 SYS 0 Unused 1 Text Photo base 2 Text base 3 Photo base 4 e document base e document This is the mode that corresponds to the law in Japan This mode is used to clarify area where changes were made with such as a correction fluid 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System General 8504 Feeding method of odd page number in duplex printing Raw print 0 0 1 SYS 0 One side 1 Both sides Thi...

Page 1432: ...eneral Overprint function setting 8513 1 For PostScript printing 0 0 1 SYS Enables or disables the overprinting function setting for PostScript printing 0 OFF 1 ON This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 08 Setting mode System General 8514 Threshold value setting for RIP standard paper judgment 20 5 30 SYS This code is used for changing the range in which non standard paper sizes are judg...

Page 1433: ...ed character in filename 1 0 1 SYS Sets the prohibited characters in filename to covert to underscore 0 1 0 Existing model standard 1 Windows standard Since setting the value to 1 allows some prohibited characters filename might not be processed in external application or server 1 08 Setting mode System General 8521 Switchover of output format of Service Notification attachment Refer to contents 0...

Page 1434: ...8 Setting mode System General Transfer belt release threshold in ACS Short size 8529 1 Number of pages released Printer Refer to contents 0 9 SYS Sets a threshold the number of pages for switching from ACS to the black mode When the specified number of pages has been printed in the black mode only the transfer belt is released and ACS shifts to the black mode Default value 25ppm 4 30 35ppm 5 45 50...

Page 1435: ... 0 0 1 SYS Changes the sorting order for print jobs on the private print list 0 Descending order 1 Ascending order 1 08 Setting mode System User interface 8538 Toner near empty notification setting 0 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting mode System User interface Scanning 8540 Date time format in the Meta Scan XML file 1 0 1 SYS 0 YYYY MM DDhh mm ss mmm 1 YYYY MMDDThh mm ss mmmTZD 1 08 Settin...

Page 1436: ...g Mode System User control LDAP authentication Attribute value setting 8592 Sender address mail SYS Sets the default attribute value of sender address Maximum 34 characters ASCII 11 08 Setting Mode System User control LDAP authentication Attribute value setting 8593 Sender name uid SYS Sets the default attribute value of sender name Maximum 34 characters ASCII 11 08 Setting Mode System User interf...

Page 1437: ...nce Directory Service are numbered beginning at the top 0 to 100 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System User interface 8622 Date and time addition setting to file name of scan to file e mail 1 0 1 SYS 0 Not added 1 Added 1 08 Setting Mode System General 8623 0 RIP function setting 1 0 1 SYS Enables Disables the function related to Excel boarder rendering of PCL6 The function is to prevent missing lines when...

Page 1438: ...e rCard SYS Maximum 32 characters ASCII 11 08 Setting Mode System User interface Card reading device LDAP authentication 8643 LDAP attribute name settings 3 eBMUse rCard SYS Maximum 32 characters ASCII 11 08 Setting Mode System User interface Card reading device LDAP authentication 8644 LDAP attribute name settings 4 eBMUse rCard SYS Maximum 32 characters ASCII 11 08 Setting Mode System User inter...

Page 1439: ...15 eBMUse rCard SYS Maximum 32 characters ASCII 11 08 Setting Mode System User interface Card reading device LDAP authentication 8656 LDAP attribute name settings 16 eBMUse rCard SYS Maximum 32 characters ASCII 11 08 Setting Mode System Sound 8657 Placing original 0 0 1 SYS 0 OFF 1 ON 1 08 Setting Mode System Sound 8658 Pressing INTERRUPT button 0 0 1 SYS 0 OFF 1 ON 1 08 Setting Mode System Sound ...

Page 1440: ...perature is applied depending on the paper size 1 08 Setting Mode System General 8667 Saving image log 0 0 1 SSDK 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting Mode System General 8668 Number of pages saved as image log 1 0 1 SSDK 0 First page 1 All pages 1 08 Setting Mode System FAX 8700 Secret reception setting 0 0 2 SYS When the value of 08 8924 is 0 the value of this code can be set to 1 or 2 0 Always Off...

Page 1441: ...When this code is set to 1 Disabled a license error occurs even if the license for hardcopy security printing is enabled If this error occurs hardcopy security printing is available but copy prohibition function and tracking application are not available 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting Mode System User interface 8712 Display setting of the drawer setting button 1 0 1 SYS Sets whether the drawer ...

Page 1442: ... the glass 0 0 1 SYS Sets whether the job is sent or canceled when AutoClear is executed on the interruption screen to confirm the next original displayed after scanning the original put on the glass Use this code to cancel job when the equipment is left unattended while the interruption screen is displayed 0 Sends job 1 Cancels job 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System User interface 8722 Display method o...

Page 1443: ...r card authentication 0 0 1 SYS Switches whether the message to hold a card over the card reader is displayed on the login screen when the card authentication is enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting Mode System Forced printing of user name 8728 0 Display Non display setting in TopAccess 0 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 08 Setting Mode System Forc...

Page 1444: ...value increases Unit pt 1pt 0 35mm This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 08 Setting Mode System Forced printing of user name 8728 10 Font setting 0 0 9 SYS Normally this setting is made in TopAccess 0 Helvetica 1 AlbertusMT 2 Chicago 3 Eurostile 4 Geneva 5 GillSans 6 LetterGothic 7 Monaco 8 Taffy 9 TimesNewRomanPSMT This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 4 08 Setting Mode System...

Page 1445: ...es 08 Setting Mode System User interface Display setting 8744 Switchover of pop up display during scanning 1 0 1 SYS Switches the pop up display during scanning 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed 1 08 Setting Mode System User interface 8745 Enable Disable setting of EWB history 0 0 1 SYS Sets whether part of the cookie password and form data of user who logs in to EWB is saved or not 0 Disabled 1 Enabled...

Page 1446: ... 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce Notification of remaining amount of toner 8756 0 Remaining amount at first notification 25 0 100 SYS 0 to 100 4 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce Notification of remaining amount of toner 8756 1 Notification interval 10 1 25 SYS 1 to 25 4 Yes 08 Setting Mode System User interface Display setting LED head Main charger 875...

Page 1447: ...played 1 Displayed 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System Network 8771 Account setting for access to Home Directory 0 0 1 SYS 0 Setting of Remote1 is used 1 Setting of Remote1 and Remote2 is used 1 08 Setting mode System Network 8774 Password authentication of print job 0 0 1 SYS Sets whether the user authentication for network printing FAX InternetFAX using the user information and password input on the pr...

Page 1448: ...ting mode System General 8783 Switchover of document sorting order of e Filing Box 1 0 1 SYS 0 Sorted by saved date 1 Sorted by document name 1 08 Setting mode System User interface 8785 Display Non display of pop up for card authentication Refer to contents 0 1 SYS Sets whether the pop up is displayed or not after the success of card authentication This code is effective when the value of 08 8727...

Page 1449: ...mode 1 1 2 NIC Since MFP is deleted from the master browser of Windows network if MFP is in the Super Sleep mode for 36 minutes or more enable this setting to always display MFP in the browse list 1 Enabled 2 Disabled 12 08 Setting mode System Network Dynamic update of DNS server 8826 Enable Disable setting 1 1 2 NIC Sets whether the function that gets the secondary DNS server to work as the prima...

Page 1450: ...ets the default display method on the preview screen when using the Fax function 0 Fit to page 1 Fit to width 1 08 Setting mode System Printer 8904 Job jump instruction setting 0 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting mode System 8905 Forcible printing against unacceptable paper error 0 0 1 SYS 0 OFF printing not continued 1 ON printing continued by automatically selecting the available exit tr...

Page 1451: ...1 e Filing 1 0 1 SYS Sets whether the filing function is enabled or disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 4 08 Setting Mode System MFP function setting 8914 2 Fax 1 0 1 SYS Sets whether the Fax function is enabled or disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 4 08 Setting Mode System MFP function setting 8914 3 InternetFAX 1 0 1 SYS Sets whether the InternetFAX function is enabled or disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 4 08...

Page 1452: ...Mode System MFP function setting 8914 10 Save as FTPS 1 0 1 SYS Sets whether the function that saves scanned data of originals to FTP server using SSL is enabled or disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 4 08 Setting Mode System MFP function setting 8914 11 Save as SMB 1 0 1 SYS Sets whether the function that saves scanned data of originals to the SMB server is enabled or disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 4 08...

Page 1453: ...Automatic output of jobs at login 0 0 1 SYS Sets whether jobs registered in the hold queue of user are automatically output or not when the user logs in 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting Mode System Security 8919 Service password SYS Sets the password to log into the self diagnostic mode and Service UI 11 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Option FAX 8920 Output tray for FAX InternetFAX e mail printing 0 ...

Page 1454: ...nted unless the user allows printing by means of the control panel 0 Not registered normal printing 1 Registered 1 08 Setting mode System 8925 Data tampering checking at start up 0 0 1 SYS Sets whether data tampering is checked or not at startup 0 Not checked 1 Checked When the value of 08 8911 is set to 3 Security mode High level the value of this code is automatically set to 1 1 08 Setting mode ...

Page 1455: ...bled accepts all server certificates 2 Disabled 3 Enabled uses the imported CA certificate 12 08 Setting mode System User interface SSL 8934 SMTP Client SSL TLS 1 1 2 NIC 1 STARTTLS 2 Over SSL 12 08 Setting mode System User interface Remote Scan 8935 Enable Disable setting 1 0 1 NIC 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 12 08 Setting mode System User interface Remote Scan 8936 Remote scanning with SSL 0 0 1 NIC 0 ...

Page 1456: ...e decreased However this code does not work depending on the conditions such as when stapling is selected Set this code when requested by user or the guides width sensor is broken Related code 08 4621 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 08 Setting Mode System User interface General Language package information 8968 Panel Help Displays the language package information of the installed Panel Help 2 Yes 08 Setting M...

Page 1457: ... from duplication are detected or not 0 Detection disabled 1 Detection enabled 4 08 Setting Mode System General Detection of originals prohibited from duplication 8977 1 Scan 1 0 1 SYS Sets whether the originals that are prohibited from duplication are detected or not 0 Detection disabled 1 Detection enabled 4 08 Setting Mode System General Detection of originals prohibited from duplication 8977 2...

Page 1458: ...in the sleep or super sleep mode 0 Reboots regardless of the sleep mode 128 Monday 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 4 Thursday 8 Friday 16 Saturday 32 Sunday 64 e g Monday 1 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday 127 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 127 1 08 Setting Mode System General Scheduled automatic reboot 8982 Time Hour 0 0 23 SYS Sets time hour for scheduled automatic reboot 1 08 Setting Mode Syste...

Page 1459: ... of first block b Block number of second block s Starting offset of second block e Ending offset of second block 5 Yes 08 Setting Mode System User interface NFC reader 8989 Format information 3 0 0 0xFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FF SYS 0000KKKKKKKKKKKK hexadecimal first 4 digits are fixed KKKKKKKKKKKK key 12 digits 5 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce Notification of equipment information 8991 Notificatio...

Page 1460: ...fication SYS Maximum 192 characters 11 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce Notification of equipment information 8998 Email address 3 for notification SYS Maximum 192 characters 11 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce Notification of equipment information 8999 1 Adjustment mode 05 data list 0 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 4 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce Notification of equipment in...

Page 1461: ...enan ce Notification of equipment information 8999 11 Engine firmware log 0 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 4 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce Notification of equipment information 8999 12 Total counter list 0 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 4 Yes 08 Setting mode System General 9000 Destination selection Refer to contents 0 2 M 0 Others 1 North America 2 Japan Default value NAD 1 JPD 2 Others 0 1...

Page 1462: ...d Chinese TWD Traditional Chinese Others English 11 08 Setting mode System User interface 9016 Externally installed counter 0 0 5 M 0 No external counter 1 Coin controller If the value of 08 9979 is 0 ACS it is changed to 2 Full color 2 Copy key card This value is valid only when 2 is set for 08 9000 3 Key copy counter 5 Coin controller supporting ACS mixed size The value of 08 4131 is set to 1 4 ...

Page 1463: ...stration completed 6 Enforced performing of fuser thermistor correction completed 7 Auto gamma adjustment PPC completed 8 Auto gamma adjustment PRT 600 dpi completed 99 Unpacking and adjustment completed 8 is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 1 08 Setting Mode System Initializatio n 9030 Initialization after software version up SYS Perform this code when the software in this equipment has been upg...

Page 1464: ... defined 8 Not defined 9 ASD 10 ARD 11 Not defined Default value JPD 2 NAD 1 MJD 0 ASD 9 AUD 3 TWD 6 CND 4 ARD 10 2 08 Setting Mode System HDD 9065 HDD diagnostic menu display SYS Displays the HDD information 2 Yes 08 Setting Mode System HDD 9072 Performing HDD testing SYS Checks the bad sector It may take more than 30 minutes to finish the checking 3 08 Setting mode System General 9081 Initializa...

Page 1465: ... 6 5 08 Setting mode System User interface 9102 Date display format Refer to contents 0 2 SYS 0 YYYY MM DD 1 DD MM YYYY 2 MM DD YYYY Default value MJD 1 JPD 0 Others 2 1 08 Setting mode System General 9103 Time differences Refer to contents 0 47 SYS 0 12 0h 1 11 5h 2 11 0h 3 10 5h 4 10 0h 5 9 5h 6 9 0h 7 8 5h 8 8 0h 9 7 5h 10 7 0h 11 6 5h 12 6 0h 13 5 5h 14 5 0h 15 4 5h 16 4 0h 17 3 5h 18 3 0h 19 ...

Page 1466: ...e timer setting 4 0 4 6 15 SYS Timer to automatically switch to the auto power save mode when the equipment has not been used 0 Invalid 4 1 min 6 3 min 7 4 min 8 5 min 9 7 min 10 10 min 11 15 min 12 20 min 13 30 min 14 45 min 15 60 min 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System User interface 9112 Auto Shut Off timer setting Sleep Mode 21 0 21 SYS Timer to automatically switch to the auto sleep mode when the eq...

Page 1467: ...this code cannot be set to 1 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System General Raw printing job 9117 Blank page print 0 0 1 SYS 0 OFF 1 ON This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 1 08 Setting Mode System User interface Department setting 9120 Enable Disable setting 0 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System User interface Department setting 9121 Print setting without department code 1 0 2 ...

Page 1468: ...08 Setting Mode System User interface Default mode setting Default setting 9132 Default setting of screen Function 0 0 99 SYS Sets the screen to be displayed after the auto clear time has passed or it has recovered from the energy saving mode or sleep mode 0 Copier 1 Fax 2 Scan 3 Box 4 Print 5 Template 6 Menu 7 Job status 99 EWB Only 0 to 7 and 99 can be entered 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System User i...

Page 1469: ...ypass feed copying 0 Paper is not drawn in unless the START button is pressed 1 10 Setting value x 0 5sec 1 08 Setting mode System User interface Blank copying prevention mode during RADF jamming PPC 9144 Blank copying prevention mode during RADF jamming 0 0 1 SYS 0 OFF 1 ON Start printing when the scanning of each page is finished 1 08 Setting Mode System User interface Rotation printing 9146 Rot...

Page 1470: ...n 1 to the upper left corner center 0 Cornering PPC Cornering PRT 1 Centering PPC Cornering PRT 2 Cornering PPC Centering PRT 3 Centering PPC Centering PRT 1 08 Setting mode System User interface 9155 Magazine sort setting 0 0 1 SYS 0 Left page to right page 1 Right page to left page 1 08 Setting mode System User interface 2 in 1 4 in 1 page allocating order setting PPC 9156 2 in 1 4 in 1 page all...

Page 1471: ...165 Local 1 0 1 SYS Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the copier when it is placed on the bypass tray 0 OFF Press the START button to start feeding 1 ON Automatic feeding 1 08 Setting mode System User interface Twin color copy 9178 Color 1 The color judged as black 0 0 6 SYS 0 K 1 Y 2 M 3 C 4 R 5 G 6 B 1 08 Setting mode System User interface Twin color copy 9179 Color 2 The co...

Page 1472: ...t this code Unit minute 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System General 9199 Automatic interruption page number setting for printing 400 0 9999 SYS Sets the number of pages to interrupt printing automatically If 1 or more is set to this code printing is interrupted at the set value If 0 is set printing is not interrupted automatically By the combination of this code and 08 2509 performing image quality contr...

Page 1473: ...l of each step is set at 08 9230 1 08 Setting mode System Electronic filing 9207 Default setting of user box retention period 0 0 999 SYS Sets the data retention period when creating a user box 0 Not deleted 1 to 999 Retention period Unit Day 1 08 Setting Mode System HDD 9208 Warning notification File Share e Filling 90 0 100 SYS Sets the percentage of HDD partition filled when warning notificatio...

Page 1474: ...de setting Default setting SCN 9213 Default set of density adjust Black 0 0 11 SYS 0 Automatic density 1 Step 5 2 Step 4 3 Step 3 4 Step 2 5 Step 1 6 Step 0 center 7 Step 1 8 Step 2 9 Step 3 10 Step 4 11 Step 5 1 to 11 Manual density 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System User interface Default mode setting Default setting of background adjustment 9214 Full Color 5 1 9 SYS 1 Step 4 2 Step 3 3 Step 2 4 Step ...

Page 1475: ...terface Default mode setting Default setting of resolution SCN 9218 Black 1 0 5 SYS 0 150 dpi 1 200 dpi 2 300 dpi 3 400 dpi 4 600 dpi 5 100 dpi 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System User interface Default mode setting Default setting SCN 9219 Original mode Full color 0 0 3 SYS 0 Text 1 Text Photo 2 Photo 3 Custom Valid only when a setting other than 0 is set for 08 8303 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System User in...

Page 1476: ... A4 3 LD 4 LT 5 A4 R 6 A5 R 7 LT R 8 LG 9 B4 10 B5 11 ST R 12 COMP 13 B5 R 14 FOLIO 15 13 LG 16 8 5 x 8 5 18 A6 R 19 Size mixed20 8K 21 16K 22 16K R 1 08 Setting mode System General 9225 Searching interval of deleting expired files and checking capacity of HDD partitions 12 1 24 SYS Sets the search interval of deleting expired files and checking capacity of HDD partitions Unit Hour Related code 08...

Page 1477: ...ting Mode System User interface Default setting of filing format Storing files 9229 Black MJD 1 Others 0 0 6 SYS 0 TIFF Multi 1 PDF Multi 2 Not used 3 TIFF Single 4 PDF Single 5 XPS Multi 6 XPS Single 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System Image Binarizing level setting When judging as black in the ACS Mode 9230 0 Step 2 115 0 255 SYS Sets the binarizing level of each step When the value increases the image...

Page 1478: ...nt name and user name setting to a folder when saving files 0 0 2 SYS Sets whether or not adding the equipment name and user name to the folder when saving files 0 Not added 1 Add the equipment name 2 Add the user name 1 08 Setting mode System User interface Default screen setting 9236 Default setting of print screen 1 1 4 SYS 1 Private print screen Job list of log in user is displayed if user aut...

Page 1479: ... for overwriting is the shortest 1 08 Setting mode System Paper feeding 9248 Tab paper Inserter paper automatic feeding setting Remote 1 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 08 Setting mode System User interface 9250 Image setting for Electronic Filing printing Only for color image 0 0 3 SYS 0 General 1 Photograph 2 Presentation 3 Line art 1 08 Setting mode System User interface 9251 Access code entry for ...

Page 1480: ...5 1000 SYS Sets the maximum number of time a job build has been performed 5 1000 5 to 1000 times 1 08 Setting mode System General 9264 User data department management 0 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting mode System Paper feeding 9267 Detection method of 13 LG for single size document 0 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting Mode System Option FAX 9268 Inbound FAX function Forwarding by ...

Page 1481: ...281 Sound setting Energy Saving Refer to contents 0 1 SYS 0 OFF 1 ON Default value JPD 0 Others 1 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System General Color 9288 User data management limitation setting 0 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting mode System General Color 9289 User data management limitation Setting by number of printouts 0 7 digits SYS 0 9 999 999 0 9 999 999 sheets 1 08 Setting mode System Gener...

Page 1482: ...om the Address book 3 Can be set only from the LDAP server 1 08 Setting mode System Paper feeding Paper information 9300 Drawer 1 0 0 8 SYS 0 Plain paper 1 Thick paper 1 2 Thick paper 2 3 Thick paper 3 8 Recycled paper Only 0 to 3 8 are acceptable Do not set the paper type that is not supported 1 08 Setting mode System Paper feeding Paper information 9301 Drawer 2 0 0 8 SYS 0 Plain paper 1 Thick p...

Page 1483: ...32 Envelope 128 Plain paper reverse 129 Thick paper 1 reverse 130 Thick paper 2 reverse 131 Thick paper 3 reverse 132 Thick paper 4 reverse 134 Special paper 1 reverse 135 Special paper 2 reverse 136 Recycled paper reverse 139 Thin paper reverse 140 Special paper 3 reverse 160 Envelope reverse 0 4 6 8 11 12 16 32 128 132 134 136 139 140 and 160 are acceptable Do not set the paper type that is not ...

Page 1484: ... B4 10 B5 11 FOLIO 12 13 LG 13 8 5 x 8 5 This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model Default value NAD 2 Others 6 1 08 Setting mode System Network Print Raw printing job 9310 Paper type 0 0 7 SYS 0 Plain paper 1 Thick paper 1 2 Thick paper 2 3 Thick paper 3 4 OHP film 5 Thick paper 4 6 Thin paper 7 Recycled paper 1 08 Setting mode System Network Print Raw printing job 9311 Paper direction 0 0 1...

Page 1485: ...ng value This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 1 08 Setting mode System Network Print Raw printing job 9317 PCL font number 0 0 9999 SYS Sets the PCL font number This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 1 08 Setting mode System Paper feeding Paper size bypass feeding non standard type 9318 Memory 1 148 100 148 432 100 297 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass feed non standard type...

Page 1486: ...rs one byte character 11 08 Setting mode System General Banner advertising 9329 Banner advertising display 2 SYS Maximum 27 letters one byte character 11 08 Setting mode System General Banner advertising 9330 Display of BANNER MESSAGE button 0 0 1 SYS 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed This button enables the entry of Banner advertising display 1 08 9328 and Banner advertising display 2 08 9329 on the co...

Page 1487: ...36 Default setting of drawers Printer BOX 1 1 5 SYS 1 LCF 2 1st drawer 3 2nd drawer 4 PFP upper drawer 5 PFP lower drawer 1 08 Setting mode System User interface 9337 Restriction of the template function with the administrator privilege 0 0 1 SYS Selects the restriction of the template function usage setting 0 No restriction 1 Only available with the administrator privilege 1 08 Setting mode Syste...

Page 1488: ...rgin setting 9341 0 Left binding front Right binding back 7 0 100 SYS Sets the binding margin displayed as default on the setting screen for the top bottom left right binding function when copying 4 Yes 08 Setting mode System User interface Copy Binding margin setting 9341 1 Left binding back Right binding front 7 0 100 SYS Sets the binding margin displayed as default on the setting screen for the...

Page 1489: ...drawers Refer to contents 0 1 SYS 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed Default value MJD JPD 0 Others 1 1 08 Setting mode System General Print 9357 Enhanced bold for PCL6 0 0 1 SYS 0 OFF 1 ON Enhanced bold for PCL6 1 08 Setting Mode System User interface Paper Feed setting 9359 Printing resume after jam releasing 1 0 1 SYS 0 Auto resume 1 Resume by users 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System General Color profile A...

Page 1490: ...s displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Available profile display 9361 8 WH_OP_08 icc SYS Displaying the current Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute PG CIE Based PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Available profile display 9361 9 WH_OP_09 icc SYS Displaying...

Page 1491: ... is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Available profile display 9361 19 WH_OP_19 icc SYS Displaying the current Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute PG CIE Based PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Available profile display 9361 20 WH_OP_20 icc SYS Displa...

Page 1492: ... is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Available profile display 9361 30 WH_OP_30 icc SYS Displaying the current Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute PG CIE Based PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Available profile display 9361 31 WH_OP_31 icc SYS Displa...

Page 1493: ... is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Available profile display 9361 41 WH_OP_41 icc SYS Displaying the current Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute PG CIE Based PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Available profile display 9361 42 WH_OP_42 icc SYS Displa...

Page 1494: ... time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Available profile display 9361 51 WH_OP_51 icc SYS Displaying the current Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute PG CIE Based PureGray TRC attribute in the same sub code is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Available profile display 9361 52 WH_OP_52 icc SYS Displaying the current Output P...

Page 1495: ...time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9365 4 WH_OP_04 000 SYS Displays the default Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipmen...

Page 1496: ...t the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9365 15 WH_OP_15 000 SYS Displays the default Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at...

Page 1497: ...t the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9365 26 WH_OP_26 000 SYS Displays the default Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at...

Page 1498: ...t the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9365 37 WH_OP_37 000 SYS Displays the default Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at...

Page 1499: ...t the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9365 48 WH_OP_48 000 SYS Displays the default Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute PG CIE Based Pure Gray TRC attribute in the same sub code is displayed at the same time 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at...

Page 1500: ...profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9369 0 WH_OP_00 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9369 1 WH_OP_01 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute in the sa...

Page 1501: ...ed Pure GrayTRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9369 11 WH_OP_11 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9369 12 WH_OP_12 001 S...

Page 1502: ...ased Pure GrayTRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9369 22 WH_OP_22 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9369 23 WH_OP_23 001...

Page 1503: ...ased Pure GrayTRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9369 33 WH_OP_33 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9369 34 WH_OP_34 001...

Page 1504: ...ased Pure GrayTRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9369 44 WH_OP_44 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System General Color profile Displaying the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9369 45 WH_OP_45 001...

Page 1505: ...ng the attribute of the profile at the shipment 9369 53 WH_OP_53 001 SYS Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIE Based Pure GrayTRC attribute in the same sub code 14 08 Setting mode System User interface Security 9379 AES data encryption function setting 0 0 2 SYS 0 Encryption invalid 1 Encryption valid Security priority Encrypts all of the user s data 2 Encryption valid Performance priori...

Page 1506: ... scan job 9386 0 When job completed 0 0 1 SYS Sets the notification method of scan job completion 0 Invalid 1 Valid 4 08 Setting mode System Network Notification of scan job 9386 1 On error 0 0 1 SYS Sets the notification method of scan job completion 0 Invalid 1 Valid 4 08 Setting mode System Network Scanning 9387 File name format of Save as file and Email transmission 0 0 6 SYS Sets the file nam...

Page 1507: ...Email transmission 4 3 6 SYS Sets the digit of a page number attached on the file 3 6 3 6 digits 1 08 Setting mode System Network Scanning 9391 Extension suffix format of the file of Save as file 3 3 6 SYS Sets the extension digits of the file to be saved 3 Auto 4 4 digits 5 5 digits 6 6 digits 1 08 Setting mode System Network Scanning 9394 Single page option for storing File and sending Email 0 0...

Page 1508: ...e 0 0 0 0 Acceptable value 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 12 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Network TCP IP 9409 Subnet mask Refer to contents Refer to contents NIC Default value 0 0 0 0 Acceptable value 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 12 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Network TCP IP 9410 Gateway Refer to contents Refer to contents NIC Default value 0 0 0 0 Acceptable value 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 12 Yes 08 Setting mode ...

Page 1509: ...ndary NIC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Default value 000 000 000 000 12 08 Setting mode System Network NetWare 9426 Availability of Bindery 1 1 2 NIC 1 Available 2 Not available 12 08 Setting mode System Network NetWare 9427 Availability of NDS 1 1 2 NIC 1 Available 2 Not available 12 08 Setting mode System Network HTTP 9430 Availability of HTTP server 1 1 2 NIC 1 Available 2 Not available 12 0...

Page 1510: ...stem Network IPP 9488 IPP message from operator NIC Maximum 127 characters 12 08 Setting mode System Network FTP 9489 Availability of FTP print 1 1 2 NIC 1 Available 2 Not available 12 08 Setting mode System Network Email 9499 Page number limitation for printing text of received Email 5 1 99 SYS 1 08 Setting mode System Network 9505 Bonjour setting 1 1 2 NIC 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 08 Setting mode Sy...

Page 1511: ...rver OFF ON 2 1 2 OFF ON1 Valid2 Invalid 12 08 Setting mode System Network SSL 9556 SSL POP3 Client OFF ON 2 1 3 OFF ON 1 Valid Accepts all the certification of the server 2 Invalid 3 Use the imported certification 12 08 Setting mode System Network TCP IP 9563 IP Conflict Detect 1 1 2 OFF ON 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 08 Setting mode System Network SNTP 9564 SNTP Enable 2 1 2 OFF ON 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12...

Page 1512: ...8 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce General 9601 Equipment number serial number display 9 digits SYS Fist digit Production country fixed Second digit Model fixed Third digit Month variable Fourth to ninth digit serial number variable This can be also entered with 05 9043 11 Yes 08 Setting mode System Maintenan ce 9602 Dealer s name SYS Maximum 100 letters Needed at initial registration 11 08 Settin...

Page 1513: ...led service polling day 9614 Sunday 1 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce RDMS Remote controlled service polling day 9615 Monday 1 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce RDMS Remote controlled service polling day 9616 Tuesday 1 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce RDMS Remote controlled service polling day ...

Page 1514: ...TP authentication 0 0 2 SYS 0 Not edited 1 Account name of From Address Device name 2 LDAP searching 1 08 Setting mode System Wireless LAN 9649 Wireless LAN setting 2 1 2 NIC Sets whether the wireless LAN connection is enabled or disabled 1 Enabled 2 Disabled 12 08 Setting mode System Network DHCP 9694 Enabling server s IP address acquired by DHCP 1 1 2 DNS domain name Option 15 DNS domain name of...

Page 1515: ...rval to recover from the Emergency Mode to the Normal Mode Unit Hour 1 08 Setting mode System Maintenan ce RDMS 9719 Short time interval setting of Emergency Mode 60 30 360 SYS Unit Minute 1 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce RDMS General 9723 Periodical polling timing 1030 0 2359 SYS Hour Hour Minute Minute 0 0 00 to 2359 23 59 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce RDMS General 9724 Writing ...

Page 1516: ...P proxy port number setting 0 0 65535 SYS 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce RDMS HTTP 9743 HTTP proxy ID setting SYS Maximum 30 letters 11 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce RDMS HTTP 9744 HTTP proxy password setting SYS Maximum 30 letters 11 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Maintenan ce RDMS HTTP 9745 HTTP proxy panel display 1 0 1 SYS 0 Valid 1 Invalid 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System Network...

Page 1517: ...ervice Automatic ordering function of supplies 9762 Service technician s telephone number SYS Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the Monitor Pause button 11 08 Setting mode System Maintenan ce Remote controlled service Automatic ordering function of supplies 9763 Service technician s E mail address SYS Maximum 192 letters List 256 digits 11 08 Setting mode System Maintenan ce Remote controlled se...

Page 1518: ...ge K 1 1 99 SYS 1 08 Setting mode System Maintenan ce Remote controlled service Information about supplies 9778 Condition number of toner cartridge K 1 1 99 SYS 1 08 Setting mode System Maintenan ce Remote controlled service Information about supplies 9779 Part number of waste toner box SYS Maximum 20 digits 11 08 Setting mode System Maintenan ce Remote controlled service Information about supplie...

Page 1519: ...s 9 1 month 10 1 year 11 5 years 12 Not limited Calls service technician if such error has occurred in the past even once or more 1 08 Setting mode System General 9789 Default repeat count 2 2 8 SYS Unit times 1 08 Setting mode System Maintenan ce Remote controlled service 9793 Service Notification setting 0 0 2 SYS Enables to set up to 3 E mail addresses to be sent 08 9794 9607 9608 0 Invalid 1 V...

Page 1520: ... status 0 0 2 SYS 0 SLEEP MODE 1 AUTO POWER SAVE 2 READY 1 08 Setting mode System Finisher Interruption of stapling operation no staple 9810 0 Copying 1 0 1 SYS When staple runs out while printing in the stapling mode sets whether printing is interrupted or printing is continued by switching to sorting This code is valid only when printing in the stapling mode However printing is always interrupte...

Page 1521: ... higher the 2nd transfer resistance detection is performed every time the number of pages of setting value X 100 have output 1 08 Setting mode System General Number of output pages for pausing continuous printing for 2nd transfer resistance detection control 9815 At low temperatures 10 0 100 SYS When the setting value of this code is 1 or higher the 2nd transfer resistance detection is performed e...

Page 1522: ...49630 0 65535 SYS Sets an SSL port number for remote scanning using SSL communication 1 08 Setting mode System Network 9823 User name and password at user authentication or Save as file 0 0 2 SYS 0 User name and password of the device 1 User name and password at the user authentication Template registration information comes first when a template is retrieved 2 User name and password at the user a...

Page 1523: ...ing 9884 Counting method switchover 0 0 1 SYS 0 Counted as 1 1 Counted as 2 1 08 Setting mode System General 9886 Decimal point indication for Enhanced Scan Template Refer to contents 0 1 SYS 0 Comma 1 Full stop Default value MJD 0 Others 1 1 08 Setting mode System General 9888 Permission setting for changing the scan parameter when recalling an extension 0 0 1 SYS 0 Prohibited1 Accepted 1 08 Sett...

Page 1524: ... Engine firmware version 210M XXX 2 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Version System 9902 Scanner firmware version 212S XXX 2 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Version Engine 9903 RADF firmware version DF XXXX 2 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Version Finisher 9904 Finisher firmware version FIN XXX This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 2 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Version FAX 9905 FAX firmware version F670 ...

Page 1525: ...ontinuous color control 2 sheets 3 The number of contact control 3 Continuous color control 3 sheets 4 The number of contact control 4 Continuous color control 4 sheets 5 The number of contact control 5 Continuous color control 5 sheets 6 The number of contact control 6 Continuous color control 6 sheets 7 The number of contact control 7 Continuous color control 7 sheets 8 The number of contact con...

Page 1526: ...ontinuous color control 2 sheets 3 The number of contact control 3 Continuous color control 3 sheets 4 The number of contact control 4 Continuous color control 4 sheets 5 The number of contact control 5 Continuous color control 5 sheets 6 The number of contact control 6 Continuous color control 6 sheets 7 The number of contact control 7 Continuous color control 7 sheets 8 The number of contact con...

Page 1527: ...s 7 The number of contact control 7 Continuous color control 7 sheets 8 The number of contact control 8 Continuous color control 8 sheets 9 The number of contact control 9 Continuous color control 9 sheets 4 08 Setting mode System Finisher Stapling setting Acceptable number of sheets exceeding upper limit Short size 9937 0 Plain Recycled 0 100 100 SYS 100 to 100 4 08 Setting mode System Finisher S...

Page 1528: ...C firmware version 210F XXX 2 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Version Finisher 9944 Punch firmware version PUN XXX This code is not supported by LL20 25ppm model 2 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Network E mail 9946 Number of Email transmission retries 3 0 14 SYS 0 to 14 times 1 Yes 08 Setting Mode System Network E mail 9947 E mail transmission retry interval 1 0 15 SYS 0 to 15 min 1 Yes 08 Setting mode Sys...

Page 1529: ...isabled 1 Enabled 1 08 Setting Mode System User interface Default mode setting Default setting PPC 9970 Original mode Black 0 0 4 SYS 0 Text Photo 1 Text 2 Photo 3 Gray Scale 4 User custom mode 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System General Default setting Image quality density 9971 PPC black 0 0 1 SYS 0 Auto 1 Manual 1 08 Setting mode System General Default setting Blank page judgment Default setting 9972 ...

Page 1530: ...etting Image quality density 9978 ACS PPC full color 1 0 1 SYS 0 Auto 1 Manual 1 08 Setting Mode System User interface Default mode setting Default setting PPC 9979 Color mode 2 0 2 SYS 0 Auto color 1 Black 2 Full color When the value of the code 08 9116 is 1 Enabled 1 Black is automatically set for this code and 0 ACS and 2 Full color become unselectable 1 Yes 08 Setting mode System Network Email...

Page 1531: ...ntication is not completed 1 08 Setting Mode System User interface 9984 Document or file name display form for the PRINT screen JOB STATUS screen Job Status tab and Logs tab 0 0 1 SYS 0 Displays with the document or file name 1 Does not display the document or file name 1 08 Setting Mode System User interface 9985 Screen displayed by pressing MENU button 0 0 1 SYS 0 MENU screen 1 EWB screen 1 08 S...

Page 1532: ... 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts A1 Original glass B or A B or A 25 2 A2 ADF original glass B B 25 3 A3 Mirror 1 B B A4 Mirror 2 B B A5 Mirror 3 B B A6 Reflector B B A7 Lens B B 10 9 A8 Automatic original detection sensor B B 10 12 A9 Slide sheet front and rear B R3 R3 B R3 R3 Replacement Re...

Page 1533: ...irror 1 B B A4 Mirror 2 B B A5 Mirror 3 B B A6 Reflector B B A7 Lens B B 10 9 A8 Automatic original detection sensor B B 10 12 A9 Slide sheet front and rear B R3 R3 B R3 R3 Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement P I Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coatin...

Page 1534: ...Discharge LED B or A B or A 31 15 Replacement Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Operatio n check P I Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating 420 Replacement Cleaning Items to check 84 168 252 336 Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lub...

Page 1535: ...ve counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts C1 Paper feed roller 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 23 29 C2 Separation roller 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 23 30 C3 Pickup roller 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 23 29 C4 Paper guide B B 13 9 C...

Page 1536: ... 10 D2 Paper guide B B 41 5 41 20 Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement P I Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement 420 504 588 672 Operatio n check Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning R...

Page 1537: ... 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts E1 Paper feed roller 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 21 19 E2 Separation roller 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 21 24 E3 Pickup roller B B 20 13 350 400 Replacement Cleaning Items to check 50 100 150 200 250 300 Operatio n check P I Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacem...

Page 1538: ...seal B B B B B B B B 35 15 Drive counts 50ppm x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts F1 Main charger case B B B B B B B B 35 12 F2 Needle electrode R1 ...

Page 1539: ... 7 41 Drive counts 45ppm x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts G1 Whole cleaner unit B B B B B B B B G2 Drum R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1...

Page 1540: ... R3 B R3 R3 B R3 R3 B R3 R3 B R3 R3 B R3 R3 34 6 34 7 G5 Recovery blade B B B B B B B B 34 9 G6 LED gap spacer B R1 R1 B R1 R1 B R1 R1 B R1 R1 B R1 R1 B R1 R1 B R1 R1 B R1 R1 34 10 34 11 G7 Drum gap spacer R1 R1 R1 R1 34 12 34 15 G8 Ozone filter R1 R1 R1 R1 7 41 Drive counts Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning L...

Page 1541: ...R3 R3 R3 R3 33 25 H7 Auto toner sensor B B B B B B B B 33 4 H8 Developer unit upper cover B B B B B B B B 32 9 H9 Development drive unit W1 W1 Drive counts 45ppm x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000...

Page 1542: ... R3 R3 B R3 R3 B R3 R3 B R3 R3 B R3 R3 33 6 33 7 H5 Oil seal Rear side R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 33 25 H6 Oil seal Front side R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 33 25 H7 Auto toner sensor B B B B B B B B 33 4 H8 Developer unit upper cover B B B B B B B B 32 9 H9 Development drive unit W1 W1 Drive counts Replacement Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replace...

Page 1543: ...000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts J1 Transfer belt A R3 R3 A R3 R3 26 14 J2 1st transfer roller A R3 R3 A R3 R3 27 9 J3 Cleaning unit facing roller A A 26 10 J4 TBU drive roller B R3 R3 B R3 R3 26 27 J5 Belt clinging rolle...

Page 1544: ...counts J1 Transfer belt A A 26 14 J2 1st transfer roller A A 27 9 J3 Cleaning unit facing roller A R3 R3 A R3 R3 26 10 J4 TBU drive roller B B 26 27 J5 Belt clinging roller before 2nd transfer A R3 R3 A R3 R3 27 2 J6 Lift roller A R3 R3 A R3 R3 26 8 J7 Winding roller K A R3 R3 A R3 R3 27 4 J8 Transfer belt cleaning blade R1 R1 R1 R1 30 19 J9 Recovery blade B B 30 22 J10 Blade seal R1 R1 R1 R1 30 1...

Page 1545: ...1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts K1 Image position aligning sensor Front A A 14 6 K2 Actuator B B B B B B B B 14 9 K3 Image position aligning sensor Rear Image quality sensor A A 14 6 K4 Transport guide B B B B B B B B 14 8 Items to check 50 100 150 200 Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacem...

Page 1546: ... 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts L1 2nd transfer roller R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 14 28 L2 Paper clinging detection sensor B B B B B B B B 14 19 L3 2nd transfer roller paper guide B B B B B B B B 14 22 Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Operatio n check Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating ...

Page 1547: ...Drive gear W1 W1 38 47 38 48 45ppm x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts M1 Fuser belt R1 R1 R1 R1 38 13 M2 Pressure roller R1 R1 R1 R1 38 34 M3 Separ...

Page 1548: ...rance A R3 R3 A R3 R3 37 1 M6 Thermistor R3 R3 R3 R3 38 24 M7 Exit sensor actuator A R3 R3 A R3 R3 39 15 M8 Thermostat R3 R3 R3 R3 38 23 M9 Fuser belt lubricating sheet SI R1 R1 SI R1 R1 38 26 M10 Fuser belt pad R1 R1 R1 R1 38 26 M11 Drive gear W1 W1 38 47 38 48 Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubri...

Page 1549: ... 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts x 1 000 sheets x 1 000 drive counts N1 Exit reverse guide B B N2 Lower exit roller R3 R3 R3 R3 40 11 N3 Reverse roller R3 R3 R3 R3 40 32 N4 Upper exit roller R3 R3 R3 R3 40 31 Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Cleaning Lubrication Coatin...

Page 1550: ......

Page 1551: ... 5 47 The difference list has been added 6 11 The code has been added 6 14 The sub code has been added 7 37 The PM kit has been changed 7 41 42 The item name has been changed 8 12 EAF1 has been added 8 15 C270 has been changed 8 37 Error code 6013 has been added 8 43 The example and code have been changed 8 71 E480 has been added 8 75 E726 has been changed 8 100 EAF1 has been added 8 112 113 ED15 ...

Page 1552: ...50 8651 8652 8653 8654 8655 8656 8657 8658 8659 8660 8661 8662 8663 8664 0 1 2 8667 8668 8728 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 8729 8730 8735 8736 8825 8826 8827 8831 9255 9963 have been added The details and contents of 08 6080 have been changed The default value and contents of 08 6081 0 1 have been changed The sub element item details and contents of 08 6084 6085 0 1 2 3 4 5 have been changed The ...

Page 1553: ... been changed The image has been added 4 30 The step has been added The image has been added 4 43 The steps have been added The image has been added 4 44 The steps have been added The image has been added The steps have been changed The image has been changed 4 46 The step has been changed The image has been changed 4 47 The step has been changed The note has been added 4 48 The step has been adde...

Page 1554: ... been changed The image has been changed 4 191 The step has been changed The note has been added The image has been added 4 194 The step has been changed The image has been changed 4 196 The step has been changed The step has been added The image has been added 4 198 The note has been added The image has been added 4 200 The step has been changed The image has been changed 4 203 The step has been ...

Page 1555: ...or ED15 have been changed The measure for ED16 has been added 8 111 The replacement parts for ED16 have been added The measure for EF10 has been changed 8 129 The measures for C471 and C472 have been added 8 137 The measures for C550 have been changed 8 151 The measures for CB00 and CB01 have been changed 8 160 The replacement part for CB50 has been added 8 164 The error item and measure for CB82 ...

Page 1556: ...been changed The default values acceptable values and contents of 08 2010 0 to 3 5239 0 1 5293 0 to 3 have been changed 08 2010 4 5 2048 0 to 5 2069 0 to 3 5293 4 to 5 5308 2 to 3 5310 4 to 5 5473 5476 0 to 2 5810 0 to 3 5811 0 to 3 7617 8520 8521 8783 and 8942 have been added The default values of 08 2017 0 to 2 5 2049 0 to 1 2053 0 to 1 2079 0 to 1 2080 0 to 1 2085 0 to 1 2087 0 to 1 2194 2205 0...

Page 1557: ......

Page 1558: ...1 11 1 OSAKI SHINAGAWA KU TOKYO 141 8562 JAPAN ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for e-studio 2555c

Reviews:

Toshiba e-studio 2555c, Service Manual, Page: 153 / 1558

Search results

Summary of Contents for e-studio 2555c

Reviews: